Republic of Moldova

Ministry of Transport and Road Infrastructure

State Road Administration

and

European Bank for Reconstruction and Development

from the NIF Contribution

ROAD SECTOR PROGRAM

Contract RSP/W9/01: “Construction of R1 Bahmut

Bypass, km 68+250 – km 74+177”

TENDER DOCUMENTS

PART 2 – REQUIREMENTS
Volume II

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tendering No. RSP/2017/OT/W9-1

Invitation for Tenders No. RSP/2017/OT/W9/01

Chisinau, 2017
 Volume II - Specifications

TABLE OF CONTENSE

PREAMBLE 12

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 13

0. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 13

CHAPTER 001. ACCEPTANCE OF WORKS 13

001.00. CONFORMITY WITH CONTRACT AND PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 13
001.01. TECHNICAL INSPECTION 14
001.02. CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE 14
001.03. MEASURED OR TESTED CONFORMANCE 14
CHAPTER 002. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 15
002.01. MEASUREMENT METHODS 15
002.02. MEASUREMENT TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 15
002.03. WEIGHING PROCEDURES AND DEVICES 17
002.04. ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURES 18
002.05. SCOPE OF PAYMENT 18
CHAPTER 003. MOBILISATION 19
003.01. CONTRACTOR'S SITE FACILITIES 19
003.02. PROVISION OF SERVICES 19
003.03. TEMPORARY WORKS 20
CHAPTER 004. ENGINEER'S FACILITIES 20
004.01. PROJECT OFFICE 20
004.02. CONTRACT OFFICE 20
004.03. LABORATORY OFFICE 21
004.04. LAYOUT OF ENGINEER’S CONTRACT AND LABORATORY OFFICES 21
004.05. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ENGINEER'S OFFICES 21
004.06. TEMPORARY OFFICES 22
004.07. FURNITURE FOR THE ENGINEER'S OFFICES 22
004.08. VEHICLES FOR THE ENGINEER 23
004.09. COMMUNICATION FACILITIES FOR THE ENGINEER 23
004.010. MISCELLANEOUS SERVICES FOR THE ENGINEER 23
004.011. HOUSING FOR ENGINEER 23
CHAPTER 005. LABORATORY 24
CHAPTER 006. MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS 26
006.01. QUALITY ASSURANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 26
006.02. SURVEY BEACONS AND BENCHMARKS; SETTING OUT 27
006.03. PROTECTION AND DIVERSION OF SERVICES 27
006.04. SEQUENCE OF KEY CONTRACT ACTIVITIES 28
006.05. RECORD DRAWINGS 29
CHAPTER 007. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT 29
CHAPTER 008. INSURANCES AND PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE 31
CHAPTER 009. CONTROL OF MATERIAL 32
009.01. SOURCE OF SUPPLY AND QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 32
009.02. LOCAL MATERIAL SOURCES 32
009.03. STORING AND HANDLING MATERIAL 33
009.04. USE OF MATERIAL FOUND IN THE WORK 33
CHAPTER 010. CEMENT 34
010.01. PORTLAND AND MASONRY CEMENT 34

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

Joint Venture Kocks Consult,– FinnRoad - Universinj SRL, Chisinau
I
010.02. CEMENT FOR MORTAR 34
010.03. STORAGE 34
CHAPTER 011. BITUMEN 34
011.01. BITUMEN 34
011.02. BITUMINOUS EMULSION 35
011.03. WORKING TEMPERATURE 35
CHAPTER 012. AGGREGATE, FILLER 35
012.01. AGGREGATES AND SAND FOR CEMENT MORTAR AND PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE 35
012.02. CRUSHED STONE FOR ROAD BASE, BINDER COURSE AND WEARING COURSE 35
012.03. AGGREGATES FOR BITUMINOUS MIXTURES 36
012.04. SAND 36
012.05. FILLER 36
012.06. ADDITIVES FOR CEMENT MORTAR AND CONCRETE 36
CHAPTER 013. REINFORCEMENT STEEL 36
013.01. REINFORCEMENT STEEL 36
CHAPTER 014. OTHER MATERIALS 37
014.01. WATER 37
014.02. PAINTS 37
014.03. GEOTEXTILES 37
CHAPTER 015. OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY 37
CHAPTER 016. COMPLIANCE WITH ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN REQUIREMENTS
39
016.01. REVEGETATION 39
016.02. UNNECESSARY COMPACTION OF SOIL 39
016.03. CONTAMINATION OF WATERCOURSES 39
016.04. WASTE OILS, FUEL AND BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 40
016.05. DUST 40
016.06. COVERING LOADS 40
016.07. EMISSIONS 40
016.08. NOISE LEVELS 40
016.09. NOISE BARRIERS 40
016.10. SITING OF CAMPS, ETC, DISPOSAL OF CAMP WASTE 40
016.11. OPENING AND OPERATING QUARRIES AND BORROW PITS 41
016.12. UNDESIRABLE HABITATS 41
016.13. HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 41
016.14. ACCESS ROUTES 41
016.15. CUTTING TREES 41
016.16. HUNTING, ETC. 41
016.17. ACCESS TO PROPERTIES 41
016.18. PUBLIC MEETINGS 41
016.19. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH AND SAFETY OFFICER 42

APPENDIX TO GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SPECIFICATIONS 42

1. LIST OF STANDARDS INCORPORATED BY REFERENCE 42

2. ENGINEER’S OFFICES 57
3. FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT FOR ENGINEER'S OFFICES 58

1. PREPARATORY WORKS 60

CHAPTER 101. SITE PREPARATION 60

101.01. INTRODUCTION 60
101.02. GENERAL 60
101.03. WORKS DESCRIPTION 60
101.04. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 61
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
II
CHAPTER 102. SITE CLEARANCE 62
102.01. INTRODUCTION 62
102.02. GENERALITIES 62
102.03. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 63
CHAPTER 103. DEMOLITION 63
103.01. INTRODUCTION 63
103.02. BACKFILL MATERIALS 63
103.03. THE USE OF MATERIALS 63
103.04. REMOVING MATERIAL 64
103.05. DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS 64
103.06. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 64
CHAPTER 104. NOT USED 65
CHAPTER 105. TEMPORARY ROADS AND SIGNING 65
105.01. INTRODUCTION 65
105.02. MATERIALS 65
105.03. GENERALITIES 65
105.04. BARRIERS 66
105.05. CONES 66
105.06. TEMPORARY SIGNS 66
105.07. FLAGMEN AND TRAFFIC LIGHTS 66
105.08. PROVISION OF DIVERSION ROADS 66
105.09. CONSTRUCTION OF DIVERSION ROADS 66
105.10. ILLUMINATION OF SIGNS 67
105.11. BARRIERS, CONES, TEMPORARY SIGNS 67
105.12. OPERATION OF TEMPORARY INSTALLATIONS 68
105.13. ACCEPTANCE 68

2. EARTHWORKS 69

CHAPTER 201. THE EXECUTION OF THE EARHWORKS 69

201.01. INTRODUCTION 69
201.02. EARTHWORKS 69
201.03. MATERIAL 69
201.04. PREPARATORY WORK 70
201.05. THE STOCKPILING OF TOPSOIL 70
201.06. CONSTRUCTION WORKS 70
201.07. THE OPERATION OF BORROW PITS 70
201.08. THE STOCKPILING OF MATERIAL 70
201.09. ROADBED PREPARATION 71
201.10. CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENTS 71
201.11. COMPACTION 72
201.12. CUTTING AND FINISHING OF SLOPES 72
201.13. FORMATION OF SUBGRADES 72
201.14. CONSTRUCTION AND SHAPING OF SHOULDERS 72
201.15. EXCAVATION OF BENCHES 73
201.16. GEOTEXTILES 73
201.17. EMBANKMENT EROSION PROTECTION 74
201.18. ACCEPTANCE OF WORK 75
CHAPTER 202. THE EXECUTION OF DITCHES 77
202.01. INTRODUCTION 77
202.02. PREPARATORY WORK 77
202.03. GENERAL 77
202.04. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 77
CHAPTER 203. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR STRUCTURES 78
203.01. INTRODUCTION 78
203.02. MATERIALS FOR BACKFILL 78
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
III
203.03. PREPARATION 78
203.04. GENERALITIES 78
203.05. PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION WORKS 79
203.06. BEDDING 79
203.07. BACKFILL GENERAL 80
203.08. COMPACTION 80
203.09. ACCEPTANCE 80
CHAPTER 204. SHAPING AND PLANTING OF SLOPES AND EXCAVATED SURFACES 81
204.01. INTRODUCTION 81
204.02. MATERIALS 81
204.03. SEEDING SEASON 81
204.04. GROUND PREPARATION FOR SEEDING 81
204.05. WATERING 82
204.06. FERTILIZATION 82
204.07. SEEDING AND PLANTING 82
204.08. PREPARATION OF SEEDS 82
204.09. PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE PLANTS 82
204.10. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 82
CHAPTER 205. PLANTING OF TREES AND SHRUBS 83
205.01. INTRODUCTION 83
205.02. MATERIALS 83
205.03. PLANTING SEASON 83
205.04. PLANTING 83
205.05. WATERING 83
205.06. FERTILIZATION 84
205.07. PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF THE PLANTS 84
205.08. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 84

3. PAVEMENT 84

CHAPTER 301. COLD RECYCLING OF THE ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENTS 84

CHAPTER 302. ASPHALT PAVEMENT MILLING 98
302.01. INTRODUCTION 98
302.02. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 98
302.03. MILLING 99
302.04. ACCEPTANCE 99
CHAPTER 303. WIDENING AND RECONSTRUCTION OF THE EXISTING CARRIAGEWAY AND
PROVISION OF NEW PAVEMENT 100
303.01. INTRODUCTION 100
303.02. MATERIALS 100
303.03. GENERAL INFORMATION 100
303.04. CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURE 101
303.05. WORK ACCEPTANCE 102
CHAPTER 304. PRIME AND TACK COATS FOR SUPPORTING SURFACE 103
304.01. INTRODUCTION 103
304.02. MATERIALS 103
304.03. EQUIPMENT 103
304.04. SURFACE PREPARATION 103
304.05. WEATHER CONDITIONS 104
304.06. APPLICATION OF PRIME AND TACK COATS 104
304.07. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 105
CHAPTER 305. ASPHALT CONCRETE FOR PAVEMENTS 106
305.01. INTRODUCTION 106
305.02. MATERIALS 106
305.03. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 106
305.04. MIXING EQUIPMENT 106
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
IV
305.05. ASPHALT FINISHERS 106
305.06. THE PREPARATION OF THE SUPPORTING SURFACE 107
305.07. WEATHER CONDITIONS 107
305.08. ASPHALT MIX DESIGN AND TESTING 107
305.09. BITUMEN PREPARATION 108
305.010. PREPARATION OF THE AGGREGATES 109
305.011. MIXING 109
305.012. TRANSPORT 109
305.013. SUPPLYING AND LAYING 109
305.014. COMPACTION 110
305.015. JOINTS, SHAPING AND EDGE CLEANING 111
305.016. TOLERANCES ON FINISHED WORK 111
305.017. ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURES 112
CHAPTER 306. REMOVING, RESTORING AND REPAIRING THE SHOULDERS 113
306.01. INTRODUCTION 113
306.02. MATERIALS 113
306.03. THE REMOVAL AND RECONSTRUCTION OF SHOULDERS 113
306.04. SURFACING OF THE SHOULDERS WITH ASPHALT CONCRETE 114
306.05. ACCEPTANCE OF WORKS 114
CHAPTER 307. VARIOUS ASPHALT WORKS 115
307.01. INTRODUCTION 115
307.02. ASPHALT MIXTURE FORMULA 115
307.03. PREPARATION OF SUPPORTING SURFACE 115
307.04. WEATHER LIMITS 115
307.05. TRANSPORT 115
307.06. MIXTURE LAYING 115
307.07. THE COMPACTION 115
307.08. SURFACE TOLERANCE 116
307.09. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 116
CHAPTER 308. SOIL STABILIZED WORKS 116
308.01. INTRODUCTION 116
308.02. MATERIALS 116
308.03. EQUIPMENT AND PREPARATIONS 116
308.04. CENTRAL PLANT-MIX OPERATION 117
308.05. COMPACTION 118
308.06. FINISHING 118
308.07. CURING 118
308.08. MAINTENANCE 118
CHAPTER 309. COATED MACADAM 120
309.01. GENERAL 120
309.02. AGGREGATE 120
309.03. BITUMEN 120
309.04. PREPARATION OF THE BASE OR EXISTING SURFACE 120
309.05. APPLICATION OF CHOKE AGGREGATE 120
309.06. SEAL COAT 120
309.07. PROTECTION OF PAVEMENT 120
CHAPTER 310. MEASUREMENT OF PAVEMENT ROUGHNESS 121
310.01. 121
310.02. 121
310.03. 121
310.04. MEASURING IRI 121
310.05. IRI REQUIREMENTS 123
CHAPTER 311. CEMENT-STABILIZED BASE WORKS 124
311.01. INTRODUCTION 124
311.02. MATERIALS 124
311.03. JOB FORMULA 124
311.04. EQUIPMENT AND PREPARATIONS 125
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
V
311.05. CENTRAL PLANT-MIX OPERATION 125
311.06. COMPACTION 126
311.07. FINISHING 126
311.08. CURING 127
311.09. MAINTENANCE 127

4. BRIDGES AND OVERPASSES (NOT USED) 127

CHAPTER 400. VARIOUS 127

PREPARATORY WORKS, SITE INSTALLATION, ACCOMODATION OF TRAFFIC 127
TECHNICAL SUPPORT 128
MISCELLANEOUS 128
PILE LOAD TEST 128
DYNAMIC AND STATIC LOAD TEST ON BRIDGES 129
CHAPTER 401. REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURE 129
401.01. INTRODUCTION 129
401.02. EQUIPMENT 130
401.03. DISMANTLING AND DEMOLITION OF ELEMENTS 130
401.04. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 130
CHAPTER 402. REPAIRS TO ABUTMENT EARTHWORKS 131
402.01. INTRODUCTION 131
402.02. MATERIALS 131
402.03. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 131
402.04. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 131
CHAPTER 403. CONSTRUCTION OF BRIDGE SUBSTRUCTURE (FOUNDATION, PIER AND
ABUTMENT) 132
403.01. INTRODUCTION 132
403.02. MATERIALS 132
403.03. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 132
403.04. EQUIPMENT 132
403.05. EXCAVATING FOR THE PIER FOUNDATIONS AND BACKFILLING 132
403.06. FORMWORKS 133
403.07. REINFORCING WORKS 133
403.08. CONCRETE WORKS 133
403.09. WATERPROOFING 133
403.010. WORK ACCEPTANCE 133
CHAPTER 404. CONSTRUCTION OF BRIDGE SUPERSTRUCTURE 134
404.01. INTRODUCTION 134
404.02. MATERIALS 134
404.03. EQUIPMENT 134
404.04. MOUNTING THE DECK SLABS 134
404.05. CONCRETE CASTING AND CURING OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 134
404.06. PILING 134
404.07. PRECAST CONCRETE PILES 135
404.08. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 136
CHAPTER 405. BRIDGE APPROACH SLABS 136
405.01. INRODUCTION 136
405.02. MATERIALS 136
405.03. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 137
405.04. EQUIPMENT 137
405.05. CRUSHED STONE BED FOR BACKFILL 137
405.06. NOT USED 137
405.07. CASTING AND CURING OF CONCRETE AT THE APPROACH SLAB 137
405.08. WATERPROOFING 137
405.09. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 137
CHAPTER 406. CONCRETE SAFETY PARAPET 138
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
VI
CHAPTER 407. EXPANSION JOINTS 138
407.01. INTRODUCTION 138
407.02. MATERIALS 138
407.03. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 139
407.04. MODULAR EXPANSION JOINT SPECIFICATIONS: 139
407.05. INSTALLATION 140
407.06. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 140
CHAPTER 408. WATERPROOFING 141
408.01. INTRODUCTION 141
408.02. MATERIALS 141
408.03. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 141
408.04. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 142
CHAPTER 409. SAFETY BARRIERS 142
409.01. INTRODUCTION 142
409.02. MATERIALS 142
409.03. WORKING REQUIREMENTS 142
409.04. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 143
CHAPTER 410. SURFACE WATER DISPOSAL 143
410.01. INTRODUCTION 143
410.02. MATERIALS 143
410.03. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 143
410.04. PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE UNITS 144
410.05. CONCRETE WORKS 144
410.06. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 144
CHAPTER 411. ACCESS STAIRS ON SLOPES 144
411.01. INTRODUCTION 144
411.02. MATERIALS 145
411.03. GENERAL CONDITIONS 145
411.04. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 145
CHAPTER 412. EMBANKMENT SLOPE PROTECTION 146
412.01. INTRODUCTION 146
412.02. MATERIALS 146
412.03. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 146
412.04. PROTECTION OF THE CONICAL SURFACES AT BRIDGE ABUTMENTS 146
412.05. PROTECTION TO EMBANKMENT SLOPES AT BRIDGE APPROACHES 146
412.06. PROTECTION TO RIVER BEDS BENEATH BRIDGES 147
412.07. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 147
CHAPTER 413. ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 147
413.01. DESCRIPTION 147
413.02. MATERIALS 147
413.03. CARRIAGEWAYS AND WALKWAYS 147
413.04. SHOULDERS 148
413.05. WORK ACCEPTANCE 148
CHAPTER 414. PEDESTRIAN BRIDGE RAILING 148
414.01. INTRODUCTION 148
414.02. MATERIALS 148
414.03. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 148
414.04. WORK ACCEPTANCE 149
CHAPTER 415. BRIDGE BEARINGS 149
415.01. INTRODUCTION 149
415.02. MATERIALS 149
415.03. EQUIPMENT 150
415.04. LIFTING BRIDGE DECKS FOR MOUNTING OF RUBBER BEARINGS 150
415.05. BEARING PAINTING 150
415.06. TRAFFICKING ON THE BRIDGE DECK 150
415.07. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 151

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

VII
CHAPTER 416. SLAB TO BRIDGE DECK, BRIDGE WALKWAY, PARAPET AND CONCRETE
SLOPE LAYER 151
416.01. DESCRIPTION 151
416.02. MATERIALS 151
416.03. GENERAL CONDITIONS 151
416.04. EQUIPMENT 151
416.05. FORMWORK 152
416.06. REINFORCEMENT 152
416.07. CONCRETE WORKS 152
416.08. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 152
CHAPTER 417. CONCRETE REPAIR 153
417.01. INTRODUCTION 153
417.02. MATERIALS 153
417.03. EQUIPMENT 154
417.04. REPAIR WORKS 154
417.05. CLEANING AND FILLING OF CRACKS 156
417.06. CONSOLIDATION OF REINFORCED CONCRETE PILES 156
417.07. WORK ACCEPTANCE 156

5. DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 157

CHAPTER 501. CULVERTS AND DRAINAGE FACILITIES 157

501.01. INTRODUCTION 157
501.02. GENERAL 157
501.03. JOINT SEALING 157
501.04. PIPES 157
501.05. GENERALITIES 157
501.06. EXTENSION OF THE EXISTING CULVERTS 157
501.07. REPLACEMENT OF EXISTING CULVERTS 157
501.08. CONSTRUCTION OF NEW CULVERTS 158
501.09. CULVERTS TO PROPERTY ENTRANCES AND SIDE ROADS 158
501.010. ADDITIONAL PROTECTION 158
501.011. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 158
CHAPTER 502. CLEANING, RECONDITIONING AND REPAIRING EXISTING INLETS, OUTLETS,
DRAINS, SPILLWAYS AND CHUTES (NOT USED) 160
502.01. INTRODUCTION 160
502.02. MATERIALS 160
502.03. CLEANING CULVERTS IN PLACE 160
502.04. REPAIRING OF THE EXTREMITIES OF THE CULVERTS 161
502.05. REPAIR OF DRAINS, SPILLWAYS AND CHUTES 161
502.06. CLEANING LINED SIDE DRAINS 161
502.07. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 161
CHAPTER 503. PAVED WATERWAYS (NOT USED) 161
503.01. INTRODUCTION 161
503.02. MATERIALS 162
503.03. GENERALITIES 162
503.04. CONCRETE CHUTES AND GULLIES 162
503.05. LINED SIDE DRAINS AND WATERWAY 162
503.06. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 162
CHAPTER 504. MINOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES (NOT USED) 163
504.01. INTRODUCTION 163
504.02. MATERIALS 163
504.03. CONCRETE COMPOSITION 164
504.04. GENERALITIES 164
504.05. CASTING CONCRETE 164
504.06. CURING CONCRETE 165
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
VIII
504.07. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 165
CHAPTER 505. OPEN DRAINS, SIDE DRAINS (NOT USED) 166
505.01. INTRODUCTION 166
505.02. SIDE DRAINS AND DRAINAGE DITCHES (V - DRAINS) 166
505.03. OPEN LINED DRAINS IN BUILT UP AREAS (U - DRAINS) 166
505.04. CLOSED LINED DRAINS IN BUILT UP AREAS (U - DRAINS) 166
505.05. SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE 167
505.06. CONCRETE SIDE DRAIN ON TOP OF EMBANKMENTS 167
CHAPTER 506. PROTECTION WORK 168
506.01. INTRODUCTION 168
506.02. STONE PITCHING (GROUTED) 168
506.03. RIPRAP 168
CHAPTER 507. GABIONS AND MATRESSES (NOT USED) 169
507.01. INTRODUCTION 169
507.02. GABIONS 170
507.03. MATRESSES 170
507.04. GEOTEXTILE (FILTER FABRIC) 170
507.05. CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE 171
CHAPTER 508. KERBS 171
508.01. INTRODUCTION 171
508.02. MATERIALS 171
508.03. GENERALITIES 172
508.04. PLACING KERBS 172
508.05. CURING CONCRETE 172
508.06. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 172
CHAPTER 509. DRAINS, MANHOLES, EXIT GULLY (NOT USED) 173
509.01. INTRODUCTION 173
509.02. MATERIALS 173
509.03. WORKING CONDITIONS 173
509.04. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 174

6. INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED) 174

CHAPTER 601. GUARDRAIL 174

601.01. INTRODUCTION 174
601.02. MATERIALS 174
601.03. WORKING CONDITIONS 174
601.04. GUARDRAIL SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS 175
601.05. POSTS. 175
601.06. RAIL ELEMENTS. 175
601.07. REMOVING AND RE-INSTALLING GUARDRAIL. 176
601.08. GUARD RAIL FINISHED ALIGNMENT 176
601.09. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 176
CHAPTER 602. CRASH BARRIERS 177
602.01. NEW JERSEY BARRIERS 177
602.02. METALLIC CRASH BARRIERS 177
CHAPTER 603. FENCES (NOT USED) 179
603.01. WIRE FENCES 179
603.02. SECURITY FENCE ON BRIDGES (PREVENTION OF RAILWAY OVERHEAD LINE CONTACT) 179
CHAPTER 604. RETAINING WALL 179
604.01. INTRODUCTION 179
604.02. MATERIALS 179
604.03. REINFORCEMENT 179
604.04. CONCRETE WORKS 180
604.05. GENERAL CONDITIONS. 180
604.06. ACCEPTANCE OF WORK 180
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
IX
7. ROAD MARKING AND SIGNING 182

CHAPTER 701. PERMANENT TRAFFIC CONTROL 182

701.01. INTRODUCTION 182
701.02. MATERIALS 182
701.03. GENERALITIES 182
701.04. SIGN SUPPORTS 182
701.05. SIGN PANELS 182
701.06. MARKER POSTS AND KILOMETRE POSTS 183
701.07. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 183
CHAPTER 702. PERMANENT ROAD MARKINGS 184
702.01. INTRODUCTION 184
702.02. MATERIALS 184
702.03. APPLICATION OF ROAD MARKINGS 187
702.04. CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT 188
702.05. PROTECTION 189
702.06. TOLERANCES 189
702.07. FAULTY WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIALS 189
702.08. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 189
CHAPTER 703. SIDEWALKS 191
703.01. INTRODUCTION 191
703.02. MATERIALS 191
703.03. CONSTRUCTION OF SIDE WALK 191
703.04. REPAIR OF SIDEWALK 191
703.05. WORKS ACCEPTANCE 192

8. ENGINEERING SERVICES 193

CHAPTER 801. ARRANGEMENT OF POWER LINES. ROAD ILLUMINATION 193

801.01. INTRODUCTION 193
801.02. MATERIALS 193
801.03. WORKING CONDITIONS 193
CHAPTER 802. ARANGEMENT OF COMMUNICATION LINES 194
802.01. INTRODUCTION 194
802.02. MATERIALS 194
802.03. WORKING CONDITIONS 194
CHAPTER 803. BUS STOPS 195
CHAPTER 804. CROSSING OF RAILWAY LINES (NOT USED) 195
CHAPTER 805. ANIMAL CROSSINGS (NOT USED) 196

9. LANDSLIDE REMEDIAL WORKS (NOT USED) 196

CHAPTER 901. EARTHWORK 196

901.01. INTRODUCTION 196
901.02. MATERIALS 196
901.03. EXCAVATION 196
901.04. EXCAVATION IN BORROW PITS 197
901.05. CONSTRUCTION OF EMBANKMENT ON A SLOPE MORE THAN 1:3 197
901.06. EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION 197
901.07. GEOTEXTILES 197
901.08. SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE 197
901.09. FINISHING OF SLOPES 198
901.010. SUBGRADE 198
CHAPTER 902. GEOTEXTILE FABRICS (NOT USED) 198
902.01. INTRODUCTION 198
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
X
902.02. MATERIALS 198
902.03. HANDLING AND INSTALLATION 202
902.04. ACCEPTANCE OF WORKS 203
CHAPTER 903. ACCESS ROADS (NOT USED) 203
903.01. INTRODUCTION 203
903.02. MATERIALS 203
903.03. GENERAL CONDITIONS 203
903.04. ACCEPTANCE OF WORKS 204
CHAPTER 904. BORED PILES (NOT USED) 204
904.01. INTRODUCTION 204
904.02. MATERIALS 204
904.03. PILING 205
904.04. CAPPING BEAM 206
904.05. ACCEPTANCE OF WORKS 206
CHAPTER 905. FILTER DRAIN, MANHOLES, EXIT GULLY(NOT USED) 207
905.01. THE WORKS INCLUDE: 207
905.02. MATERIALS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH: 207
905.03. WORKING CONDITIONS 207
905.04. ACCEPTANCE OF WORKS 208
CHAPTER 906. RETAINING WALL (NOT USED) 209
906.01. INTRODUCTION 209
906.02. MATERIALS 209
906.03. REINFORCEMENT 209
906.04. CONCRETE WORKS 209
906.05. GENERAL CONDITIONS 210
906.06. ACCEPTANCE OF WORKS 210

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

XI
 PREAMBLE
The Works specified under this Contract shall include all general and ancillary works and work
of any nature that is deemed necessary for the due and satisfactory construction, completion
and maintenance of the Works to the full intent and meaning of the Drawings and
Specifications, whilst complying with all Conditions of Contract whether specifically mentioned
or not in the clauses of the Specifications. The best general practice is to prevail that materials
and workmanship will be be of first quality.

The Contract may not fully describe every detail or contains specific allowances for all probable
occurrences, exceptions and contingencies. The Engineer has the authority to administer the
contract, to rule on discrepancies arising, to fulfil intentions, and to allow for construction needs
to ensure the performance and completion of the work.

The Contractor shall construct and complete the project in every detail as described in the
Drawings, the Specifications and the Bill of Quantities.

The Contractor shall consider the public interests as well as obligations and rights of all other
parties involved. The Contractor has to take full responsibility for the performance of the work
and agrees to furnish with labour, materials, equipment, tools, supplies, transportation, and
other incidentals necessary or convenient for a successful completion of the project.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

12
 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

0. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
CHAPTER 001. ACCEPTANCE OF WORKS
001.00. Conformity with Contract and Project Requirements
Wherever reference is made in the Contract to specific standards and codes to be met by the
materials, Plant, and other supplies to be furnished, and work performed or tested, the
provisions of the latest current edition or revision of the relevant standards and codes in effect
shall apply, unless otherwise expressly stated in the Contract. Where such standards and codes
are national, or relate to a particular country or region, other authoritative standards which
ensure a substantially equal or higher performance than the standards and codes specified will
be accepted subject to the Engineer’s prior review and written approval. Differences between
the standards specified and the proposed alternative standards must be fully described in
writing by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer at least 28 days prior to the date when
the Contractor desires the Engineer’s approval. In the event the Engineer determines that such
proposed deviations do not ensure substantially equal performance or that the deviations run
counter to the established legal requirements of the Employer’s country, the Contractor shall
comply with the standards specified in the documents.
The works shall be executed entirely in accordance with the requirements of the Contract,
including the requirements of this Specification. All works shall be executed in accordance with
the required lines, grades, cross - sections, dimensions, processes and material requirements
shown on the plans or specified in the contract or design documents.
The works shall be executed in compliance with the provisions of Law on quality in construction
No.271 dated February 2, 1996. The State Construction Inspectorate is empowered to initiate
controls on quality of works, laboratory tests, compliance with design, construction standards
and norms, and abovementioned Law.
Plan dimensions and contract specification values are to be complied with subject only to the
variances and tolerances specifically allowed for in this Specification. Works and materials shall
be uniform in character and meet the specified requirements.
The Engineer may inspect, sample or test all work at any time before final acceptance of the
project. When the Engineer tests work, copies of test reports are furnished to the Contractor.
Engineer's tests may or may not be performed at the work site.
Acceptable work conforming to the contract will be paid for at the contract unit bid price.
Methods of determining conformity and accepting work are described in Subsection 001.02 to
001.04 inclusive. The primary method of acceptance is specified in each Section of work.
Where appropriate, acceptance of work shall be in accordance with Sub-Clause 002.03 and
Sub-Clause 002.04 of Chapter 002.
Work shall be rejected at any time it is found not to comply with the specifications and drawings.
The initial acceptance of work does not imply that the work necessarily complies with the
Contract requirements. Work may be inspected and rechecked for conformity at any time and
work found not to conform shall be rectified or removed and replaced by the Contractor at no
cost to the Employer.
Work that does not conform to the project and contract requirements or to prevailing industry
standards where no specific contract requirements are noted, shall be removed and replaced at
no cost to the Employer.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
13
 001.01. Technical Inspection
Acceptance is based on technical inspection of executed works to confirm compliance with the
contract documents and prevailing relevant technical standards. Payment for work during the
course of the project will be made as the work progresses provided it is in compliance with the
drawings and specifications.
The Contractor shall submit checking requests to the Engineer, giving a minimum period of
notice of at least 24 hours before the scheduled commencement of works in order to allow the
Engineer time to carry out a full and detailed inspection of the works. The checking request
signed by the Engineer shall be the basis for the payment certificate.

001.02. Certification of Compliance

Where the Contractor provides materials, fabricated products and structures (hereinafter
“materials“) from a manufacturer; that manufacturer must have an effective testing and
inspection system. The Contractor shall require the manufacturer to furnish documentation from
the testing and inspection system comprising a Certificate of Compliance that certifies the
materials comply with all contract requirements.
The testing and inspection system shall conform to a quality assurance management system as
described in Sub-Clause 006.01.
The Contractor shall require the manufacturer to furnish a “product certificate” for material
commercially produced to a standard specification. The manufacturer shall clearly mark the
material or package with unique product identification.
Require the manufacturer to furnish a “product certificate” for material that:
• Is custom made for the project, or
• Is produced or shipped in bulk and therefore not readily identifiable as to manufactor
and product, or
• Has a specific contract requirement
A unique “product certificate” shall accompany each shipment of material and shall identify the
date and place of manufacture as well as the lot Pieces or other means of cross referencing to
the inspection and testing system. Furnish specific test results on material from the same lot
upon request.
Material or assemblies accepted on the basis of a Certificate of Compliance may be sampled
and tested at any time. If found not to be in conformity with the contract requirements, all the
materials or assemblies will be rejected whether in place or not until the items in place have
been individually tested and have been approved by the Engineer. Material or assemblies
supplied without a Certificate of Compliance will be rejected without further argument or
discussion and shall be removed from the site forthwith.

001.03. Measured or Tested Conformance

The Contractor shall provide all necessary control of the production, processing and
performance of the work to ensure that all of the work complies with all the contract
requirements.
Results from inspection and/or testing used to support acceptance of the work incorporated into
the project shall have values within the specified tolerances or specification limits. When no
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
14
 tolerance values are identified in the contract, the work will be accepted based on customary
manufacturing and construction tolerances.

CHAPTER 002. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

002.01. Measurement Methods
Accepted work will be measured according to the metric, International System of Units (SI)
system. Unless otherwise specified, measurement will be made when the work is in place,
complete, and accepted. Measurements will be made for the actual quantity of work performed.
Structures will be measured to the net lines shown on the plans or to approved lines that have
been adjusted to fit field conditions.
The “measurement” subsections detailing specifics and exceptions for measuring work are
described under each Section.

002.02. Measurement Terms and Definitions

Unless otherwise specified, the meanings of the following terms are as follows:
(a) Provisional sum
Perform the work only when authorized by written order from the Engineer. The work will be
measured and paid for at agreed unit prices, or lump sum price, as established in the order
authorizing the work. When the unit bid price is designated “provisional sum”, the quantity is
designated as “All”.
(b) Contract quantity
The contract quantity is the quantity shown in the Bill of Quantities; these quantities are
estimated and provisional. The contract quantities will be adjusted for authorized changes that
affect the quantity or for errors made in computing this quantity, and in accordance with the
quantities as ordered and carried out, and as measured by the Contractor and verified by the
Engineer. If there is evidence that a quantity specified as a contract quantity is incorrect, the
Contractor shall submit calculations, drawings or other evidence indicating why the quantity is in
error and request, in writing, that the quantity be adjusted.
(c) Cubic Metre of Earthworks
Unless the Engineer directs that other means are to be used the volume will be measured by
the average end area method as follows:
(1) Take cross sections of the original ground and use with design or staked templates or
take other comparable measurements to determine the end areas. Work outside of the
established lines or slopes will not be measured.
(2) If any portion of the work is acceptable but is not completed to the established lines
and slopes, take remeasure cross sections or comparable measurements of that portion of
the work. Use these measurements to calculate new end areas.
(3) Compute the quantity using the average end areas multiplied by the horizontal
distance along a centreline or reference line between the end areas. Deduct any quantity
determined outside the designed or stakes slope limits. Where it is impractical to measure
by the average end area method, other methods involving three dimensional
measurements may be used.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

15
 (d) Cubic Metre in the hauling vehicle
The cubic Metre volume will be measured in the hauling vehicle using three dimensional
measurements at the point of delivery. Use vehicles bearing a legible identification mark with
the body shaped so the actual contents may be readily and accurately determined. Before use,
mutually agree in writing on the volume of material to be hauled by each vehicle. Vehicles
carrying less than the agreed volume may be rejected or accepted at the reduced volume.
Level selected loads. If levelling reveals the vehicle has been hauling less than the approved
volume, all material received since the last levelled load will be reduced by the same ratio as
the current levelled load volume is to the agreed volume.
Material measured in the hauling vehicle may be weighed and converted to cubic Metres for
payment purposes if the conversion factors are mutually agreed to in writing.
There will be no separate pay item for the haulage of materials, it shall be deemed to be
included in the relevant pay items.
(d) Pieces
One entire unit. The quantity is the actual Pieces of units completed and accepted.
(e) Liter
The quantity may be measured by any of the following methods:
(1) Measured volume container.
(2) Metreed volume. Use approved Metreing system.
(3) Commercially packaged volumes.
When asphalt material is measured by the litre, the volume will be measured at 15°C or will be
corrected to a volume at 15°C using recognized standard correction factors.
(f) Hour
Measurement will be for the actual Pieces of hours ordered and performed by the Contractor.
(g) Linear Metre
Measurement will be from end to end parallel to the base or foundation upon which the item is
placed.
(I) Lump sum
No direct measurement will be made. The bid amount is complete payment for all work as
described in the contract and necessary to complete all the work for that item. The quantity is
designated as “All”.
The estimate quantities of lump sum work shown in the contract are approximate.
(j) KiloMetre
1000 linear Metres. Measurement will be horizontal along the centreline of each roadway,
approach road, or ramp.
(k) Kilogram
The weight measured according to Sub-Clause 002.03. If sacked or packaged material is
furnished, the net weight as packed by the manufacturer may be used.
(l) Square Metre
Longitudinal and transverse measurements for area computation will be made horizontally.
Where a pavement structure course is measured by square Metre, the width of measurement
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
16
 will be the top design width of the course plus allowable curve widening, not including side
slopes. The length will be the distance measured horizontally along the centreline of each
roadway, approach road, or ramp.
(m) Station
100 linear Metres. Measurement will be horizontal along the centreline of each roadway,
approach road, or ramp.
(n) Ton
1000 kilograms. Measurement will be according to Sub-Clause 002.03.
No adjustment in contract unit price will be made for variations in quantity due to differences in
the specific gravity or moisture content.
Net certified scale weights, or weights based on certified volumes in the case of rail shipments
will be used as a basis of measurement subject to correction when asphalt material is lost from
the car or the distributor, wasted, or otherwise not incorporated in the work. When asphalt
material is shipped by truck or transport, net certified weights, subject to correction for loss or
foaming, may be used for computing quantities.
When asphalt cement for concrete pavement is stored in tanks devoted exclusively to the
project, quantities will be based on invoices. When asphalt cement for asphalt concrete
pavement is not stored in tanks devoted exclusively to the project, quantities will be based on
the tank measurements, converted to volumes.

002.03. Weighing Procedures and Devices

Furnish, erect and maintain scales or use permanently installed and certified commercial scales
for weighing material that are proportioned or measured and paid for by weight.
If bulk material is shipped by truck or rail and is not passed through a mixing plant, the
supplier’s invoice with net weights or volumes converted to weights may be accepted. Periodic
check-weighing may be required.
Batch weights may be acceptable for determination of pay quantities when an approved
automatic weighing, cycling, and monitoring system is included as part of the batching
equipment.
Before use at a new site, have the scale checked, adjusted, and certified by an approved testing
firm, a laboratory of the State responsible for weights and measures, or a qualified
manufacturer’s representative. Maintain the scale accuracy to within 0,5% of the correct weight
throughout the range of use. Do not use spring balances.
Install and maintain platform scales with the platform level with rigid bulkheads at each end.
Make the platform of sufficient length to permit simultaneous weighing all axle loads of the
hauling vehicle. Coupled vehicles may be weighed separately or together.
When a weighing device is determined to indicate less than true weight, no additional payment
will be made for material previously weighed and recorded. When a weighing device is
determined to indicate more than true weight, all material received after the last previously
correct weighing accuracy test will be reduced by the percentage of error in excess of 0,5%.
Furnish competent scale operators to weigh and record the gross, tare, and net weights of all
material measured by weight. Read and record weights to the nearest 50 kilograms. Increments
smaller than 50 kilograms are permitted for automatic weighing systems.
Weigh the empty haulage vehicles on platform scales with full fuel tanks at least twice per shift.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

17
 Documents that support weighed pay quantities shall contain the following information, as
applicable, to the type of scales and recording system used:
(a) Project identification
(b) Contract item Pieces
(c) Material source/plant identification
(d) Date
(e) Load Pieces
(f) Truck identification
(g) Time of weighing
(h) Applicable empty and loaded weights
(i) Scale operator‘s signature
Use an approved pre-printed format for the weigh records; furnish the original record(s) and a
written certification as to the accuracy of the weights at end of each shift.

002.04. Acceptance Procedures

When the method of measurement requires weighing or volume measurement in the hauling
vehicle, furnish a person to direct the spreading and distribution of material and to record the
location and placement of material on the project. During the placement, maintain a record of
each delivery and document it in an acceptable manner. The document shall include the
following information as applicable:
(a) Project identification
(b) Contact pay item Pieces and description
(c) Location where placed
(d) Date
(e) Load Pieces
(f) Truck identification
(g) Time of arrival
(h) Weight or volume
(i) Site supervisor’s signature.
Use an approved format for the delivery record(s). Furnish the original record(s) and a written
certification of the delivery of the material at the end of each shift.

002.05. Scope of payment

Compensation provided for in the contract is full payment for performing all contract work in a
complete and acceptable manner. All risk, loss damage, or expense arising out of the nature or
prosecution of the work is included in the compensation provided by the contract.
If the contract requires work to be executed and there is no provision for the direct
measurement of the work by the payment Section or no pay item specifically established for the
work, there will be no direct payment for the work. The cost of the work is considered included
under the other contract pay items.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
18
 Work measured and paid for less than one pay item will not be paid for under any other pay
item.
The quantities shown in the bid schedule are approximate. Pay quantities will be limited to the
quantities actually ordered, or otherwise authorized before performing the work. Payment will be
made for work performed and accepted or material furnished according to the contract on the
basis of the authorised quantities or for the actual quantities of work executed and accepted
where such quantities are less than those authorised. No payment will be made for work
performed in excess of that staked, ordered, or otherwise authorized.

CHAPTER 003. MOBILISATION

003.01. Contractor's Site Facilities
The Contractor shall find his own site or sites for setting up one or more compounds in which to
locate his offices, workshops, stores, plant, etc. The sites shall include space for the Engineer's
offices and the laboratory, as described below, or shall be close to the location of these
facilities. The Contractor is required to have definite drawings for the necessary sites at an
early stage and must show that he has guaranteed access to suitable sites and outline
permission to occupy and use such sites.
The Contractor shall at all times keep the compounds in good order and shall maintain all
facilities. He shall take measures to ensure that his operations do not cause pollution of
watercourses or ground water. These measures shall include, but shall not be limited to, bunds
round storage areas for hazardous materials and hard standings with fuel traps for vehicle
washing areas and fuel stations.
On completion of the Works the Contractor shall remove his offices, workshops, stores, plant,
fencing, hard-standing, etc, clear the site and carry out any other works necessary to return the
site(s) to the same condition in which it was found.
The Contractor shall locate his own areas for the disposal of waste and unwanted materials,
complying with local regulations and procedures for transport and disposal.
Contractor’s Equipment shall be operated and maintained in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. Equipment shall be fitted with noise suppression and emission
control devices in accordance with current technologies and which satisfy local regulations.

003.02. Provision of Services

The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for and provide and distribute to all points
where they are required such supplies of water, fuel, light and power as may be needed for the
construction of the Works. He shall ensure that adequate supplies of water, light and power are
available in offices and other buildings requiring them. He shall also ensure that sufficient
supplies of drinking water are available on site for the workforce. The Contractor shall be
entirely responsible for entering into any necessary agreements with the suppliers of services
and paying all fees, dues, rents and other costs incurred thereby. As in the case of any other
supplier, a failure on the part of a supplier of services will not relieve the Contractor of any of his
duties and responsibilities under the Contract, nor in respect of such failure shall the Contractor
have any claim under the Contract.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
19
 The Contractor shall, if necessary, provide generators, substations, switchgear, transformers,
cabling, pumping plant, tanks, piping, filters and other things needed to maintain services to the
Works.

003.03. Temporary Works

The Contractor shall design, arrange and provide at his own cost all temporary works needed in
order to carry out the permanent works. The temporary works shall include the provision of road
diversions where considered necessary. All temporary works shall be to the satisfaction of the
Engineer, but this shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for their design,
maintenance and adequacy. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of Ministries, service
owners, local authorities and other third parties for the temporary works where required.
Temporary road diversions shall be designed and constructed to ensure that they perform
satisfactorily in use and that there is no significant settlement, rutting or distortion of the running
surface. They shall be surfaced and maintained to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Contractor may, design and construct any approved temporary diversion road and bridge
scheme, provided the construction provided the construction does not extend outside the
boundaries of the land arranged by the Employer (if any). If the Contractor chooses to use any
outline design provided he shall make his own arrangements to locate, procure and transport on
and off site the elements required. The Employer accepts no responsibility for the non-
availability of elements shown in any outline design. If the Contractor elects to design and
construct his own scheme then he shall arrange for all necessary approvals from local
authorities, river authorities, etc. and shall obtain the approval of the Engineer for the detailed
scheme including traffic management arrangements.
On completion of the Works the Contractor shall remove all temporary road diversions and
other temporary works and reinstate the ground on which they have been located to its original
condition or to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Measurement
No direct payment will be made for Mobilisation; in accordance with the Contract the Employer
will make an Advance Payment against a suitable Guarantee which shall be used to cover
immediate mobilisation costs.
The conditions governing payment and repayment of the Advance Payment are given in the
Contract Data attached to the Conditions of Contract.

CHAPTER 004. ENGINEER'S FACILITIES

004.01. Project Office
Not Used.

004.02. Contract Office

The Contractor shall provide, furnish and maintain a contract office for use by the Engineer and
his staff on the site of the Works. The contract office shall be at a location provided by the
Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
The required floor area and Pieces of rooms are indicated in Sub-Clause 004.04 below and the
Appendix to these General Requirements.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
20
 Basic required details of the office buildings together with details of the site arrangements are
given in Sub-Clause 004.04. below.
The office shall be provided with new furnishings and fittings as specified in paragraph 004.07
below and the Appendix to these General Requirements.
The office building shall be completed and ready for occupation and use by the Engineer within
12 weeks from the Commencement Date. Failure to comply with this requirement will result to a
penalty of 1000 EURO/ day calculated from the end of the 12 week period, but should not
exceed 2% of the Contract price. On completion of the Contract, the office shall be demolished
and removed from the site and the office location wholly restored to its original condition or, in
the case of a brownfield site, shall be landscaped and revegetated to an acceptable standard.

004.03. Laboratory Office

The Contractor shall provide within the site laboratory specified in Section 005 below an office
for use by the Engineer as specified in Sub-Clause 004.04 and Sub-Clause 004.05 and the
Appendix to these General Requirements.
The office shall be provided with new furnishings, fittings and equipment as specified in Sub-
Clause 004.07 below and the Appendix to these General Requirements.
The office for use by the Engineer shall be available at the same time as the laboratory
becomes operational.

004.04. Layout of Engineer’s Contract and Laboratory Offices

The Contractor shall submit details of all works necessary for the completion of the offices to the
Engineer for approval based on the requirements of the whole of Chapter 004 and the Appendix
to these General Requirements defining floor areas and Pieces of rooms.The details of each
office shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval within 28 days of the Letter of Acceptance.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining any necessary permits, licences, etc. for the
work involved in providing the offices.

004.05. General Requirements for Engineer's Offices

A paved access road from the highway shall be provided to each office complex and covered
hardstanding shall be constructed to accommodate the Pieces of vehicles specified in the
Appendix to these General Requirements. Each office complex and its covered and open
hardstanding shall be surrounded by a 1.8 metre high security fence at least four metres from
any external wall of the office. A lockable gate, sufficient for vehicle entry, shall be provided in
the fence The area within the fencing shall be well lit.
Throughout the construction period and for as long thereafter during the Defects Liability Period
as the Engineer may require, the offices shall be maintained, repaired and serviced by the
Contractor.
All buildings shall be insulated and weatherproof suitable for the climate. All windows shall be
double glazed and have opening sashes. Entrances shall be provided with two sets of doors.
Natural lighting and ventilation shall be provided to each room but adequate electric lighting
shall be provided for working during periods of darkness. Every room shall be provided with at
least three earthed electric power points with a total supply of 4 kilowatt per room.
Each room shall be provided with a split unit heating/cooling air conditioning unit suitable to
maintain an internal temperature of 20°C to 25°C whatever the external temperature.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
21
 Ceiling heights shall be at least 2.6 metres.
Each building shall have an enclosed entrance lobby overlooked by one of the rooms.
Each kitchenette shall contain a sink, two base and two wall cupboards, a 150 litre refrigerator
and a two-ring electric hotplate.
Wash-hand basins, showers and kitchenette sinks shall be provided with constant hot and cold
water.
The layout, design, materials, workmanship, finishes, fittings and furnishings shall all be to the
satisfaction on the Engineer.
The offices shall be properly cleaned by the Contractor daily for as long as they are required by
the Engineer. Repairs to the buildings, contents and equipment, together with all services, shall
be carried out by the Contractor immediately the need arises.
The Contractor shall make all arrangements for, and pay for, all necessary charges for
installation and the continuous provision and maintenance of the following services to the
offices:
(a) Electricity for lighting and power,
(b) Air-conditioning and heating,
(c) Fresh potable water,
(d) Hot water,
(e) Disposal of sewage and waste water,
(f) Disposal of solid waste,
(g) International and local telephone and facsimile lines.

004.06. Temporary Offices

Pending completion of the Contract Office specified above, the Contractor shall provide
temporary office accommodation at or near the site at a location to be approved by the Engineer
for the use of the Engineer. This temporary office accommodation shall be provided within 21
days of the Commencement Date and before the Contractor commences the Permanent Works
on site. The temporary office accommodation shall have at least 60% of the required floor area
of the permanent office, shall be furnished and equipped to the Engineer’s requirements to a
level not exceeding that specified for the permanent office, shall have adequate washing and
sanitary, and heating and cooling facilities and shall be maintained by the Contractor.
Furnishings for the temporary office may be new furnishings and equipment which will
subsequently form part of the furnishings of the permanent office.

004.07. Furniture for the Engineer's Offices

The Contractor shall supply new furniture and equipment as required by the Engineer of good
quality suitable for hard and prolonged use. The list given in the Appendix of these General
Requirements is indicative of the requirements but the Engineer reserves the right to make
minor alterations to the list when the Contractor's organizational arrangements and the detailed
layout of the offices are known. The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Engineer for all
items before purchase.
In addition to furnishings the Contractor shall supply at least two licensed copies of any
proprietary software which the Contractor utilises for the design, control, planning and operation

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

22
 of the works. The computer software shall be in the English language and shall be licensed for
use by the Engineer. The Contractor shall supply a complete set of operating manuals, in
English, for all software.
All furniture procured for the offices shall revert to the Contractor at the end of the Contract or at
such time that the offices are no longer required by the Engineer.

004.08. Vehicles for the Engineer

The Contractor is not required to provide vehicles for the Engineer.

004.09. Communication Facilities for the Engineer

The Contractor shall provide separate, direct international and local telephone lines and
broadband internet access at the laboratory and contract offices. The Contractor shall allow for
the purchase of the equipment and for rental, servicing and subscription costs and fees. The
charges for international calls will be borne by the Engineer. The communication facilities shall
be available at the same time as the offices in which they are located. Temporary offices shall
be provided with at least local telephone and internet access services.
The Contractor shall pay all charges in connection with the use of these phones which shall be
for non-international calls only. At the end of the Contract, and when no longer required by the
Engineer, all communications equipment will revert to the Contractor.
004.010. Miscellaneous Services for the Engineer
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with safety helmets, safety shoes, rubber boots,
reflective jackets and any other necessary protective clothing. Sufficient items shall be provided
for the Engineer's staff and visitors.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with such assistance as he may require at all times
including weekends as assistance to the Engineer in the control and supervision of the works.
Such assistance shall include, but not be limited to, assistance with sampling, laboratory testing
and surveying. The Contractor shall provide men equal to the tasks required and shall maintain
continuity of employment wherever possible.

004.011. Housing for Engineer

The Contractor is not required to provide housing for the Engineer.
Measurement
The Engineer’s Contract office will be paid for as a lump sum to include all specified furnishing
and equipment.
The lump sum for the Contract Office will be paid when the offices are handed over for use to
the Engineer, complete and furnished, with all services connected and operational. A part
payment may be made in respect of furnishings and if these are supplied for use in temporary
offices as foreseen in Sub-Clause 004.06 above. Any such payment shall be not more than
75% of the demonstrated invoiced net cost of the items supplied.
If the office is to be removed at the conclusion of the works then the lump sum shall be split into
70% and 30% elements with 70% to be paid when the office is handed over to the Engineer and
the remaining 30% to be paid only when the building has been demolished and the site restored
to its original condition, or, in the case of a brownfield site, when the site has been landscaped
and revegetated to an acceptable standard.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
23
 There will be no separate pay item for the Engineer’s Laboratory office. The provision of this
office including all specified furnishing and equipment will be deemed to be included in the pay
item for the Laboratory.
No separate payment will be made for the maintenance and provision of services to the
Engineer’s office and laboratory office.
In the event that the Contractor fails to complete the works by the due date no payment will be
made for maintenance of offices, or for the provision of services for the period between the
scheduled completion date and the actual date of taking over. During this period the Contractor
will be required to provide all maintenance and services to the Engineer at his own cost.
In the event that the Contractor fails to provide any of the items or services required under the
contract for the Engineer, the Engineer shall provide such items or services and shall be
reimbursed for them by the Employer. The cost of such provision by the Engineer shall be
deducted from payments due to the Contractor and such deductions shall not be limited to the
amounts calculated on the basis of the rates and prices in the Bill of Quantities but shall be the
full cost of such provision as notified by the Engineer to the Employer.
Payment

No. Item Unit of Measure

00401 Provide and furnish contract office Lump-sum

00402 Maintain contract office Month

CHAPTER 005. LABORATORY

The Contractor shall construct, to his own design, and as approved by the Engineer, a new
building or a prefabricated building or shall refurbish a part of or the whole of an existing
building to form the main laboratory for carrying out sampling and testing as required by the
Specifications. The laboratory shall be on the site of, or close to the Contractor's main offices
and convenient for the Engineer's contract office. The Laboratory shall be for the joint use of the
Contractor and the Engineer.
The laboratory shall be of robust construction with smooth cleanable internal surfaces. It shall
be insulated, heated, cooled and weatherproof suitable for the climate. The size and layout of
the laboratory shall be appropriate for carrying out all sampling and testing of materials and
workmanship. It shall contain special storage rooms for samples of materials etc. to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The building shall be provided with adequate ventilation and
heating, with special ventilation and fume extraction provisions as necessary. A paved access
road from the highway shall be provided and a hardstanding shall be constructed of sufficient
area to permit the parking and manoeuvring of four vehicles belonging to the Engineer together
with such additional space as may be required by the Contractor for his own vehicles. The
building shall be within the Contractor's compound security area or shall have its own security
fencing with lockable gate. The building shall contain an office for the Engineer as specified in
Chapter 004 [Engineer’s Facilities] and the Appendix to these General Requirements.
On completion of the Contract the Laboratory building shall be demolished and the materials
removed from the site which shall be wholly restored to its original condition or, in the case of a
brownfield site, shall be landscaped and revegetated to an acceptable standard
The laboratory shall be set up in accordance with any requirements of the Department for
Measurements and Standards and with the requirements of this Contract. The Contractor shall

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

24
 provide the equipment and consumables necessary for carrying out all the sampling, testing and
recording required by the Specifications and any additional testing instructed by or undertaken
by the Engineer. The stock of equipment and consumables shall allow for usage, breakage,
deterioration and replacement. All testing equipment, apparatus, etc. must be maintained in a
clean and serviceable state and shall be checked and/or calibrated at required intervals. An
uninterrupted power supply to be established with continuous water (hot and cold) supply
throughout the project period in the laboratory, if necessary a generator with adequate capacity
to be provided. In the laboratory gas shall be available all through the project time. A good
sanitation shall be maintained through out the contract period.
The Contractor shall also provide mobile facilities for sampling and testing which should or can
be carried out in the field at the location of the Works.
The Contractor shall staff the laboratory with a qualified engineer and technicians fully
experienced in all sampling and testing procedures relevant to the Works. The engineer and
technicians shall be supported by an adequate Pieces of laboratory and field labourers.
The building shall be maintained, repaired and serviced by the Contractor whilst in use under
the Contract and shall at all times be kept in a clean and tidy state.
The Contractor shall allow the Engineer unrestricted access to the laboratory so that he can
witness any testing, inspect equipment, samples, records, etc. The Contractor shall undertake
any additional tests required by the Engineer under the Contract and shall allow the Engineer to
carry out his own tests for the Contract, using the Contractor’s technical personnel as
necessary.
The laboratory shall be completed and ready for use within 12 weeks of the Commencement
Date. If the Contractor commences any selection or testing of materials for submission to the
Engineer for approval or commences any Permanent Works before the laboratory is operational
then approved alternative facilities must be available to carry out all tests required for the works
in progress or the approval of materials submitted to the full requirements of the Specifications.
The new bought laboratory equipment and apparatus shall remain the property of the Employer
and shall be removed from the site of the Works when no longer required by the Engineer and
in any case no later than the end of the Defects Liability Period, unless directed otherwise in the
Particular Conditions.
Measurement
The provision and equipping of the laboratory as described above will be paid for as a Lump
Sum. The sum quoted shall include for any temporary alternative testing facilities.
The Contractor shall provide with his bid a list of all necessary testing equipment for approval by
the Engineer and the provision of all equipment, installed and in working order, on the approved
list shall qualify as the provision of laboratory equipment for payment purposes. The provision of
such a list and its approval by the Engineer and the delivery of the equipment on the list shall
not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to provide ALL necessary equipment for carrying
out all tests which may be required for the approval of the works and the Contractor shall
remain liable to supply any and all additional equipment which may be found necessary under
the terms of the Contract during the execution of the Works.
Payment
The Lump Sum for the provision, equipping and operation of the laboratory will be paid as
follows:
• 40% upon delivery of fully operational laboratory.
• 40% payable in instalments with each monthly certificate on a pro rata basis to the
value of the work done excluding the General Items.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
25
 • 20% payable when the building has been demolished and the site restored to to its
original condition, or, in the case of a brownfield site, when the site has been
landscaped and revegetated to an acceptable standard.

No. Item Unit of Measure

00501 Provide site laboratory including office for The Engineer Lump-sum

CHAPTER 006. MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENTS

006.01. Quality Assurance Management System
The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for ensuring that the quality of materials and
workmanship is in accordance with the requirements of this Specification and of the Conditions
of Contract. The Contractor shall carry out his own inspection of materials and workmanship
and satisfy himself that they meet the Specifications before offering them to the Engineer for
acceptance or payment.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer within 56 days of the Commencement
Date a written quality assurance management system similar to that described in the ISO 9000
series of standards. Failure to comply with this requirement will result to a penalty of 1000
EURO/ day calculated from the end of the 56 days period, but should not exceed 0,5% of the
Contract price. This shall show the Contractor's site organization in respect of quality assurance
and shall demonstrate the Contractor's commitment to checking and reporting on the quality of
materials and workmanship. It shall also show how the system will be extended to suppliers and
sub-contractors and how all elements of the system will be documented.

The Contractor shall, before placing any order for materials for incorporation in the Works,
submit for the information of the Engineer the names of the firms from whom he proposes to
obtain such materials. He shall give descriptions, manufacturer's specifications, the quality,
weight, strength and origin of the materials, as applicable, and confirm the quantities to be
procured. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with samples of materials when requested,
details of the supplier's quality assurance system and, where appropriate, manufacturer's
certificates of recent tests carried out on similar materials. In accordance with Clause 7.3 of the
Conditions of the Contract the Engineer may require to visit the facilities of any manufacturer or
supplier.
The Contractor shall carry out trials of all concrete mixes, bituminous mixes and mixtures of
others materials to demonstrate that, not only are the constituents in compliance with the
Specifications, but that the resultant mixtures also comply. He shall show as part of the quality
assurance system the relationship between trial and job mixes and his proposals for maintaining
the quality of all mixes on site.
The Contractor shall keep a Non-conformity register and a Concession Request register that
shall be copied to the Engineer each month. Concession requests for materials or work that
does not meet the requirements of the Specifications (as recorded in the non-conformity
register) shall be forwarded to the Engineer as a part of the routine Quality Assurance
inspection system (Request for Inspection System). Requests for Inspection of the works shall
generally be forwarded to the Engineer not later than 17h00 for works to be carried out on the
following day, to enable the Engineer to allocate personnel to do the independent checking.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

26
 006.02. Survey Beacons and Benchmarks; Setting Out
Main beacons and benchmarks for defining the Works have been established on or near the
road during the preparation of this project. Details will be given to the Contractor in writing by
the Engineer before commencement of permanent works. In order to carry out his duties under
Clause 4.7 of the Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall establish from the beacons and
benchmarks an adequate system of secondary benchmarks and control points for the execution
of the Works which shall be clearly marked, adequately referenced and carefully recorded. The
Contractor shall be solely responsible for carrying out this work and for the protection and re-
establishment, if necessary, of all primary and secondary setting-out points.
Should the Contractor find any discrepancies in the survey information provided, he shall
immediately inform the Engineer in writing.
The Engineer may check the Contractor's system of secondary benchmarks and control points
for the purpose of agreeing the setting out and measurement of the Works. The Contractor shall
do everything necessary to facilitate any checking which may be carried out by the Engineer
and shall safeguard any marks established by the Engineer during checking. The checking of
any setting-out or of any line or level by the Engineer shall not in any way relieve the Contractor
of his responsibility for the accuracy thereof.
In the case of foundations, earthworks or where the Engineer considers it necessary, the
Contractor shall, in conjunction with the Engineer, take such original ground levels or other
measurements as may be necessary to define the conditions prior to the start of work. Agreed
levels and dimensions shall be recorded in writing, signed by the Contractor and Engineer, and
shall form the basis of the measurement of such works.
The Contractor shall prepare Construction Drawings of all works to be undertaken, and shall
submit these for the Engineer’s approval in sufficient time for the review and approval of the
Engineer. This shall be prior to the commencement of works in any section, and in any event
not less than 7 days prior to commencing works related to the particular Drawings.
In the case of Construction Drawings for road pavement works, the Contractor shall, in
conjunction with the Engineer, take existing levels of the road cross sections at intervals agreed
with the Engineer, but in any case at a maximum interval of 10 metres. The Contractor shall
prepare a revised longitudinal profile if necessary, for the Engineer’s approval. The pavement
cross-section drawings produced by the Contractor shall indicate both existing and finished
levels, including different pavement layers as appropriate. The Contractor shall prepare
Construction Drawings based on the design implicit in the contract drawings in sufficient detail
to allow the works to constructed and measured accordingly. For this, the Contractor shall
provide relevant quantities and surface areas when the Construction Drawings are provided to
the Engineer for approval.

006.03. Protection and Diversion of Services

Wherever an existing overhead or underground installation carrying live services (gas, water,
electric power, telephone, etc.) is to be diverted in order to perform the Works, the Contractor
shall carry out this work in accordance with the prior approvals obtained by the Employer from
the owners regarding diversion/removal of services shown on the Drawings. Whenever during
the execution of the Works the Contractor locates service installations which require
diversion/removal and which are not shown on the drawings, he shall immediately notify the
Engineer. The Engineer will liaise with the Employer and owner of the service to obtain the
necessary approvals.
In the case of service installations within or close to the Site but which do not require
diversion/removal, the Contractor shall be wholly responsible for the support and protection of
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
27
 the service during adjacent permanent works to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner
of the service.
The Contractor shall inform the relevant office of the owner of any service which is damaged
during the course of the Works and shall, at his own cost, repair the damage or arrange for the
service owner to do the repairs or arrange for a third party acceptable to the service owner to do
the repairs.
Contractor shall be responsible for the liaison with the concerened authorities having
jurisdiction.

006.04. Sequence of Key Contract Activities

Within the 28 day period from the Letter of Acceptance the Contractor is required to have:
• executed the Contract Agreement (Sub-Clause 1.6, Conditions of Contract);
• submitted an acceptable Performance Security; (Sub-Clause 4.2, Conditions of
Contract).
A notice to commence the works shall be issued by the Engineer in accordance with Sub-
Clause 8.1 of the Conditions of Contract. However permanent works shall not commence until
the Contractor has satisfied the Engineer regarding the following:
• arranged all insurances (Clause 18 of the Conditions of Contract);
• provided permanent or temporary offices for the Engineer as specified;
• provided a functioning laboratory or made approved alternative arrangements;
• submission of the names and details of key personnel;
• in the case of roadworks, provided a traffic management plan acceptable to the Road
Traffic Police.

The Contractor shall provide a detailed programme according to Sub-Clause 8.3 of the
Conditions of Contract within 28 days of receiving the notice to commence the works. This shall
include the following:
• a detailed time schedule including allowance for the Contractor’s Documents
(Construction Drawings), materials approval and procurement, manufacture of
permanent Plant for the works (if any), delivery to Site, construction and testing;
• a time schedule that identifies the sequence, frequency and timing of tests required in
the Contract in conjunction with the item above;
• a general method statement for the Works;
• an estimate of the Pieces and class of Contractor’s Personnel and Contractor’s
Equipment required for each activity;
• a cash flow in conjunction with the first item above.

Failure to comply with this requirement will result to a penalty of 1000 EURO/ day calculated
from the end of the 28 days period, but should not exceed 0,5% of the Contract price.
At the time that possession of site is given, a site inspection shall take place , attended by
representatives of the Engineer, the Contractor and the Employer, to record the general
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
28
 conditions and locations of road signs, street furniture and any other items, and to determine the
measures necessary to safeguard such facilities.

006.05. Record Drawings

The Contractor shall prepare and provide to the Engineer accurate record drawings to the same
general scales as the contract drawings, showing Works as executed complete with original and
finished levels. The record drawings must show all significant features of the rehabilitation
works so as to form a complete pictorial record of the finished Works. The record drawings are
part of the Contract Documents, and shall be based on the Construction Drawings referred to in
Subsection 006.02 above, modified according to any instruction received from the Engineer
during construction. The Drawings shall show details of all utilities affected by the Works.
During the course of the work, the Engineer shall have the right to call for records drawings so
that he may check them for accuracy and completeness. The record drawings shall be
reproducible and the original and two prints shall be submitted to the Engineer as soon as
possible after the work is complete but no later than the end of the Defects Notification Period.
Payment
Payment for the requirements set out in Chapter 006 [Miscellaneous Requirements], shall be
deemed to be included elsewhere within the cost items of the Bill of Quantities, except as
hereinafter specified, and where no payment is clearly specified elsewhere in this document the
costs of actions necessary to fulfil these requirements shall be deemed to be included within the
existing cost items of the Bill of Quantities.

CHAPTER 007. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT

The Contractor shall take note of the fact that the rehabilitation works are to be carried out while
maintaining traffic flows and that the works will, in general, have to be undertaken in half-widths
of the road. Road closures will not generally be permitted.
The Contractor shall, throughout the execution of the Works and the Defects Liability Period
have full regard for the safety of all persons, whether entitled to be on the Site or otherwise, and
keep the Site (so far as the same is under his control) and the Works in an orderly state
appropriate to the avoidance of danger to such persons. The Contractor shall provide and
maintain all lights, barriers and warning signs, when and where necessary as hereinafter
specified for the protection of the Works and for the safety and convenience of the public.
The Contractor shall use all appropriate means to avoid traffic disturbance during the Works.
Before the Commencement Date he shall submit for the Engineer's approval an outline traffic
management scheme. The scheme shall accompany and shall be coordinated with the
construction programme required under Sub-Clause 8.3 of the Conditions of Contract.
Traffic management schemes with their signs, markings, signalling and lighting shall be in
accordance with Moldovan standards, as set out in Methodological Norms regarding conditions
for traffic restrictions during execution of road works within public road area approved by joint
order of Ministry of Internal Affairs and Ministry of Transport and Road Infrastructure
No.194/108, dated May 25, 2005, for every road restriction or diversion. A detailed scheme shall
be submitted for the Engineer's approval before any road restriction or diversion is
implemented. Management schemes shall include;
• A detailed diagram showing the location of all traffic control devices, including advance

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

29
 warning and speed limit signs, arrangements for lane closure, including lengths to be
closed and duration of closures, location of flagmen or traffic control signals, means of
communication between flagmen.
• A tabulation of all traffic control devices shown on the diagram.
• An access maintenance plan for all properties along the road length subject to
restriction/ diversion.
• Provision for pedestrians.
Schemes shall be submitted sufficiently early for the Road Traffic Police, the Engineer and
State Road Administration to give their approval, and in any event not less than 7 days before
the commencement of the planned road works. The Contractor shall take all necessary
measures to direct traffic at diversions and on bridges under repair during both daytime and
night time. No work on a section of road shall commence unless the Engineer has satisfied
himself that the approved scheme is operating satisfactorily.
Individual one-way traffic restrictions shall not be longer than 500 m unless agreed otherwise by
the Engineer. The objective is to avoid unnecessary traffic waiting time or long queues. The
Contractor must demonstrate that he has considered traffic transit times at restrictions, queuing
times, safe stopping distances and overtaking distances when proposing lengths of one-way
working and the distance between such lengths.
All diversion roads and road lengths subject to traffic restrictions shall be maintained in a good
condition at all times. The width of traffic lanes shall generally be at least 3.5 metres and in no
case less than 2.8 Metres wide. The Contractor shall introduce measures to minimize
irregularities and steps on the pavement surface during repairs and overlay operations. Where
phased construction results in low shoulders, these shall be clearly signed throughout the length
involved. The Contractor shall ensure that his operations do not impede snow clearing work in
any way and that equipment and materials are kept clear of roadways outside working hours.
The Contractor shall appoint and give the necessary authority to a suitably experienced and
qualified person to supervise all traffic management and safety matters relating to the Contract
and notify the Engineer accordingly.
During the Works Execution period Contractor shall organize and maintain the road traffic, with
exception of specific maintenance works during winter period (snow and glazed frost cleaning).
Throughout the execution of the Works the Contractor shall
(i) maintain the traffic throughout the zones of unfinished construction;
and
(ii) provide road maintenance for the full length of the Site (so far as the same is under his
control) including repairing potholes, patching and preserve the unfinished constructions.
Failure to comply with one of above mentioned requirements of Traffic Management will result
to a penalty of 1000 EURO/ day calculated from the Engineer’s Notice, but should not exceed
2% of the Contract price.

In accordance with current legislation, the Contractor shall be held accountable for road
accidents on the Site (so far as the same is under his control) caused by non-compliance with
the contract provisions and the traffic management and road maintenance requirements during
the execution of the road works by the Contractor or his Subcontractors.

Measurement
Traffic management and road maintenance measures of all kinds as outlined above or as
necessitated by any other requirement of the Contract will be measured as monthly rates.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
30
 Payment
The cost and expenses for traffic management and road maintenance will be paid monthly
throughout the construction period.

(a) Traffic management measures comprise the following:

• Number and type of safety devices shall be as per the requirement shown in the
drawings or as directed by the engineer during construction and maintenance of the
same for the entire period of particular construction zone.
• Continuous maintenance of the above, with all barricades, traffic cones, reflective tapes,
signs, flagmen, lamps/blinkers etc., as per the drawings or as directed by the engineer.

In the event of persistently inadequate traffic management measures under this item for any
month during the construction period the Engineer may deduct the monthly amount for that
month. Any such amounts deducted shall not be recoverable later.

(b) Road maintenance measures comprise the following:

Repair, fill and compact pot holes and ruts
• Erosion control of shoulders and slopes
• Clear drains to allow free passage of water
• Clear culverts and other water ways
• Cut grass and bushes
• Maintain road signs in place

In the event of persistently inadequate road maintenance measures under this item for any
month during the construction period the Engineer may deduct the monthly amount for that
month. Any such amounts deducted shall not be recoverable later.

Additionally, the Engineer may instruct the Contractor to execute any of the above road
maintenance measures which are urgently required. The Contractor shall comply with the
instruction within the time specified in the instruction. If the Contractor fails to comply with the
instruction, the Employer shall be entitled to employ and pay other persons to carry out the
work, and the Contractor shall pay to the Employer all costs arising from this failure.

Unit of
No. Item
Measure
Install, manage & maintain traffic measures
00701 Month
throughout the period of the works
Perform road maintenance measures for the full
00702 length of the Site (so far as the same is under his Month
control) throughout the period of the works

CHAPTER 008. INSURANCES AND PERFORMANCE

GUARANTEE
The Contractor shall provide insurance in accordance with Sub-Clause 18 of the Conditions of
Contract and of the Contract Data and shall provide a Performance Guarantee in accordance
with the requirements of Sub-Clause 4.2 of the Conditions of Contract and of the Contract Data.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
31
 The Employer’s personnel shall be included in the insurance coverage.
The pay item for insurance will be full compensation for all insurances required to be provided
by the Contractor under the Contract. Payment will be made after all insurances have been
taken out to the satisfaction of the Employer and the Engineer and copies of the policies and
evidence that all initial premiums have been paid have been presented to the Employer.
Payment will be made in two parts; 50% payable in the first Invoice for works done and 50%
payable in the first invoice 12 months after the Commencement Date.
The pay item for provision of the Performance Guarantee shall be full compensation for the
provision of the guarantee in conformance with the requirements of the Contract. Payment will
be made after the Performance Guarantee, in a form conforming to the requirements of the
contract, both as to terms and to duration, shall have been submitted to and approved by the
Employer. Payment will be made in three equal parts; one third payable in the first Invoice for
works done following acceptance of the guarantee, one third payable in the first invoice 12
months after the Commencement Date and one third payable after the issue of the Taking over
Certificate.

Payment
Pay item: Insurance Pay unit: Lump Sum

No. Item Unit of Measure

00801 Provide Insurances Lump-sum

00802 Provide Performance Guarentee Lump-sum

CHAPTER 009. CONTROL OF MATERIAL

009.01. Source of Supply and Quality Requirements
The Contractor selects sources and provides acceptable materials that meet the requirements
of the Contract and Specification, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify
the Engineer of all proposed sources before delivery to the Site, and shall expedite material
inspection and testing according to the requirements of his construction programme. The
Contractor undertakes that he will not incorporate any material requiring submittal testing into
the permanent work until they are approved by the Engineer.
Material must be approved at the source of supply before delivery to the Site. This approval
does not constitute acceptance of material. If an approved source does not continue to supply
acceptable material during the contract period, the source may be subsequently rejected.
The Contractor shall take note of the requirements of Sub-Clause 006.01 [Quality Assurance
Management System] regarding Quality Assurance during the process of selecting and
providing materials to the Works.

009.02. Local Material Sources

Sources of rock, sand, gravel, earth, or other natural material located by the Employer in the
project are identified in the documents.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

32
 These identified sources listed may be used by Contractor. The decision to use an identified
source is solely that of the Contractor.
• Employer listed sources
The Employer may list possible material sources. The Employer makes no representation
about quality or quantity of material, or rights to the availability of material from these
sources. These sources are considered to be Contractor - located sources under (b)
below.
• Contractor located sources
The Contractor is responsible for these sources, including existing commercial sources.
Use sources that fulfil all the contract requirements and the sufficientcy of quantities is the
sole responsibility of the Contractor. The Contractor shall determine the quantity and types
of equipment and work necessary to select and produe acceptable material and shall
secure all clearances for use of the source and provide copies of the relevant documents
to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall provide laboratory test reports and available historical performance
data indicating that acceptable material is available from the source. The Contractor shall
not use material from a source that is unacceptable to either the Engineer or the Employer
and shall dispose of unacceptable material and locate another source at no cost to the
Employer.
009.03. Storing and Handling Material
The Contractor shall store and handle material to preserve its quality and properties for the
works and in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Stored material approved before storage,
may again be inspected before its use into the work. The Contractor shall locate stored material
in a manner to facilitate prompt inspection.
The Contractor shall use only approved portions of material correctly stored and the placement
of plant and equipment, and shall ensure compliance with the requirements of the
Environmental Management Plan. Material subject to deterioration from prolonged storage shall
be used before its expiry dates and in the sequence of its dates of delivery or its dates of
manufacture whichever is more applicable
The Contractor shall provide all additional space needed and shall not use private property for
storage without written permission of the owner or lessee. The Contractor shall furnish copies of
all agreements to the Engineer and shall restore all Employer provided storage sites to their
original condition.
The Contractor is responsible for the security of all stored material.

009.04. Use of Material Found in the Work

The right to use and process material found during the work does not include the use and
processing of material for other work except for the disposal of waste material. Waste material
may be disposed of on site if approved by the Engineer, or off-site at approved locations. The
Contractor shall be responsible for locating and securing off-site waste areas if required, at no
additional cost to the Employer.
Milled material from the existing road pavement shall be stockpiled for reuse at locations
selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
If the Contractor produces or processes material from the Employer’s lands in excess of the
quantities required by the contract, the Employer may:

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

33
 • Take possession of the excess material and direct its use, paying the Contractor only
for the cost of production, or
• Require removal, replacement with suitable fill material and restoration of the over-
excavated area to a satisfactory condition at no additional cost to the Employer.

CHAPTER 010. CEMENT

010.01. Portland and masonry cement
The cement shall comply with the requirement of GOST 10178-85 and SNiP 3.06.04-91 annex
3.
For procurement of the Cement the Contactor shall submit Manufacturer’s test certificate with
other relevant documents of the company to get approval of the Engineer.

010.02. Cement for mortar

Cement for mortar shall be to GOST 25328-82. Different types or marks of cement or the same
mark or types of cement from different consignments shall not be mixed without the Engineer’s
approval.

010.03. Storage
The right conditions for cement storage and protection against dampness must be provided.
Cement shall be stored in cool, dry, closed sheds. Cement shall not be stored in the open, on
the ground, or under plastic sheeting.
Under no circumstances shall cement showing any signs of the following damage or
mistreatment be used:
• partially hardened cement
• adulterated cement
• Cement from bags opened previously.
• cement from damaged bags.

CHAPTER 011. BITUMEN

011.01. Bitumen
Bitumen will be provided according to SM GOST 22245-90 for the grade indicated in drawings
or technical specifications.
In addition to the SM GOST requirements, bitumen used in asphalt mixes shall comply with the
following requirements:

Grade 60 – 90 90 – 130

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

34
 Dynamic Viscosity at 60 deg C Pa.s minimum 295 230

For procurement of the Bitumen the Contactor shall submit Manufacturer’s test certificate with
other relevant documents of the company to get approval of the Engineer. Test certificates shall
be submitted to the Engineer for every delivery of the bitumen to site.
No test method is given for viscosity. Kinematic viscosity at 60°C and 135°C can, in theory, be
measured using Capillary viscoMetres, AASHTO test method T201. However, in practice only T
202 (dynamic viscosity by vacuum capillary) is suitable for penetration grade bitumen at 60°C.
More conveniently, dynamic viscosity can be measured using a rotating spindle type
mechanical viscoMetre; eg Brookfield viscoMetre.
For bitumens where penetration is specified with limits different to those quoted above the
viscosity requirements shall be determined by the Engineer based on a pro rata interpolation
from the above table.
Note that for bitumen acceptance purposes dynamic and kinematic viscosity may be equated on
the basis of 1Pa.s=1000 sq. mm/s

011.02. Bituminous emulsion

Bituminous emulsion will be provided according to SNiP 3.06.03-85 and GOST 18659-81.

011.03. Working temperature

The binder will be used at the temperatures indicated in SNiP 3.06.03-85.

CHAPTER 012. AGGREGATE, FILLER

012.01. Aggregates and sand for cement mortar and Portland cement
concrete
The aggregates, ballast, and sand used for concrete works, bridges and viaducts will be in
accordance with GOST 26633-91 and SNiP 3.06.04-91 annex 3.
The aggregate size distribution in the concrete will be between the limits indicated into the Table
1 of SM GOST 8267-93.
Crushed stone aggregates will be according to SM GOST 8267-93.
The sand for mortar and concrete will be in accordance to SM GOST 8736-93.

012.02. Crushed stone for road base, binder course and wearing course
The aggregates will result from durable crushed stone in accordance to SNiP 2.05.02-85, SM
GOST 25607-2010. Only crushed stone without organic additions or clay shall be used. Stone
susceptible to freezing-thaw cycle or liable to be blistered in moisture shall not be used.
The right size distribution of the aggregates will be provided under crushing, sizing and mixing
system. Small size aggregates, passing 4.75 mm screen will be natural or crushed sand.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

35
 012.03. Aggregates for bituminous mixtures
The aggregates for hot mixtures will be hard stone, crushed slag or crushed gravel. The size,
quality and structure of the aggregates will be in accordance to SM STB 1033:2008.
The mixture will not have organic additions. The percentage of clay and soft particle will be less
than 0.5%.

012.04. Sand
The sand used for bituminous mixtures will be in accordance to SM GOST 8736-93.
The sand for the road base will be in accordance to SNiP 2.05.02-85.

012.05. Filler
The filler used for hot bituminous mixture will be in accordance to SM GOST 16557-78.

012.06. Additives for cement mortar and concrete

Additives/admixture for cement mortar and concrete shall not be used without prior consent of
the Engineer. The approved admixtures/additives shall be used in accordance to SNiP 3.06.04-
91 Annex 3.
Use of additives may be considered for:
• improving concrete's workability and reducing of.water cement ratio;
• improving frost resistance;
• improving the impermeability of concrete;
• assisting setting of concrete in negative air temperature.

CHAPTER 013. REINFORCEMENT STEEL

013.01. Reinforcement steel
Reinforcement steel for reinforced concrete shall comply with the following standards:
• SM GOST 5781-82**
• SM GOST 6727-80*
• SM GOST 7348-81*
• SM GOST 23279-85
• SM GOST 13840-68
• SM GOST 103-76**
• SM GOST 82-70*

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

36
 CHAPTER 014. OTHER MATERIALS
014.01. Water
The water used for cement concrete and mortar, aggregates washing and concrete curing will
be in accordance to SM GOST 23732-92.

014.02. Paints
Unless otherwise indicated the protection of metallic elements will be done using paints in
accordance to SNiP 2.03.11-85.

014.03. Geotextiles
Geotextiles shall be in accordance with Chapter 902.

CHAPTER 015. OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY

The Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer for approval “Health and Safety Plan”
not less than 7 days before the commencement of the planned works. This Plan shall describe
clearly the measures which the Contractor will be taking to ensure, so far as is reasonably
practicable, the health, safety and welfare at work of his employees including those of his sub-
contractors and of all other persons on the Site.
Failure to comply with approved “Healt and Safety Plan” will result to a penalty of 1000 EURO/
day calculated from the Engineer’s Notice, but should not exceed 1% of the Contract price.

The Plan must include, but is not limited to, provisions to deal with the following problems,
hazards and requirements:
• Welfare measures at the site, including at the accommodation. The Plan shall include
access to fresh drinking water, washing facilities, toilets, shelters for use on breaks,
etc.
• Means of separation of working and traffic areas (Speed restrictions, marking, fencing,
etc.).
• Demolishing existing structures can entail exposure to high noise levels, vibration, dust
and falling debris. The Plan shall explain how machinery noise and vibration will be
mitigated and what personal protection measures will be taken. (Hearing protection
devices, dust masks, protective clothing, etc.).
• Handling raw materials (soils, aggregates, gravels, rock, etc.) and construction of
embankment, subgrade and pavement layers all entail exposure to dust, noise,
vibration and heavy manual handling. The Plan shall describe measures which will be
taken to minimise exposure to dust (watering, provision of masks), reduce noise and
vibration to a practicable minimum (the highest acceptable noise level shall be 85
dBA) and what mechanical equipment will be used to reduce manual handling. The
Plan should also define what level of manual handling will be required after all
mitigating measures have been implemented.
• Working with bituminous materials, especially when hot, entails exposure to the risk of
severe burns and to fumes which, if inhaled will cause severe respiratory organ
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
37
 irritation and which are believed to be carcinogenous. Bitumen itself is a suspected
carcinogen and skin contact should be avoided even when cold. The Plan should
describe how contact will be minimised (protective clothing), how fumes will be
avoided (masks, working practices such as keeping upwind of hot bitumen), general
safety equipment (Piecess and locations of fire extinguishers) and the level of first aid
provision at the sites of bitumen transfer, preparationand application (spraying)
including presence of trained personnel, first aid supplies, first aid equipment and easy
access to clean water.
• Similar consideration must be given to the problems of working with more flammable
materials, especially fuels. In addition to first aid, etc. the Plan must detail safe
refuelling procedures to be employed for all static and mobile plant and vehicles.
• Handling of lime (especially quick lime), cement and other activators and additives is
potentially hazardous. The Plan must describe adequate measures which will be taken
to avoid eye and skin contact and inhalation (goggles, protective clothing and masks)
and to minimise manual handling.
• Maintenance of vehicles and machinery frequently involves contact with solvents. The
Plan should describe how skin and eye contact with and inhalation of solvents will be
minimised through the provision of protective clothing and good working practices.
• Wherever dust masks are to be provided these should preferably be of the type with
exhaust valves, making them easier to use. Rubber masks with removable filters are
preferable to paper masks as they generally fit better and they can be used with
different filters for different purposes (dust, solvents, etc.).
• To ensure that workers understand the occupational health and safety risks on the
work site, and that they are aware of the measures available to minimise these risks,
instruction and training must be given. The Plan must describe the instruction and
training to be given and explain how it will actually be delivered to the workforce.
• As a minimum, of direct relevance to operations on the site, instruction and training
must include the dangers of noise, vibration, dust, fumes, traffic, heavy equipment and
heavy manual handling and must explain what measures are available to minimise
these dangers, including the use of protective clothing, including protective footwear,
reflective vests, hard hats, hearing protection devices, protective eyewear, and gloves,
as may be necessary. The use of the required protective clothing shall be mandatory
for all employees on the Site.

In addition to the direct dangers resulting from working on a construction site, the other dangers
arising from living on the site must also be covered in the Plan which must explain how
information relating to everyday health matters will be comprehensively conveyed to the
workforce. Information to be disseminated must include, but is not necessarily limited to,
warnings concerning the health risks of malaria, bilharzias, yellow fever, hepatitis, meningitis,
hook worms, tape worms, intestinal worms, giardia, amoebae, venereal diseases, HIV-AIDS,
scorpions, snakes and stinging insects.
The Plan will acknowledge the Contractor’s responsibility for the health, safety and welfare of
his workforce and describe these responsibilities in detail.
As well as preparing the Plan for Health and Safety the Contractor shall provide, equip and
maintain adequate first aid stations throughout the Works, and he shall erect conspicuous
notice boards directing where these are situated and shall provide all requisite first aid transport.
The Contractor shall comply with the government medical or labour requirements at all times
and provide, equip and maintain first aid stations in easy reach of all his operational areas and
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
38
 wherever else directed and shall at all times have experienced persons trained in first-aid
available throughout the Works for attending to minor injuries.

CHAPTER 016. COMPLIANCE WITH ENVIRONMENTAL

MANAGEMENT PLAN REQUIREMENTS
In accordance with the environmental policies of both the Employer and the donor an
Environmental Management Plan (EMP), including all activities mentioned in the ESAP that
forms part of the Loan Agreement, which the Contractor is required to implement throughout the
construction process, has been drawn up which the Contractor is required to implement
throughout the construction process. The Contractor shall provide a detailed site-specific
Environmental Management Plan (EMP) which will be based on the Generic Environmental
Management Plan (EMP) and the required method statements/plans as described. The EMPs
have to be in accordance with the Contractor’s finalized work/method statements and
schedules.
The essential requirements of the EMP are given below. Many of these requirements are
incorporated directly into items of this Specification, however, the Contractor is cautioned that
every point identified below must be scrupulously observed throughout the execution of the
project and that all costs of meeting the environmental requirements are deemed to be included
in the Contractor’s quoted rates and prices, whether or not a specific pay item exists.

016.01. Revegetation
All cutting and embankment slopes spoil heap and borrow pit slopes and areas of camps and
other temporary works must be revegetated with plants, shrubs and grasses approved by the
Engineer. At the Completion of the Works there shall be no exposed, unvegetated soils
remaining on either the permanent or the temporary works, including the sites of camps, work
stations, etc. On embankments in excess of 3 metres in height the revegetation measures shall
include provision of continuous screening using shrubs and bushes at the back of the soft
shoulder to a height of at least 1.5 metres.

016.02. Unnecessary compaction of soil

Every effort shall be made to avoid unnecessary compaction of soil. Where such compaction is
unavoidable, eg. In temporary accesses or camp areas, the Contractor shall take all necessary
steps to ensure that soil is loosened and aerated over the full depth of compaction prior to the
revegetation process.

016.03. Contamination of Watercourses

Contamination of water courses must be prevented. The Contractor shall schedule works
adjacent to waterways to take place strictly within the dry season.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

39
 016.04. Waste Oils, Fuel and Bituminous Materials
Waste oils, fuels, bituminous materials shall only be disposed of in a manner approved by the
environmental authorities. Such materials shall in no case be indiscriminately discarded or
abandoned.

016.05. Dust
Unpaved roads shall be regularly watered to restrict dust caused by construction traffic. Regular
watering means watering at a sufficient frequency to ensure that the running surface is always
damp while the roads are in use by construction traffic.

016.06. Covering Loads

All trucks carrying fine material or materials likely to shed dust shall have their loads
tightlycovered.

016.07. Emissions
Construction equipment shall be properly maintained to ensure that emissions are within the
manufacturers published tolerances. Asphalt plants shall be fitted with dust filtering equipment
and no significant emissions of dust will be permitted.

016.08. Noise Levels

Equipment with high noise levels shall be restricted to working during the hours of 800 to 1800
and shall only be operated on normal working days. Noise level restrictions may be eased by
the Engineer if he is satisfied that the affected location is entirely out of earshot of any
potentially affected community and appropriate protective measures have been implemented,
such as the use of hearing protective devices and noise mitigating devices on equipemt. High
noise level equipment shall be defined as equipment which generates a noise level in excess of
85 dBA at a distance of 10 metres under normal working conditions.

016.09. Noise Barriers

If so directed the Contractor shall utilise noise barriers to protect critical areas (schools,
hospitals, etc) from the effects of high noise level equipment.

016.10. Siting of Camps, etc, disposal of camp waste

The Contractor’s temporary works (Camps, quarries, borrow pits, spoil heaps, haul roads, etc.)
shall be sited only with the approval of the authorities having jurisdiction. All necessary permits
for the construction of temporary and permanent works shall be obtained and copies lodged
with the Engineer before ground is broken. Camps in particular shall have every aspect of
service provision and waste disposal clearly defined and approved by the local authorities and
the Engineer, before any aspect of construction commences. Throughout the operation of the
temporary works the Contractor shall ensure that waste material of all types is contained and
disposed of only by approved means. Comprehensive sanitary facilities shall be provided at all
times in all areas where work is in progress.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

40
 016.11. Opening and Operating Quarries and Borrow Pits
Not used

016.12. Undesirable Habitats

Vector ecology shall be assessed and controlled in all areas of the works and the creation of
undesirable habitats (eg. standing or stagnant water) shall not be permitted to occur.

016.13. Hazardous Materials

All hazardous, or potential hazardous materials (including but not limited to fuels, oils,
bituminous materials, cement) shall be stored in dedicated compounds or buildings with full
protection from possible effects of leakage or spillage. All waste or surplus materials shall be
disposed of using approved processes guaranteed to cause no environmental ill effects.

016.14. Access Routes

All access routes to areas temporarily occupied by the Contractor shall be routed to avoid
environmental damage. Such routes shall be approved by the Engineer before being created. If
he sees fit the Engineer shall take advice from the environmental monitors before approving
such routes.

016.15. Cutting Trees

The Contractor shall at all times take necessary steps to minimise destruction of trees and
vegetation. He shall ensure that his personnel do not, at any time, undertake unauthorised tree
cutting or clearance.

016.16. Hunting, etc.

The Contractor shall forbid his personnel to fish, hunt, kill, injure or poach any fauna or
unnecessary damage any flora.

016.17. Access to Properties

All existing property with accesses to the project road shall be respected throughout the
execution of the Works. Wherever a property has an existing access the Contractor shall
ensure, through the provision of suitable temporary works, that such access remains available
to the property occupier during the Works to substantially the same extent as previously.

016.18. Public Meetings

The Contractor shall take necessary measures, including public meetings, to ensure that the
public is kept fully aware about the extent and scheduling of the proposed works. He shall
ensure that at least one member of his staff is available during working hours to deal with
queries and complaints from the public in respect of his operations.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

41
 016.19. Environmental Health and Safety Officer
The Contractor is responsible for Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) matters across the
whole site of the Works. The Contractor shall appoint one responsible member of his staff to act
full-time as the Environmental, Health and Safety Officer, and he shall notify the Engineer of
such appointment. The Environmental, Health and Safety Officer shall be experienced in all
matters relating to the environment, health and safety on Sites and shall be familiar with all
relevant environment, health safety regulations and legislation. The Environmental, Health and
Safety Officer shall have the power to receive instructions from the Engineer on matters relating
to the environment and the health and safety of personnel on Site and the safe conduct of site
operations.
Measurement
Measures to ensure compliance with the Environmental Management Plan Requirements of all
kinds as outlined above or as necessitated by any other requirement of the Contract will be
measured as monthly rate.
Payment
The costs and expenses for compliance with the Environmental Management Plan
Requirements will be paid monthly throughout the construction period.

In the event of persistently inadequate environmental management measures under this item
for any month during the construction period the Engineer may deduct the monthly amount for
that month. Any such amounts deducted shall not be recoverable later.

.
No. Item Unit of
Measure
01601 Compliance with environmental management plan requirements Month

APPENDIX TO GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SPECIFICATIONS

1. List of standards incorporated by reference
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului
Technical protection of the territory, buildings and constructions
NCM A.06.01-2006 against dangerous geological processes. General data.
1
(МСН 2.03-02 2002) Protectia tahnica a teritoriului , cladirilor si constructiilor contra
proceselor geologice periculoase. Date Generale.
Natural and artificial lighting
2 NCM C.04-05-95
Iluminatul natural si artificial
Rules of execution, quality control and acceptance of foundation
3 NCM F 01.03-2009
soils and foundations.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

42
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului
Reguli de execuţie, controlul calităţii şi recepţia terenurilor de
fundare şi a fundaţiilor
Precast concrete elements, reinforced concrete and prestressed
concrete. Performance, quality control and acceptamnce.
4 NCM F 02.04-2007
Elemente prefabricate de beton, beton armat si beton
precomprimat. Executarea, controlul calitatii si receptia
SNiP 2.01.14-83 Determination of Design-Basis Hydrologic Characteristics
5 Replaced by CP
D.01.04-2007 Determinarea Caracteristicilor Hidrologice de Baza de calcul.

NCM D.03.01-2006 1520 mm Gauge Railways

6
MCH 3.03-01-95 Caile Ferate cu Ecartamentul 1520 mm

CP D.03.01-2009 1520 mm Gauge Railways

7
СТH Ц-01-95 Caile Ferate cu Ecartamentul 1520 mm

CP.D.03.02-2009 Design of Embankments for 1520 mm Gauge Railways

8
СП 32.104-98 Proiectarea Terasamentului Cailor Ferate cu Ecartamentul 1520 mm
Foundations of water retaining structures.
9 SNiP 2.02.02 – 85*
Fundatii hidrotehnice
Pile foundation
10 SNiP 2.02.03 - 85
Fundatii pe piloti

SNiP 2.03.11 - 85 * Protection of structures against corrosion.

11
(CP E.04.03-2005) Protectia constructiilor impotriva coroziunii
Highways (Design standards)
12 SNiP 2.05.02 - 85*
Drumuri ( Norme de proiectare)
Bridges and culverts (Design standards)
13 SNiP 2.05.03 - 84*
Poduri si podete (Norme de proiectare)

Organization of building production

14 SNiP 3.01.01-85*
Organizarea productiei de constructie
Survey and setting out works in construction
15 SNIP 3.01.03-84
Lucrari topogeodezice in construcţie
Acceptance of completed Works. General provisions.
16 SNIP 3.01.04-87 Recepţia lucrarilor finalizate. Prevederi generale. Hotararea nr.285
In vigoare.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

43
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului
Performance Rules. Quality Control and Acceptance of Soil Bases
SNIP 3.02.01-87 and Foundations
17 Replaced by
NCMF.01.03.-2009 Reguli de executie. Comntrolul calitatii si receptia terenurilor de
fundare si fundatiilor
Bearing and Fencing Structures.
Elemente portante si de imprejmuire. Este inlocuit capitolul 2 cu
18 SNIP 3.03.01-87 NCM F.02.03-2005 "Executarea, controlul calitatii si receptia
lucrarilor din beton si beton armat monolit” capitolul 7 este inlocuit
cu NCM F.03.03-2004 “Executarea si receptialucrarilor de zidarie"
Protection of erected constructions and structures against corrosion
19 SNiP 3.04.03 - 85 Protectia edificarilor si constructiilor impotriva coroziunii.
C PE.04,03 - 2005
Electrical devices
20 SNiP 3.05.06-85
Dispozitive electrice
Highways (Construction and acceptance of works. Regulations).
21 SNiP 3.06.03 - 85
Drumuri auto(Prescriptii la efectuarea lucrarilor si receptia lor)
Bridges and culverts (Construction and acceptance of works.
22 SNiP 3.06.04 - 91 Regulations)
Poduri si podete (Prescriptii la efectuarea lucrarilor si receptia lor)
Bridges and culverts. Rules for Inspection and Testing
23 SNiP 3.06.07-86
Poduri si podete. Regulament pentru inspectari si incercari
SNiP II-7-81*(for Construction in Seismic Regions
cl.3.35 to 3.51 of SNiP
24
is applied NCM
F.03.02-2005) Constructii in zone seismice

Construction safety regulation

25 SNiP III-4-80*
Tehnica securitatii in constructii
Metal structures
26 SNiP III -18 - 75
Constructii metalice
Electrical code (7 edition)
27 PUE
Normativ Electric (7 editie)
The technical operation of electrical installations
28 PTE
Operatiuni tehnice al instalarii electrice
Environmental Protection when constructing, repairing and
29 VSN 8-89
maintaing the highways. Instructions

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

44
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului
Instructiuni de protectie a mediului la lucrarile de constructie,
reparatie si exploatare a drumurilor auto
Repair and maintenance of highways. Technical standards.
30 VSN 24 - 88
Normele tehnice pentru reparatia si intretinerea drumurilor auto.
Waterproofing to bridges and culverts on railways, highways and
urban roads. Instruction.
31 VSN 32 - 81
Instructiuni de executare a hidroizolarii elementelor de poduri si
podete pe drumuri auto, strazi si cai ferate.
Traffic Management and Security of Road Sectors under Works.
Instructions.

VSN 37 - 84 Instructiuni pentru dirijarea circulatiei rutiere si lucrari de drumuri.

32 Norme metodologice privind conditiile de închidere a circulaţiei şi
(Supliment)
instituire a restricţiilor de circulaţie în vederea executării de lucrari în
zona drumului public şi/sau protejării drumului sectoarelor in
executie.
Methodological norms regarding the conditions for closing traffic
and establishing the traffic restrictions in the execution of works in
public road and / or protect the road.
33 Norme metodologice
Norme metodologice privind conditiile de inchidere a circulatiei si
instituire a restrictiilor de circulatie in vederea executarii de lucrari in
zona drumului public si/sau protejarii drumului.
Road pavement works on top of uneven surfaces. Technical
standards.
34 VSN 38 - 90
Normele tehnice pentru executarea imbracamintilor rutiere cu
suprafata rugoasa
Manufacturing and Construction of RC and Concrete Culverts.
Instructions
35 VSN 81 - 80
Instructiuni pentru fabricarea si constructia podetelor din beton si
beton armat
Designing and Mounting of Rubber Bearing Pads. Instructions
36 VSN 86 - 83 Instructiune pentru proiectarea si asezarea aparatelor de reazem
din polimeri la poduri
Cement Concrete Pavements. Instructions.
37 VSN 139-80
Constructia imbracamintei din beton cu ciment. Instructii
Designing of Flexible Road Pavement. Instruction.
38 ODN 218.046-01
Proiectarea imracamintei rutiere nerigide.Instructii

39 ENiR, pc E 2 - 1 - 45 Mechanical and Manual Earthwarks.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

45
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului

Lucrari de terasamente mecanizate si manuale

Revegetation
40 ENiR, pc E 18 - 24
Lucrari de inverzire
Lacquer and Paint Coating. Groups, Technical Requirements.
41 GOST 9.032 - 74*
Acoperirea cu lac si vopsea. Tipuri, conditii tehnice si marcari.
Universal hot-rolled wide strip steel
42 GOST 82-70*
Laminarea universala a fisiilor late de otel la temperaturi inalte
Cements. Test Methods. General provisins.
43 GOST 310.1 - 76*
Cimenturi. Metode de testare.Prevederi Generale
Cements. Method for Coarseness Determination.
44 GOST 310.2 - 76*
Cimenturi. Metode de determinare a finetei de macinarie
Cements. Methods for Determination of Standard Consistency, of
settingtime and of Sound Cement.
45 GOST 310.3 - 76*
Cimenturi. Metode de determinare a consistentei normale,
termenilor de priza si schimbarii uniforme a volumului
Cements. Methods for Determination of bending and compression
strength.
46 GOST 310.4 - 81
Cimenturi. Metode de determinare a rezistentei la incovoiere si
compresiune

GOST 380-94, Ordinary carbon steel. Grades.

47
GOST 380-2005 Otel-carbon obisnuit. Marca de otel
Brass sheets and strips. Technical conditions.
48 GOST 931 - 90
Table si fasii din cupru. Conditii tehnice
Drinking water. Methods for determination of chloride content
49 GOST 4245 - 72
Apa potabila. Metode de determinare a continutului de cloruri
Drinking water. Methods for determination of sulphate content
50 GOST 4389 - 72
Apa potabila. Metode de determinare a continutului de sulfati
Single bar steel grids. Technical Conditions.
51 GOST 5336-80*
Plase de otel ordinare.
Hot – rolled steel for reinforcement of ferro-concrete structures.
Specifications.
52 GOST 5781 - 82*
Otel laminat la temperaturi inalte pentru armarea constructiilor din
beton armat. Conditii tehnice.
53 GOST 5802 - 86 Mortars. Test methods.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
46
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului

Mortare de constructii. Metode de testare

Concrete and reinfirced concrete kerbs. Specifications.
54 GOST 6665-91
Elemente prefabricate din beton si beton armat pentru borduri
Hard drawh low-carbon steel wire for reinforced concrete.
Technical requirements
55 GOST 6727-80*
Sirma din otel cu continut jos de carbon intinsa la temperaturi
joase. Conditii tehnice
Low-alloyed structural rolled steel for bridge construction.
Specifications.
56 GOST 6713-91
Laminarea otelului cu continut jos de carbon pentru constructia
podurilor
Ready-mixed concrete. Technical Conditions.
57 GOST 7473 - 94
Amestecuri de beton.Conditii tehnice
Crushed dense aggregates and gravel for construction. Technical
Conditions.
58 GOST 8267 – 93*
Piatra concasata din roca densa de munte pentru constructie.
Conduitii tehnice.
Natural Crushed Stone, Gravel for Construction. Test Methods.
59 GOST 8269 - 87* Piatra naturala sparta, pietris pentru lucrari in constructie. Metode
de testare
Crushed dense aggregates and gravel of natural rock, industrial
wastes for construction. Physical-mechanical testing methods.
60 GOST 8269.0-97* Piatra concasata si prundis din roca densa de munte, resturi de
materiale industriale pentru constructie. Metode fizico-mecanice de
testare.
Artificial bumps obn the roads and strets. Technical requirements.
Application.
61 SM STB 1538:2009
Denivelări artificiale pe drumuri şi străzi auto. Cerinţe tehnice şi
reguli de aplicare
Crushed aggregate and gravel of natural rock, and of production
residue for construction works. Chemical analysis testing methods.
62 GOST 8269.1-97 Piatra concasata si prundis din roca densa de munte, resturi de
materiale industriale pentru constructie. Metode de analiza chimica
de testare
Sand for construction. Testing methods.
63 GOST 8735 – 88*
Nisip pentru lucrari in constructie. Metode de testare
Sand for construction. Technical Conditions.
64 GOST 8736 -93*
Nisip pentru lucrari in constructie. Conditii tehnice
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
47
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului

Petroleum bitumen. Technical Conditions.

65 GOST 9812-74*
Bitumul petrolier de izolare. Conditii tehnice

Lacquer-painting materials. Terms, definitions and designation.

66 GOST 9825 -73*
Materialele din vopsea cu lac.Termeni, definitii, marcare.
Concrete types. Frost Resistance Test Method.
67 GOST 10060.0 - 95 Tipiri de beton. Metode de determinare a rezistentei la inghet-
dezghet
Portland cement and Portland blast furnace slag cement. Technical
Conditions.
68 GOST 10178 – 85*
Ciment portland si ciment portland cu adaos de zgura
(Conditii tehnice )
Concrete Types. Test Methods for strength of specimens.
69 GOST 10180 - 90 Tipuri de beton. Metode de determinare a rezistentei probelor de
control
Concrete mixtures. Test Methods.
70 GOST 10181-2000
Amestecuri de beton. Metodele de testare
Longitudinal (electric) welded steel pipes (tubes). Assortment.
71 GOST 10704-91
Tevi de otel electric sudate longitudinal. Sortiment
GOST 10807-78* Road signs. General technical requirements
(Modificarea nr .3)
72
Replaced by SM
Indicatoare rutiere. Cerinte tehnice generale
GOST R 52290:2009
Petroleum Bitumen. Penetration Test Method.
73 GOST 11501 - 78*
Bitumul petrolier. Metode de determinare a penetratiei
Petroleum Bitumen. Viscosity Test Method.
74 GOST 11503 - 74*
Bitumul petrolier. Metode de determinare a viscozitatii
Cutback Road bitumen. Technical Conditions
75 GOST 11955-82*
Bitumul lichid pentru drumuri. Conditii tehnice
Soils. Sampling, handling and sample storage.
76 GOST 12071 - 2000
Soluri. Selectarea, ambalajul, transportarea si pastrarea probelor.
Soils. Laboratory methods for strength and shear strength.
77 GOST 12248 - 96 Soluri. Metode de determinare a rezistentei si rezistentei la
deformare

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

48
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului
Products for road marking. Road Studs
78 SR EN 1463-1
Produse pentru marcare rutiera. Butoane reflectorizante
Soils. Laboratory Grading Analysis Method.
79 GOST 12536 - 79 Soluri. Metode de determinare a compozitiei granulometrice in
laborator

Concrete Types. General requirements for density, moisture

content, water absorption, porosity and impermeability to water Test
GOST 12730.0-78 Methods.
80
to 12730.4-78 Tipuri de beton. Conditii generale pentru metodele de determinare a
densitatii, umiditatii, absorbtiei de apa,.porozitatii si
impermeabilitatii
Concrete Types. Impermeability to water Test Methods.
81 GOST 12730.5-84*
Tipuri de beton. Metode de determinare a impermeabilitatii
Road Marking
82 GOST 13508-74*
Marcaj rutier
Welded joints of reinforcement and of embedded elements of
reinforced-concrete constructions. Types, structure and dimensions.
83 GOST 14098-91
Sudarea armaturii si a pieselor inglobate pentru constructiile de
beton armat. Tipuri, structura si dimensiuni
Bituminous rubber insulating mastic. Technical conditions
84 GOST 15836-79
Mastic bituminos cu cauciuc izolant.Conditii tehnice
Filler for asphaltic-concrete mixtures. Technical requirements
85 GOST 16557-78
Filer pentru beton asfaltic (Conditii tehnice)
Concrete Types. Strength Test Methods.
86 GOST 18105-86*
Tipuri de beton. Reguli de control a rezistentei betonului
Drinking water. Test Method for Solid Residue Content.
87 GOST 18164-72
Apa potabila. Metoda de determinare a continutului de rezidii solide
Polythene pressure pipes. Specifications
88 GOST 18599-2001*
Tevi de presiune din polietilen. Conditii tehnice.
Road Bitumen Emulsions. Technical requirements.
89 GOST 18659 - 81
Emulsii bituminoase pentru drumuri. Conditii tehnice
Soils. Statistical processing method of test results.
90 GOST 20522-96
Soluri. Metoda statica de prelucrare a rezultatelor testarilor

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

49
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului

Viscous Road Petroleum Bitumen. Specifications

91 GOST 22245-90*
Bitumul viscos pentru drumuri. Conditii tehnice
Soils. Laboratory method for maximum density
92 SM GOST 22733-2009
Soluri. Metode de laborator de determinare a densitatii maxime
Welded reinforcement grids for precast reinforced concrete
structures and units. General Technical Conditions.
93 GOST 23279-85
Plase sudate metalice pentru construcrii si articole din beton armat.
Conditii generale tehnice

GOST 23457-86* Traffic control equipment: road signs, marking, traffic lights,
Replaced by parapets and guiding devices. Application.
94 GOST R 52289-2004 Mijloace tehnice de dirijare a circulatiei rutiere: indicatoare rutiere,
SM GOSTR marcajul, semafoare, parapete, dispozitive de orientare. Reguli de
52289:2009 aplicare.
Asphalt concrete mixtures for road and aerodromes and asphaltic
concrete. Specifications.
95 SM STB 1033-2008
Amestecuri de beton asfaltic pentru drumuri si aerodromuri si beton
asfaltic. Conditii tehnice
Oil bitumens for road pavement wearing course. Specifications.
96 SM STB 1062-2008 Bitumiri de petrol pentru stratul superior al imbracamintei rutiere.
Conditii tehnice.
Asphalt concrete mixtures for road and aerodromes and asphalt
concrete. Methods of testing.
97 SM STB 1115-2008
Amestecuri de beton asfaltic pentru drumuri si aerodromuri si beton
asfaltic. Metode de incercari.
Modified road bitumens. Specifications.
98 SM STB 1220-2008
Bitumiri rutiere modificate. Conditii tehnice.
Cubical crushed stone from dence mountain breeds. Specifications.
99 SM STB 1311-2008
Piatra sparta de forma cubica din roci de munti tari. Conditii tehnice.
Crushed stone-gravel-sand mixtures and soils, treated by inorganic
binder for road and aerodrome construction. Specifications
100 GOST 23558–94* Amestecuri de piatra concasata – prundis-nisip si soluri, prelucrate
cu lianti anorganici pentru constructia drumurilor si aerodromurilor.
Conditii tehnice
Water for concrete and mortar. Specifications.
101 GOST 23732-79
Apa pentru beton si mortar. Conditii tehnice
102 GOST 24143-80 Soils. Laboratory methods for swelling and subsidence
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
50
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului

Soluri. Metode de determinare a caracteristicilor la umflare si tasare

Classification of Concrete and general technical requirements.
103 GOST 25192–82*
Clasificarea betonului. Conditii tehnice generale.
Building mortar cement. Specifications.
104 GOST 25328-82
Ciment pentru mortare de constructii. Conditii tehnice
Soils. Laboratory method for permeability coefficient.
105 GOST 25584 90*
Soluri. Metode de determinare a coeficientului de filtratie in laborator
Crushed stone-gravel-sandy mixtures for road and aerodrome base
GOST25607–2009 and pavement. Specifications
106 SM GOST
25607:2010 Amestecuri de piatra concasata - prundis - nisip pentru sisteme
rutiere si aerodromurilor. Conditii tehnice
Heavy-weight and sand concretes. Specifications.
107 GOST 26633–91*
Beton greu cu granulatie fina (Conditii tehnice).
Metal road safety barriers. Specifications.
108 GOST 26804-86
Parapeti metalici de siguranta. Conditii tehnice.
Mortar Types. General Technical Conditions.
109 GOST 28013–98*
Mortare de constructie. Conditii tehnice generale
Ropes of polymeric materials and combined ropes. Specifications
110 GOST 30055-93* Odgoane din materiale polimerice si odgoane combinate. Conditii
tehnice.
GOST R 51256-99 Road marking. Types and basic paraMetres. General technical
111 SM GOST R requirements.
51256:2009 Marcajul rutier. Tipuri si parametri de baza. Conditii tehnice generale
Traffic control equipment: road signs, marking, traffic lights,
SM GOST R parapets and guiding devices. Application.
112 52289:2009 Mijloace tehnice de dirijare a circulatiei rutiere: indicatoare rutiere,
SE REPETA 89 marcajul, semafoare, parapete, dispozitive de orientare. Reguli de
aplicare.
Construction and rolling stock clearance diagrams for the railways
of 1521 (1524) mm gauge.
113 GOST 9238-83
Gabarit de apropiere a constructiilor si a garniturilor de tren pentru
caile ferate cu calea de 1521(1524)
Highways and streets. The requirements for the level of
SM GOST Р 50597- maintenance, admissible under the terms of road traffic safety on the
114
2009 territory of Russian Federation SM GOST R 50597:2009 applied in
Moldova.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

51
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului
Drumiri şi străzi auto. Cerinţe pentru starea de exploatare,
admisibilă conform condiţiilor de asigurare a securităţii traficului
rutier pe teritoriul Republicii Moldova.
Road metallic barriers. Technical requirements.
115 GOST 26804-86
Parapet metalic pentru drumuri de tip bariera. Conditii tehnice.
Technical means for road traffic management. Road crash barriers
for vehicles. General technical requirements
116 GOST Р 52607-2006
Mijloace tehnice pentru organizarea traficului rutier. Parapete de
siguranţă laterale pentru vehicule. Cerinţe tehnice generale
Wooden (timber) posts for road signs. Specifications
117 GOST 25458-82 Stîlpi de lemn pentru montarea indicatoarelor rutiere. Specificaţii
tehnice
R/C posts for road signs. Specifications.
118 GOST 25459-82 Marcaje rutiere. Tipuri şi parametri de bază. Cerinţe tehnice
generale pe teritoriul Moldovei
Materials for Road Marking.
SM GOST R 52575: Furniture Elements, General requirements.
119 2001
GOST R 52766-2007 Materiale pentru marcajul rutier.
Accesorii. Cerinte generale.
Concrete and R/C kerbs. Specifications.
120 GOST 6665-91 Piloni din beton armat pentru montarea indicatoarelor rutiere.
Specificaţii tehnice
Road marking. Types and main characteristics. General technical
SM GOST R requirements on the territory of RF applied in Moldova
121
51256:2009 Marcaje rutiere. Tipuri şi parametri de bază. Cerinţe tehnice
generale pe teritoriul Moldovei
Road marker posts. General technical requirements. Rules of
SM GOST R application
122
50970:2009 Borne de dirijare a circulaţiei rutiere. Cerinţe tehnice generale.
Reguli de aplicare pe teritoriul Moldovei
Traffic control devices. Road reflectors. General technical
SM GOST R requirements. Rules of application
123
50971:2009 Reflectoare de lumină pentru circulaţia rutieră. Cerinţe tehnice
generale. Reguli de aplicare pe teritoriul Moldovei
Road signs. General technical requirements. Replaced by GOST Р
SM GOST R 52290-2004 on the territory of RF; SM GOST R 52290:2009
124 52290:2009 applied in Moldova
GOST R 52290:2004 Indicatoare rutiere. Condiţii tehnice generale.
Înlocuit cu SM GOST R 52290:2009 pe teritoriul Moldovei
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
52
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului
Highways and aerodromes. Measurement methods of base course
and pavement roughness (unevenness).
125 GOST 30412-96
Drumuri auto şi aerodromuri. Metode de măsurare a rugozităţii ale
fundaţiilor şi suprafeţelor.
Nature protection. Lands. Standard removal requirements for the
topsoil layer during earthworks.
126 GOST 17.5.3.06-85
Protecţia naturii. Soluri. Cerinţele de determinarea normelor de
înlăturare a staturilor fertile de sol în timpul lucrărilor de construcţie
Noise. Traffic flows. Measurement methods of noise characteristics.
127 GOST 20444-85 Zgomotul. Fluxul de transport. Metode de măsurare a
caracteristicilor de zgomot.
Noise. Methods of statistical processing of data in determination
and control of noise caused by vehicles.
128 GOST 27408-87
Zgomotul. Metode statistice de prelucrare a rezultatelor determinării
şi controlului nivelului de zgomot, produs de mijloacele tehnice.
External noise of motorized vehicles. Permissible level and
methods of measurements.
129 GOST 27436-87
Zgomotul exterior produs de mijloacele tehnice auto. Nivelul
admisibil şi metode de măsurare.
SP MD 93-16-001-95 Roadways. KiloMetre posts.
130 STANDARD
PROFESIONAL Lucrari de drumuri. Indicatoare kilometrice.

Processed material with organic binders for road construction and

aerodromes. Testing methods.
131 GOST 12801-98
Materile prelucrate cu lianti organici pentru constructia drumurilor si
aerodromuri.Metode de incercare.
Hot-rolled steel strips. Dimensions.
132 GOST 103-2006
Platbanda din otel laminat la cald. Sortiment.
GOST 2591-88 Square hot-rolled Steel Bars Dimensions.
133 Replaced by
GOST 2591-2006 Bare din otel cu sectiune patrata laminate la cald. Sortiment.

Manual welding. Welding joints. Main types, design elements and

dimensions.
134 GOST 5264-80*
Sudura de mana. Conecsiuni sudate. Tipuri de baza, elemente
constructive.
Hexagon nuts, product grade B. Construction and dimensions.
135 GOST 5915-70* Piulite hexagonale cu clasa de precizie B. Structura si
dimensionarea.
136 GOST 8239-89 Steel hot-rolled I-beams.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
53
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului

Grinzi dublu T din otel laminat la cald.

Hot-rolled steel equal-leg angles. Dimensions.
137 GOST 8509-93
Corniere din otel cu aripi egale laminate la cald. Sortiment.
Square steel pipes. Assortment.
138 GOST 8639-82*
Tevi din otel cu sectiune patrata. Sortiment.
Seamless cold-deformed steel pipes. Range of sizes.
139 GOST 8734-75*
Tevi din otel deformabile la rece. Sortiment.
Asphaltic concrete Mixtures for roads and aerodromes and
GOST 9128-2009 asphaltic concrete. Specifications.
140
SMSTB 1033:2008 Amestecuri din asfalt si beton asfaltic pentru drumuri si
aerodromuri. Conditii tehnice.
Metal covered electrodes for manual arc welding of structural and
heat-resistant steels. Types.
141 GOST 9467-75*
Electrozi din otel cu acoperire pentru sudarea manuala cu arc
selectric a otelurilor de construcţie si rezistente la temperatura. Tipuri
Uncured epoxy resins. Specifications.
142 GOST 10587-93
Rasini epoxidice neintarite.
Ruberoid. Technical requirements.
143 GOST 10923-93*
Ruberoid. Conditii tehnice.
Washers. Technical requirements.
144 GOST 11371-78*
Saibe. Conditii tehnice.
Demountable travelling stage. Specifications.
145 GOST 28012-89
Schele mobile si demontabile. Conditii tehnice.
Concretes. Strength evaluation methods by means of sampling.
146 GOST 28570-90 Betoane. Metodele de determinare a rezistentei betonului prin
testarea carotelor prelevate din constrructii.
Roofing and hydraulic insulating materials in rolls General
specifications.
147 GOST 30547-97
Materiale de acoperis si hidroizolare in rulouri. Conditii tehnice
generale.
Hot-rolled steel channels. Assortment.
148 GOST 8240-97
Otel cu profil U laminat la cald. Sortiment
Low-alloyed structural rolled stock for bridge building. Specifications
149 GOST 6713-91 Laminat de constructii cu aliere scazuta pentru constructii de
poduri. Conditii tehnice.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

54
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului
Reinforced concrete units for box and pipe culverts for railway and
road culverts. Specifications.
150 OST 35 - 27.0 - 85
Elemente din beton armat pentru podete tubulare si podete cadru la
caile ferate si drumuri auto. Conditii tehnice.
Reinforced concrete units for rectangular drainage pipes for railway
and road culverts. Structure and dimensions.
151 OST 35 - 27.2 - 85
Elemente din beton armat pentru podete cadru folosite la drumuri
auto si cai ferate. Constructia si dimensiunele
Recommendations for rehabilitation of the roads with flexible
pavement at cold recycling.
152 ODMD 27.06.2002
Recomandari pentru reabilitare drumurilor cu imbracaminti suple cu
ajutorul reciclarii la rece.
“Method Statements on the construction of base and pavement
layers of vibrated cementconcrete" SOIUZDORNII/Moscow 1991
153 ODMD 1991
“Metode de constructie a straturilor de baza si a imbracamintei
rutiere sin beton de ciment vibrat" SOIUZDORNII/Moscova 1992
Waterproofing layer
154 TU 1-51-75
Strat izolant
Waterproofing layer
155 TU 400-1/55-16-76
Strat izolant
Neoprene bearings
TU 2539-008-
156 Ghid de proiectare si instalare a aparatelor de raezem din neoprn
00149334-2003
pentru poduri

TU 5210-001- Road metallic barriers. Specifications

157
25432924-2008 Parapet metalic pentru drumuri de tip bariera. Conditii tehnice
Fired pin for assembly
158 TU 14-4-1731-2007
Dibluri-cuie pentru montare

Standard design Drainage structures for roads

159
503.09-7.84 Constructii pentru evacuarea apelor de pe drumuri auto
R/C piles of rectangular shape and solid sectiuon for bridge piers
Standard design
160 Piloti din beton armat dintr-o bucata cu sectiune plina
series 3.500.1-1.93
dreptunghiulara pentru pile de poduri
Precast, pretenssioned R/C beams of a length between 16.6 and
Standard design 27.6 m for railway underpass
161
series 3.501-91 Grinzi prefabricate din beton armat pretensionat cu lungimea de la
16,5 pana la 27,6m pentru podur de cale ferata

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

55
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului
Precast R/C beams of a length between 2.95 and 16.5 for railway
Standard design underpass
162
series 3.501-108 Grinzi prefabricate din beton armrt cu lungimea de la 2,95 pana la
16,5m pentru podur de cale ferata
Bearings for R/C superstructures of a length between 4.0 and
Standard design 34.2m for railway underpass
163
series 3.501-129 Aparate de reazem pentru suprastructuri din beton armat cu
lungimea de la 4,0 pana la 34,2m pentru poduri de cale ferata
Precast R/C beams of a length between 2.95 and 16.5 for railway
underpass. Edition 3. Mettallic elements, As-built drawings
Standard design
164 Grinzi prefabricate din beton armrt cu lungimea de la 2,95 pana la
series 3.501-146
16,5m pentru podur de cale ferata. Editia 3. Articole metalice.
Desene de executie
Unified piers for railway underpass using precast elements. Edition
Standard design 0-2. Column piers. Materials for design
165
series 3.501-150 Pile unificate pentru poduri de cale ferata cu utilizarea elementelor
prefabricate. Editia 0-2. Pile cu stalpi. Materiale pentru proiectare

Standard design Slope consolidation with concrete

166
Series 3.501.1-156 Protejarea albiilor si taluzelor la poduri mici si mijlocii, si la podete
Slab bridges of 6.0 and 9.0 m spans on pile bent piers and
Standard design abutments
167
Series 3.503-29 Poduri dalate prefabricate din beton armat cu deschideri de 6,0 si
9,0 m pe pile din piloti
Bridge and overpasses approaches
Standard design
168 Racordarea podurilor si pasajelor de sosea cu terasamentul rampei
Series 3.503-41
de acces

Reinforced concrete precast elements for drainage from roads

Standard Design
169 Elemente prefabricate din beton armat pentru sisteme de
Series 3.503.1-66
evacuare a apei de pe drumurile auto
Road Bridges of Precast RC elements with spans of 6 and 9m on
Standard design piles
170
Series 3.503.1-75 Poduri de sosea din elemente prefabricate din beton armat cu
deschideri de 6.0 si 9.0 m pe infrastructuri din piloti
Reinforced concrete piles for road bridge infrastructure with a span
Standard design up to 24.m
171
Series 3.503.1-79 Infrastructuri cu piloti din beton armat pentru poduri de sosea cu
deschideri de pana la 24.0 m

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

56
No./ Type of Standard/
Title Definition / Definitie titlu/denumire
Nr. Tipul normativului
Precast Reinforced Concrete I-Type beam bridge and overpass
decks with spans of 12. 15. 18. 21. 24 and 33m length.
Standard design Suprastructuri pe grinzi cu sectiunea dublu T prefabricate din beton
172
Series 3.503.1-81 armat cu pretensionare de 12.0 , 15.0 , 18.0 , 21.0 , 24.0 si 33.00 m
lungime pentru poduri si pasaje de sosea amplasate pe drumuri
publice, strazi si drumur in orase

Standard design Approaches to the bridges and overpass

173
Series 3.503.1-96 Racordarea podurilor si pasajelor de sosea cu terasamentul
Waterproofing to carriageway, coverage of the expansion joints of
precast reinforced concrete road bridge and overpass decks of 33m
Standard design length.
174
Series 3.503.1-101 Hidroizolatia partii carosabile, acoperirea rosturilor de dilatatie a
suprastructurilor din beton armat cu lungimea de pana la 33.00 m
pentru poduri si pasaje de sosea

Standard design Approaches to the bridges and overpass

175
Series 3.503.1-96 Racordarea podurilor si pasajelor de sosea cu terasamentul
Waterproofing to carriageway, coverage of the expansion joints of
precast reinforced concrete road bridge and overpass decks of 33m
Standard design length.
176
Series 3.503.1-101 Hidroizolatia partii carosabile, acoperirea rosturilor de dilatatie a
suprastructurilor din beton armat cu lungimea de pana la 33.00 m
pentru poduri si pasaje de sosea
Guidelines for rehabilitation of pavement and foundations with cold
recycling method
177 CP.D.02.12 – 2014
Recomandari metodice pentru reabilitarea imbracamintilor rutiere si
fundatiilor prin metoda de reciclare la rece
Strengthening road shoulders
178 CP.D.02.17 – 2012
Cosolidarea acostamentelor drumurilor
Principles of design. Public road design
179 NCM D.02.01:2015
Principii de proiectare. Proiectarea drumurilor publice

2. Engineer’s Offices
Engineer's offices specified in Chapter 004 shall consist of:

ITEM CONTRACT OFFICE LABORATORY OFFICE

Office 1 20 s q. m.

Office 2 15 sq. m. 15 sq. m.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

57
 ITEM CONTRACT OFFICE LABORATORY OFFICE

Office 3 15 sq. m.

Office 4 15 sq. m.

Conference Room 30 sq. m.

Toilet Room with

Flush toilet cubicles 3 no 1 no

Wash hand basin 2 no 1 no

Shower 1 no

Kitchenette 10 sq. m. 5 sq. m.

Store room 10 sq. m. 5. sq. m.

Car parking space

Covered area for cars 4 cars 2 cars

Note that the Laboratory accommodation (including covered car parking) is for the exclusive use
of the Engineer. The Contractor must allow for such additional space as he requires for his own
staff.

3. Furniture and Equipment for Engineer's Offices

The following list is indicative of the items required.
CONTRACT LABORATORY
ITEM
OFFICE OFFICE
Through-the -wall air conditioning/heating units 5 1

Desks with four lockable drawers (1.8 m x 0.9 m) 4 1

Padded, high back swivel chairs 4 1

Table (1.8 m x 0.9 m ) 2

Chairs with padded seats 12 3

Meeting room table (2.6 m x 1.6 m) 1

Meeting room chairs 12

Drawing board with parallel motion 1

Drawing stools 1

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

58
 Plan chest – 8 drawers 1

Drawing rack with suspension arms 1

Filing cabinets with file suspension system (4 draws) 2

Shelf units (stack of 5, 1.8 m x 0.3 m ) 6 1

Cupboards (1.7 m x 0.9 m x 0.3 m) with 3 shelves
2
and lock
Telephone system with 5 extensions 1

Single Telephone Installation 1

Internet access points 4 1

Crockery and cutlery For 15 people For 6 people

Electric kettle 1 litre 1 1

Electric kettle 2 litre 1

Coffee maker 1 litre 1 1

Saucepans 2 2

Clothes stand 3 1

Refrigerator (150 Litres) 1

Refrigerator (50 Litres) 1 1

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

59
 1. PREPARATORY WORKS

CHAPTER 101. SITE PREPARATION

101.01. Introduction
The chapter describes the surveying and setting out required to be carried out by the Contractor
for the purposes of executing the Works.

101.02. General
The Contractor is required to carry out all survey works required for the execution oif the Works.
Basic data in respect of key setting out points and levels will be provided by the Engineer. All
further setting out is the responsibility of the Contractor.

101.03. Works description

Surveying and Setting Out
The surveying and setting out works will be done according to SNiP 3.01.03-84.
At the commencement of the Works the Contractor shall immediately undertake a complete
resurvey of the works using, and at the same time verifying, the base data provided by the
Engineer. Any suspected error or discrepancy in the base data must be reported immediately to
the Engineer who will make whatever corrections may be required and inform the Contractor.
This work must be carried out well in advance of the permanent works. No claim for delay or
extra cost, other than changes in cost arising from consequent changes in quantities, will be
entertained as a result of errors in the base data, although Sub-Clause 1.9 [Delayed Drawings
or Instructions] of the Conditions of Contract remains in full force and affect.
The Contractor will establish clear centre line references and benchmarks at intervals of not
more than 250 metres throughout the length of the project together with additional centreline
references for all curve and curve start and end points, curve midpoints and, if appropriate,
tangent intersection points (IPs).
The complete list of centreline references and benchmark values shall be submitted to the
Engineer who shall carry out such checks as he may deem fit and shall approve the list which
shall then become the basis for the line and level control of the Works. Notwithstanding the
approval of the Engineer, the Contractor remains wholly responsible for the completeness and
accuracy of the above list and for the continued preservation of all references and benchmarks
until the completion of the Works.
Construction Drawings
A comprehensive condition survey of all of the existing elements of the highway shall be carried
out by the Contractor under the supervision of the Engineer. The Contractor shall prepare strip
plans to clearly differentiate between defects, if any, included for by the designs and
requirement, if any, for additional works.
The Contractor shall prepare Draft Construction Drawings in accordance with Subsection
006.02 based upon and in fulfillment of the intentions of the design implicit in the contract
drawings, including any necessary corrections for identified defects, in sufficient detail to allow
the works to be constructed and measured accordingly and to minimise the estimated Cost of
the works to be executed.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

60
 During the preparation of the the Draft Construction Drawings the Contractor shall implement
the design safety improvement recommendations of the Road Safety Audit, carried out by the
Employer on the Tender Design Drawings. The approved design safety improvements and
further agreed necessary traffic calming measures shall be incorporated into the construction
drawings.
The Contractor shall submit his Proposal for construction (in accordance with the Draft
Construction Drawings and Road Safety Audit), with a detailed quantity and cost estimate and a
programme for execution within the Time for Completion.
The Contractor shall prepare and submit the Draft Construction Drawings, within a period of 4
months after the Commencement Date, in sufficient detail to allow the Conractor to proceed
with the works in accordance with the Programme.
Within 14 days after Contractor's submission, the Engineer shall review the conformity of
the Contractor’s draft Construction Drawings, require corrections as necessary. The
Engineer, in responding to the Contractor shall list the specific omissions / corrective
measures necessary to enable him to approve the documents, and, when he determines
the draft Construction Drawings to be technically and financially acceptable, forward the
submission to the Employer for approval.

If no changes to the design or contract drawing, then the Engineer pass the Construction
Drawings for the Employer approval, but if there are changes to the design or contract drawings
then the parties should follow GCC 13.1 – 13.3 as applicable and (subject to the approval of
the Employer) issued to the Contractor as ‘Approved for Construction’.

Following the completion of the review/approval process the Contractor shall prepare the Final
Construction Drawings.
Moldovan Law No. 721, on Quality in Construction,
Art. 13. - (1) of Law No. 721, dated 2nd February 1996, on Quality in Construction, requires that
construction works, as well as modernization, change, transformation, consolidation and repair
can be done only based on a project elaborated by natural or legal persons licensed in this field
and checked by State Service for Verification and Expertise of Projects and Constructions.
It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the final Construction Drawings are
elaborated by natural or legal persons licensed in the respective field, and to resolve non-
conformities and discrepancies reported by the State Service for Verification and Expertise of
Projects and Constructions.
It is the responsibility of the Employer to present the final Construction Drawings for verification
to the State Service for Verification and Expertise of Projects and Constructions.
The time period for the Employer to review of the final Construction Drawings is 14 days from
the date of submission of the final Construction Drawings by the Contractor. Subsequently, the
time period for the Employer to obtain the verification of the final Construction Drawings from
the State Service for Verification and Expertise of Projects and Constructions and to issue the
verified final Construction Drawings to the Contractor is 30 days from the date of Employer’s
approval of the final Construction Drawings.

101.04. Works Acceptance

Measurements
• The surveying and setting out works will be measured in kilometres or parts of
a kilometre.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
61
 Payment
Surveying and Setting Out
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid according
to the unit price per kilometre provided in the contract.
Payment for the work of survey and setting out shall be made in accordance with the progress
of the work.
30% of the cost shall be payable on acceptance by the Engineer of the list of references and
benchmarks.
50% shall be payable on acceptance of the milling and regulating and/or the construction of new
pavement to top of crushed base by the Engineer as ready for laying of asphalt paving courses.
20% shall be payable on completion and acceptance of the finished wearing course.
Construction and Record DrawingsThe costs and expense of preparing Construction and
Record Drawings prepared by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer shall be included in
the rates and prices entered by the Contractor in the Bills of Quantities.
The payment shall be made under the following item:

No. Item Unit of Measure

10101 Surveying and setting out works Kilometre

10102 Preparation of construction drawings Kilometre

10103 Preparation of record drawings Kilometre

CHAPTER 102. SITE CLEARANCE
102.01. Introduction
This chapter deals with site clearing, the removal of topsoil and the removal of trees, roots and
stumps.

102.02. Generalities
Wherever the Works require terrain clearing, including removal of shrubs and bushes, removal
of topsoil, and the removal of trees, having a diaMetre exceeding 200 mm at a height of 1 metre
above the ground, such works shall be executed under this Chapter. Topsoil shall be removed
at locations and to a depth to be indicated by the Engineer.
Roots and stumps shall be removed to a depth of at least 1 metre below finished ground or
subgrade level.
Topsoil shall be set aside in areas selected by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer for
reuse in soiling areas of cut and embankment slopes. It shall be carefully preserved and shall
not be mixed with other material. The material must not contain harmful impurities, hard
particles, clay, garbage, stones etc, and shall be used according to SNiP 3.06.03-85 and SNiP
2.05.02-85.
Trees will be removed only where specifically directed by the Engineer. Where trees are
removed the roots and stumps will be extracted to a depth of at least 1.00 m below finished
ground level or below subgrade level as appropriate. The holes will be filled and compacted, in
layers not greater than 20 cm, in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 203.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

62
 Trees, roots, bush and other matter unsuitable for reuse shall be burnt or otherwise disposed of
in a manner acceptable to the local authorities and to the Engineer. Burning shall be in
accordance with the requirements of Chapter 103 below.

102.03. Works acceptance

The works acceptance will verify that the above described works have been done in accordance
with the drawings and technical specifications, and in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Measurement
The works for terrain clearing, removal of topsoil, tree clearance and root extraction will be
measured in hectar (ha) or cubic Metres of topsoil removed and stored for reuse or Pieces as
appropriate.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid according
to the unit price provided in the Contract. The payment made under this item shall be the full
and complete payment for the completed works indicated in the present chapter.
Payment will be made under the following item:

No. Item Unit of Measure

Removal of topsoil - stripping, loaded, transported and
10202 Cubic Metre
stockpiled for re-use
10203 Tree clearance and disposal Pieces

CHAPTER 103. DEMOLITION

103.01. Introduction
This chapter deals with the removal of traffic signs, service poles, fences, kerbs, guard rails,
kilometre posts, foundation to paved area and such like items and their storage for future use
and/or their burning or disposal by other means.

103.02. Backfill Materials

Where backfill materials are required they shall be used in accordance with the provisions of
Chapter 203.07.

103.03. The use of materials

Where directed by the Engineer all recoverable materials will be saved. Recoverable items shall
be salvaged in readily transportable sections or pieces.
Recovered items shall either be for reuse in the Works or for reuse by the Employer. The
Engineer will indicate which item or group of items will be subject to reuse. In the event that
items are for reuse by the Employer the Contractor shall deliver them to a yard or storage area
indicated by the Engineer. Items for reuse will generally comprise signs, including posts and all
fittings, and guardrails.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

63
 All reusable items for the Works are to be carefully stored on site by the Contractor who shall
repair or change all sign and guard rail components and fixing systems, lost or damaged.

103.04. Removing Material

Concrete or stone kerb shall be removed entirely, including any backing concrete and shall be
disposed at landfill sites agreed with the local authorities and approved by the Engineer.
After the removal of poles or posts all holes will be filled and compacted, in layers not greater
than 20 cm, in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 203.
All filling material will be compacted using a mechanical or vibratory compactor.

103.05. Disposal of materials

The disposal of materials indicated for disposal will be made as follows:
a) Transportation off-site
The contractor will be responsible for the transportation of waste materials to disposal
areas/landfill sites agreed with the authorities having jurisdiction where materials will be
disposed of in accordance with the local by-laws and the requirements of the specification.
One copy of all documentation providing the agreement with the authority having
jurisdiction for the use of such site(s) shall be given to the Engineer. No such
disposal/landfill sites shall used without the approval of the Engineer.
b) Burning of Debris
Burnable materials that are to not to be reused may be disposed of by burning. The
Contractor shall obtain the approval of the authorities having jurisdiction for disposal by
burning before any action is taken. A copy of the document approving both the burning
process and the site at which it is to be carried out shall be submitted to the Engineer for
his agreement before any burning is carried out. No items shall be burnt without the
express approval of the Engineer.
When the burning process is finished the fire will be extinguished. All materials remaining,
ash or incompletely burned items shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with the
provisions of paragraph (a) above.

103.06. Works acceptance

The works acceptance will verify that the above described works have been done in accordance
with the drawings and technical specifications, and in accordance with
Sub-Clause 001.02 and in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Measurement
The movement of the traffic signs, poles, marker posts, kilometre posts, and such like will be
measured by Pieces and the removal of guard rail and kerb by Metre. Measurement under
these items will include all ancillary works including backfilling holes and removal and disposal
of debris.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

64
 under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

CHAPTER 104. NOT USED

CHAPTER 105. TEMPORARY ROADS AND SIGNING

105.01. Introduction
This Chapter deals with the construction and removal of temporary diversion roads at new
structures or road works, together with assembly and dismantling of temporary traffic direction
signs required for the security of traffic whilst works are in progress.
The traffic control installations on temporary roads or carriageway diversions required for
working shall be in accordance with VSN 37-84 and GOST 23457-86. Temporary sign
installation shall be made in accordance with the requirements of these specifications and the
drawings.

105.02. Materials
Materials for temporary signs shall comply with the following requirements
• Dimensions of traffic signs for the construction period: SM GOST 10807-78.
• Reflective foils: appendix 3 to SM GOST 10807-78.
• Signposts made of reinforced concrete: SM GOST 25459-82.

105.03. Generalities
Directing and diverting traffic, and separation of the working area shall be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of chapter 007 [Traffic Management] and of the traffic
regulations in VSN 37-84.
During the working period the following requirements shall be observed:
a) The positioning of signposts, barriers, cones and other marking devices will be
proposed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer before the work starts.
b) Signs, diversions, barriers and other markings shall be limited to those required for the
works actually in progress.
c) The location of temporary signposts, diversions, barriers and other markings will be
changed as needed.
d) The signs, diversions, barriers and other markings which are not required for the
current stage of work will be dismantled or covered.
e) The Contractor will repair or replace any damaged or defective signs, diversions,
barriers and other markings at his own cost immediately upon receipt of a request from
the Engineer to rectify them.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

65
 f) All sign installations will be kept clean.
g) The reflective foils on signs, cones and barriers will be changed or replaced as
necessary or as directed in case of deterioration.
h) All temporary traffic signs, diversions, barriers and other markings shall be dismantled
and removed after finishing the works.

105.04. Barriers
Barriers shall be erected in accordance with Sub-Clause 105.03. Barriers may be of metal,
wood or plastic and shall be erected wherever traffic is required to be diverted from its normal
location on the road. They shall be used in conjunction with cones to separate traffic moving in
opposite directions and to separate work areas from moving traffic.

105.05. Cones
Cones shall be erected in accordance with Sub-Clause 105.03 and shall be used in conjunction
with barriers for the purposes stated in Sub-Clause 105.04 above.

105.06. Temporary signs

All temporary signs for traffic organization will be formed using approved reflective material. The
signs used will be made of wood, metal, or other approved material.

105.07. Flagmen and traffic lights

Where flagmen are used for directing traffic they shall be adequately trained and shall be
equipped with reflective protective clothing (vests), distinctive flags and/or batons. Where traffic
lights are provided, if they are under automatic control the sequence of operations shall be
carefully programmed to provide intervals suitable for the traffic density and distance between
lights.

105.08. Provision of Diversion Roads

Where it is not possible or, in the Contractor’s view less economical, to maintain the traffic on
part of the existing paved road, the Contractor shall construct diversion roads. Every effort shall
be made to accommodate such diversions within the existing right of way. If this is not possible,
any area of land required shall be acquired or leased by the Contractor from the adjacent
landowners/proprietors. The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the provision of any
land required for diversions and shall ensure that any such land is returned to its original
condition as soon as the works which necessitated the diversion are complete.

105.09. Construction of Diversion Roads

For each diversion road, the Contractor shall prepare a design and Traffic Management Plan
which shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The required width of the diversion shall
be instructed by the Engineer. In no case shall diversion roads comprise less than 2
lanes, unless this is not otherwise practical and expressly approved by the Engineer, each of
2.8 metres in width. Diversion roads construction shall be, as a minimum, 200 mm subbase,

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

66
 150 mm base, 50 mm asphalt concrete, all constructed on a thoroughly compacted subgrade
having a CBR not less than 6% for a depth of 300 mm.
Diversion roads shall only be eligible for payment when constructed at locations where the
Engineer is satisfied that maintenance of traffic on the existing pavement during the works is
impossible. Such circumstances will only be considered where the works to be executed involve
the raising of the existing road on embankment or the construction or heavy reconstruction of a
bridge or major drainage structure. The need to reconstruct the full width of the road or to apply
waterproofing or carry out individual beam replacement to a bridge deck will not be a cause for
provision of paid diversion roads and such works must be executed in half widths whilst
maintaining traffic on the other half. Locations where diversion roads are accepted as being
necessary are indicated on the drawings.
Where diversion roads are required in respect of bridgeworks or in other cases where provision
must be made for water to pass under the diversion, the Contractor shall design the necessary
structure and shall provide necessary hydrological calculations to demonstrate that the
proposed temporary waterway is adequate. Notwithstanding the Engineer’s approval of a
diversion road, the Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the adequacy of the design and
shall accept full responsibility for maintenance of traffic over the diversion at all times.
Before construction of any diversion road, preparatory works shall be executed in accordance
with chapters 101, 102, 103.
The Contractor shall divert traffic onto diversion roads under the provisions of this chapter and
shall ensure that diverted traffic is completely separated from the area of the Works. After
finishing the works, the diversion road is to be removed and the terrain restored to its original
condition.
The Contractor shall maintain all diversion roads in a satisfactory condition, free from ruts
potholes, standing water or any other inconvenience to traffic, complete with all approved
signing and lighting, from the time when they are opened to traffic until such time as they are no
longer required.
All materials resulting from the clearance of diversion roads shall be removed from the site and
disposed of in accordance with the requirements of Sub-Clause 103.05 unless the Engineer
gives permission for their reuse in the Works. Materials arising from the clearance of diversion
roads shall not be used in any layer of new pavement other than as subbase or improved
subgrade and then only with the approval of the Engineer.

105.10. Illumination of Signs

All key signs, as indicated by the Engineer, shall be illuminated at night.

105.11. Barriers, cones, temporary signs

The Contractor shall locate, operate, maintain and remove after finishing the works, or at
Engineer’s order, remove all the barriers, cones, markings, signs, lights and such like
concerning traffic control and diversion. During the progress of the Works, the Contractor shall
change the position of these control items as required. Barriers shall have amber warning lights
if instructed and such shall be located correctly so as to be clearly visible.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

67
 105.12. Operation of Temporary Installations
The operation of the temporary installation, executed according to the Contract, will include the
maintenance of the reflective surfaces of signs, cones and barriers.

105.13. Acceptance
The execution of the temporary roads and traffic directing installations will be accepted only
when the work is done according to the drawings and the specifications and has been
approved by the Engineer.
Measurements
Measurement of the works required for the provision of authorised diversion roads will be made
in Metres of diversion authorised to be constructed.
No separate payment will be made for temporary traffic signs, barriers or any other measures
for traffic required for the temporary roads or for traffic diversions or for one-way traffic systems
required for the Works. All such traffic management provisions are deemed to be included in the
payment described in Chapter 007 or in the payment for diversion roads described below.
Payment
The provision of approved, authorised diversion roads for the execution of road or bridge works
will be paid by the Metre of diversion road provided at the rate or price per metre in the Bill of
Quantities. Payment will be made only for those locations and lengths of diversion road that are
specifically indicated in the Drawings. Any other diversion road which the Contractor decides to
construct shall be entirely at his own cost.

No. Item Unit of Measure

10501 Provide diversion road Linear Metre

Payment for diversion roads will be in three parts:

40% of the amount will be paid upon completion of the diversion road.
40% of the amount will be paid in equal monthly instalments over the anticipated period in
which the diversion will be in use. The Contractor shall advise the Engineer of such
anticipated period with his submittal of his Traffic Management Plan. If it becomes
apparent to the Engineer that the period of use will be longer than informed he shall
reduce the payments accordingly such that payment is equally distributed over the
extended period. No payment shall be made for any month in which the Contractor fails
to maintain the diversion in accordance with the requirements of the Specification and the
total amount payable in respect of the diversion shall be reduced accordingly.
20% of the amount will be paid when the diversion has been removed and the terrain
returned to its original condition.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

68
 2. EARTHWORKS

CHAPTER 201. THE EXECUTION OF THE EARHWORKS

201.01. Introduction
This chapter deals with the procuring, furnishing, and placing of materials for earthworks
including the excavation, storage (stockpiling), transporting the material for preparing,
processing, shaping, watering, mixing, levellingand compacting the earthworks to its specified
densities and to its finished grade and level.

201.02. Earthworks
Earthworks consist of the following
a) Excavation
Excavation along the length of the road to the full construction profile, excluding the
removal of the topsoil which is stored and reused and which is described in chapter 102
and 203. Excavation includes the excavation, forming and enlargement of roadside drains.
b) The operation of borrow pits
If the volume of suitable material arising from the works of excavation is insufficient to
meet the requirements for construction of embankments, additional material shall be
provided from borrow pits.
c) Stockpiling of suitable material
Under some circumstances during the rectification of slip areas it will be impossible for the
Contractor to reuse material immediately in the embankment. In these cases material shall
be stored and reused at a later date.
d) Embankment construction
The embankments will be executed according to SNiP 2.05.02-85, SNiP 3.02.01-87, SNiP
3.06.03-85.

201.03. Material
The material shall comply with SNiP 2.05.02-85.
The materials for the embankment construction shall be free from “Unsuitable materials”.
Unsuitable material shall include material from swamps, marshes and bogs, peat, logs, stumps,
roots and other perishable or combustible material and highly organic clay and silt material
having a liquid limit above 65%, or more than 80% passing the 75 microns sieves to BS 410 or
such other material as the Engineer may decide.
All fill material for embankment construction, except the 300 mm below formation, shall have a
CBR of not less than 6% measured after a 4-day soak on a laboratory mix compacted to a dry
density of 95 % MDD (AASHTO T180), a swell of less than 1% and a Plasticity Index of less
than 17 and shall be compacted in accordance with NCM D.02.01:2015 Chapter 7.
The fill material in the layer 200 mm below formation (subgrade) in embankments shall have a
CBR of not less than 10% measured after a 4-day soak on a laboratory mix compacted to a dry
density of 95% MDD (AASHTO T180), a swell of less than 1%, сontent of dust particles less
than 50% and a Plasticity Index of less than 7, and shall be compacted in accordance with NCM
D.02.01:2015 Chapter 7.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
69
 The materials for the embankment construction shall not contain oversize materials larger than
100 mm, and for the 300 mm layer below formation level shall not contain oversize larger than
50 mm.
The selected fill materials for shoulder construction shall have less than 30% passing the 75
micron sieve to BS 410, shall have a Plasticity Index less than 17 and shall have a soaked CBR
of not less than 15%, measured after a 4-day soak on a laboratory mix compacted to a dry
density of 95% MDD and shall be compacted to 98% MDD.

201.04. Preparatory work

Prior to commencing earthworks all the required site preparation, site clearance and demolition
shall be completed in compliance with chapters 101, 102 and 103.

201.05. The stockpiling of topsoil

Topsoil must be stockpiled in locations separated from the earthworks and apart from any other
type of soil or materials.

201.06. Construction works

The construction will be executed according to SNiP 3.06.03-85.
General directions:
It is forbidden to damage the ground, topsoil, crops, buildings and installations outside the
precise area delineated for the execution of earthworks. Haul roads, where required, must be
set out beforehand and approved by the Engineer. Haul road provision will be entirely at the
cost of the Contractor who must abide by all local regulations and requirements as well as all
the requirements of this specification.

201.07. The operation of borrow pits

Where the Contractor finds it necessary to import material for earthworks onto the site from
borrow pits he shall be entirely responsible for the location and operation of such pits and for
obtaining all necessary permits and authorisations as well as for all acquisition of borrow pit
areas and meeting all claims for compensation resulting from the operation of such borrow pits.
The operation of borrow pits shall comply in all respects with all requirements of this
specification.
Borrow pits will be executed in a neat and regular manner so as measurements can be made
when the work is finished.
The borrow pits will be restored according to the national norms and standards and in
accordance with the requirements of this Specification.

201.08. The stockpiling of material

Where the Contractor finds it necessary to stockpile material arising from the excavations
contingent upon slip remedial works he shall be entirely responsible for the location and
operation of suitable storage areas and for obtaining all necessary permits and authorisations
as well as for all acquisition of storage areas and meeting all claims for compensation resulting
from the operation of such areas. The operation of storage areas shall comply in all respects
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
70
 with all requirements of this specification. The areas used for storage will be restored according
to the national norms and standards and in accordance with the requirements of this
Specification as set out in relation to Borrow and Spoil areas.

201.09. Roadbed Preparation

The roadbed preparation of the in-situ treatment of the roadbed below the embankment fill shall
be executed as follows:
a) Embankments on existing slopes less than 3:1
The cleared area will be scarified or loosened to a 150 mm depth with a plough or a
scarifierand compacted in accordance with NCM D.02.01:2015 Chapter 7 to a minimum
depth of 150 mm.
b) Embankment on an existing slope steeper than 3:1
Cut horizontal benches in the existing slope to a sufficient width to accomodate placing
and compacting operations and necessary equipment. Bench the slope as the
embankment is placed and compacted in layers. Begin each bench at the intersection of
the original ground and the vertical cut of the previous bench. Benches need be no deeper
than two lifts of fill material; they may be cut as the work of filling proceeds and the
material arising from benches may be blended in with the fill material as work progresses.
No measurement or payment will be made for the work of benching which shall be
considered as an ancillary work to the construction of embankments. The in-situ treatment
of the roadbed on which the embankment will be constructed shall be compacted in
accordance with NCM D.02.01:2015 Chapter 7 to a minimum depth of 150 mm.

201.10. Construction of Embankments

The embankments will be executed according to SNiP 3.06.03-85, SNiP 2.05.02-85
requirements.
The material for construction of embankment shall be obtained to the maximum extent possible
from the general works of excavation on the site of the Works. Shortages of material shall be
made up by excavation in borrow areas.
In constructing embankments, soil shall be placed and compacted in layers of optimum
thicknesses of 150 mm; unless as a result of site compaction trials, the Contractor has satisfied
the Engineer that his compaction plant is capable of consistently achieving the specified
densities at a greater depth, but in no case shall this depth exceed 250 mm.. The embankment
construction shall be compacted in accordance with NCM D.02.01:2015 Chapter 7 with a field
moisture content +/-2% of the OMC.
During the construction of embankments the Contractor shall control and direct constructional
traffic uniformly over the full width. Fill material shall not be stockpiled on embankments without
the express permission of the Engineer.
When constructing embankments up to and over culverts, the Contractor shall raise the
embankment equally on each side of such structures and shall unless otherwise instructed by
the Engineer carry out this work concurrently with the filling to the structure as is feasible
without damaging the structure.
The Contractor shall form the embankment to the dimension and levels shown in the Contract
Drawings. No payment shall be made to the Contractor for any additional volume due the
construction greater than dimensions shown on the drawings.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

71
 At all times the Contractor shall ensure that earthworks are not damaged by weather or traffic.
In the event of such damage occurring the Engineer may withdraw approval from affected
Works until the Contractor has carried out repairs to restore the Works to their original condition.
The expenses of such repairs and additional testing will be borne by the Contractor.

201.11. Compaction
During compaction this moisture of the compacted backfill must not vary from the optimum
moisture content by more than 2%. The optimum moisture content for compaction (OMC) and
density shall be determined by testing according to SM GOST 22733-2009 and approved by the
Engineer. Following approval moisture content of the material for compaction it shall not deviate
from the approved value by more than +/- 2%. In the event that soil conditions or type render
the approved OMC invalid a revised OMC shall be determined by new tests and approved.
The particle size distribution is determined according to SM GOST 12536-79. Having the
Engineer’s approval the rate of compaction is determined according to SM GOST 5180-84
using Kovaliov’s equipment.
The types of compaction equipment to be used and the amount of rolling to be done shall be
determined through compaction trials and shall be such as to ensure that the specified densities
are obtained without damage being done to lower layers or structures. During compaction the
layer shall be maintained to the required shape and cross-section, and all holes, ruts and
laminations shall be removed.

201.12. Cutting and Finishing of Slopes

The cutting, the levelling and the finishing of the slopes will be executed according to
SNiP 3.06.03-85, SNiP 2.05.02-85 stipulations.

201.13. Formation of Subgrades

Where the pavement is to be placed on the completed earthworks for embankment construction
the upper 300 mm shall be classified as subgrade.
The subgrade shall be compacted in two layers in accordance with NCM D.02.01:2015 Chapter
7. The materials for the subgrade layers shall have a CBR of not less than 6% measured after a
4-day soak on a laboratory mix compacted to a dry density of 95% MDD (AASHTO T180), a
swell of less than 1% and a Plasticity Index of less than 17. Each subgrade layer of pavement
shall be finished to a surface profile parallel to the finished surface of the pavement shown on
the drawings within the level tolerance of +0/-35 mm. Where the surface is within this tolerance
but lower than the design level the Contractor may either raise the level by scarifying, adding
extra material, mixing and recompacting, or may make good the defect by the use of extra
material in the next course at his own cost. If the surface is out of tolerance it shall be made
good by either grading off the excess material or by scarifying, mixing and adding material as
appropriate, recompaction shall be carried out in either case.

201.14. Construction and Shaping of Shoulders

Where shoulders are to be constructed or reconstructed they shall be formed using selected fill
as specified in Sub-Clause 201.03. Where required the existing shoulders shall be reshaped
and regraded to conform to the required cross sections. Excess material shall be removed from
the site and run to spoil or additional, approved material shall be provided as necessary.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
72
 201.15. Excavation of Benches
Where the construction of benches having a vertical height greater than 750 mm and is
specifically called for in the drawings or instructed by the Engineer, the excavation of such
benches shall be measured and included in the volume of general excavation and the required
volume for filling these benches shall be included in the measured volume of embankment
construction.
No measurement shall be made of the volume of benches required to be cut in the normal
course of embankment construction as described in Sub-Clause 201.09 above and such work
shall be considered ancillary to the general work of excavation and forming embankment.

201.16. Geotextiles
201.16.01. Introduction
This work consists of furnishing and placing geotextile as a permeable separator or
permanent erosion control measure.
Geotextile types conform and are designated as shown in EN 13249.

201.16.02. General
Where placing a geotextile on native ground, cut the trees and shrubs flush with the
ground surface. Do not remove the topsoil and vegetation mat. Remove all sharp
objects and large rocks. Fill depressions or holes with suitable material to provide a
firm foundation.
Replace or repair all geotextile that is torn, punctured, or muddy. Remove the
damaged area and place a patch of the same type of geotextile overlapping 1 Metre
beyond the damaged area.

201.16.03. Separation and Stabilization Applications

Place the geotextile smooth and free of tension, stress, or wrinkles. Fold or cut the
geotextile to conform to curves. Overlap in the direction of construction. Overlap the
geotextile a minimum of 0.5 Metre at the ends and sides of adjoining sheets or sew
the geotextile joints according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not place
longitudinal overlaps below anticipated wheel loads. Hold the geotextile in place with
pins, staples, or piles of cover material.
End dump the cover material onto the geotextile from the edge of the geotextile or
from previously placed cover material. Do not operate equipment directly on the
geotextile. Spread the end-dumped pile of cover material maintaining a minimum lift
thickness of 300 milliMetres. Compact the cover material with rubber-tired or
nonvibratory smooth drum rollers.
Avoid sudden stops, starts, or turns of the construction equipment. Fill all ruts from
construction equipment with additional cover material. Do not regrade ruts with
placement equipment.
Place subsequent lifts of cover material in the same manner. Vibratory compactors
may be used for compacting subsequent lifts. If foundation failures occur, repair the
damaged areas and revert to the use of nonvibratory compactionequipment.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
73
 201.16.04. Measurement
Measure earthwork geotextile by the square Metre excluding overlaps. The
accepted quantities, measured as provided above, will be paid at the contract price
per unit of measurement for the pay item listed below that is shown in the bid
schedule. Payment will be full compensation for the work prescribed in this Section.
No allowance will be made for overlaps, cutting, wastage, etc. and no additional
payment will be made for any special handling, storage or transport requirements;
all such shall be included in the basic rate.

201.17. Embankment Erosion Protection

201.17.01. Introduction
The works under this chapter include the provision of protection to embankment
slopes on land slide sections as presented in the Geotechnical drawings.

201.17.02. Materials
The materials used for these works must comply with the following requirements:
Crushed stone M GOST 8267-93***.
Geotextile (for filter function) item 014.03 of Technical specification.

201.17.03. General requirements

The steep ridge slope and the embankment slopes shall be protected against
erosion as shown in the Geotechnical drawing GDXX. The road surface drainage is
arranged as shown the design with concrete side drains. The erosion protections
comprise of geotextile filter and granular fill composing of crushed stone (#10/40
mm) with layer thickness of 1000 mm. The existing topsoil and disturbed loose fill
shall be cut as step wise to enable effective compaction of the granular fill as shown
in the Drawings.

201.17.04 Protection layers construction

Shape the existing slope and the road embankment slope as shown in the
Drawings.
Place and anchor the geotextile on an approved smooth-graded surface. For slope
or wave protection, place the long dimension of the geotextile down the slope. For
stream bank protection, place the long dimension of the geotextile parallel to the
centerline of the channel.
Overlap the geotextile a minimum of 300 milliMetres at the ends and sides of
adjoining sheets or sew the geotextile joints according to the manufacturer's
recommendations. Overlap the uphill or upstream sheet over the downhill or
downstream sheet. Offset end joints of adjacent sheets a minimum of 1.5 Metres.
Pins may be used to hold the geotextile sheets in place. Space pins along the
overlaps at approximately 1-Metre centers.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

74
 Place slope protection aggregate on the geotextile starting at the toe of the slope
and proceed upward. The protection aggregate shall be laid compacted in layers in
accordance with NCM D.02.01:2015 Chapter 7.

201.18. Acceptance of work

The acceptance of the earthworks is made according to Sub-Clause 001.04 with the condition
of carrying them out according SNiP 2.05.02-85, SNiP 3.06.03-85, project stipulations and to
Engineer’s instructions and approval.

Measurements
The measurements will be done as follows:
a) Embankment Construction using material from General Excavation or from
Borrow
Measurement will be in cubic Metres in final position to the lines and levels shown on the
drawings measured to the nominal ground level after removal of any topsoil to the depth
as instructed by the Engineer less any volume to be paid as embankment using material
from stockpile. The item includes the roadbed preparation of the in-situ ground below new
embankment. The Contractor will make any necessary adjustments to levels to allow for
settlement of the embankment or of the foundation on which the embankment is placed.
Fill to any areas where unsuitable material has been removed to the instructions of the
Engineer will be measured under this item.
b) Excavation
Excavation to existing shoulders, embankments or cutting slopes will be measured in cubic
Metres. The item will include for the excavation of any materials found with the exception
of rock. Suitable material from the excavation, approved by the Engineer for such use,
shall be incorporated in embankments, or if of suitable quality used as select fill to
shoulders, and all other material, unsuitable or surplus, shall be taken off-site and
disposed of in spoil areas in accordance with the Specification. (The removal of paved
areas is covered in Chapter 302 and foundations to paved areas are covered in Chapter
103). The item includes for the loading and transport of material from areas of cut to the
site of embankment, to shoulders or to spoil. Excavation of benches is included under
general excavation but will only be measured and paid for when the benches are greater
than 750 mm. In vertical height and are specifically called for in the drawings or are
instructed by the Engineer.
c) Borrow Materials
Materials obtained from borrow pits will be measured in cubic Metres as the volume of
material calculated as being required for incorporation into the Works. The item includes
for incidental work as detailed in Sub-Clause 201.07. The volume of material eligible for
payment as Borrow shall be the volume required to make good the required volume of
Embankment construction after deducting the volume of material available from
Excavation and from all other excavation works where excavated material is approved by
the Engineer for use in Embankments. The item includes for the loading and transports of
material from borrow pits to the site of embankment.
d) Shoulders
Select fill for shoulders shall be measured in cubic metres of material required to conform
to the standard cross sections. The rate shall include for sourcing the material, loading,

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

75
 transporting, unloading, placing shaping and compacting. The regrading of shoulders shall
be measured in square metres of shoulder regraded and the price shall include for the
costs of running surplus material to spoil and for the supply of additional surface material
where required to make up to level.
e) Embankment Erosion Protection
The slope protection and repair works with reinforced concrete cast-in-situ and the river
bed protection with boulder rock will be measured in square Metres of the protected or
repaired surface.
The work of filling and making good the cone slopes with free draining material will be
accepted and measured in accordance with chapter 500.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter. The rate shall include full compensation for procuring,
furnishing and placing the material, including excavation, the cutting of benches, transporting,
preparing, processing, shaping, watering, mixing and compacting the material to the densities
as specified.
Payment will be made under some or all of the items below:

No. Item Unit of Measure

Load, place and compact in road embankment, incl
20101 haulage and benching of embankment slope for widen the Cubic Metre
existing road embankment (material from cut to fill)
Provide suitable material for fill in embankment and access
20101 A Cubic Metre
roads adjustments, incl haulage and compaction
Excavate after removal of bituminous surface all type of
material in road area and access roads adjustments to any
20102 A Cubic Metre
depth as directed by the Engineer (cut to spoil) and
dispose in contractors dump site
20104 Finishing and trimming of cut and fill slopes Square Metre

20105 Shaping of the subgrade layer (formation level) Square Metre

20106 Shape and compact subgrade (Shoulders) cubic Metre

20107 Placement of geotextile and filter separating membrane Square Metre

Payment for the formation of embankment will be made in full when the embankment has been
placed, compacted to Specification and trimmed to shape.
Payment for excavation will be made in full for excavated materials to be placed in Embankment
when the compacted embankment is approved by the Engineer.
For excavated materials directed to be run to spoil, either as unsuitable material or as surplus to
requirements, or to be otherwise disposed of, payment will be in two parts: one half of the
payment due will be made when the material is removed from site and the other half of the

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

76
 payment due will be made when the spoil areas or other disposal sites have been completely
made good in accordance with the requirements of this Specification.
Payment for excavation in Borrow areas will be in two parts: one half of the payment due will be
made when the borrowed material is placed in Embankment and the other half of the payment
due will be made when the borrow areas or pits have been completely made good in
accordance with the requirements of this Specification.

CHAPTER 202. THE EXECUTION OF DITCHES

202.01. Introduction
This chapter deals with the execution of all ditches outside the road cross-section, other than
roadside drains already included in the item for general excavation.

202.02. Preparatory work

The ground will be cleared before the commencement of works according to the requirements
of chapter 102.

202.03. General
The ditches will be executed according to the project design and, if necessary, any detail design
required on site and the additional instructions of the Engineer, specifying the ditch dimensions,
the bottom grade and the horizontal location.
The ditches will be cleaned periodically and kept in such conditions that water flow in the
ditches is wholly unobstructed.
Where directed by the Engineer or called for in the drawings the material arising from ditch
excavation shall be placed on the downhill side of the ditch as a bund to increase capacity and
provide additional protection to downhill areas. Such bunds shall be constructed with a constant
level difference between crest of bund and invert of ditch. Material will be transported along the
line of the ditch as necessary to meet this requirement. Bunds shall be compacted to 95% of the
theoretical maximum requirement determined by SM GOST 22733-2009.
At the end of the execution and before the issue of the Taking-over certificate, all ditches will be
completely cleaned of tree branches, debris, silt and any other obstructions of whatsoever
nature.
Materials arising from the excavation of ditches shall be used in the construction of
embankments unless utilised in bunds or unsuitable or surplus to requirements. ´

202.04. Works acceptance

The acceptance of the executed ditches and bunds will be done according to Sub-Clause
001.04 stipulations.
Measurements
The work for execution of the ditches will be measured in cubic Metres of material required to
be excavated.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

77
 Payment
The measured volume, as indicated above, will be paid at the contract price per unit of
measurement indicated as follows:

No. Item Unit of Measure

20201 Excavation of ditches outside the road cross section Cubic Metre

Payment for the excavation of ditches shall include for the transportation of material to
embankment sites or to approved spoil areas and for the incorporation of the material into the
embankment or for the making good of spoil areas as appropriate and for the construction of
bunds as described above. Payment shall be made in full for excavated materials placed in
embankment or in bunds when the compacted embankment is approved by the Engineer. For
excavated materials directed to be run to spoil or to be otherwise disposed of, payment will be
in two parts: one half of the payment due will be made when the material is removed from site
and the ditch properly shaped and accepted and the other half of the payment due will be made
when the spoil areas or other disposal sites have been completely made good in accordance
with the requirements of this Specification.

CHAPTER 203. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR

STRUCTURES
203.01. Introduction
The Chapter deals with excavations for all kinds of structures.
The works include the excavation for foundation pits and foundation works and their backfilling
using appropriate soil taken from the original excavation or borrow pit and the transportation of
surplus materials to a site of embankment or to approved spoil areas.

203.02. Materials for Backfill

The soil used for backfilling works shall not incorporate unsuitable material as specified in Sub-
Clause 201.03, oversize material, clay or soil susceptible to moisture movements. Back fill
materials should be of granulaer materials equivalent to sub-base standards as required for the
road works.

203.03. Preparation
The ground will be without vegetation and the remaining materials shall be in accordance to
Chapters 101, 102, 103 and SNiP 3.02.01-87.

203.04. Generalities
The excavation works for trenches, or foundation pits shall be carried out to the level indicated
in the drawings without disturbing the underlying materials. This excavation shall include for any
bedding required for the structure.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

78
 The Contractor is responsible for the design, supply, mounting and movement of any revetment
or supporting structure required. Such revetment or support shall be supplied whenever the
depth of excavation exceeds 1.5 metres or whenever the Contractor considers it necessary at
any lesser depth. Without in any way relieving the Contractor of his responsibility for the
provision of temporary works and for the safety of his workers the Engineer may, if he considers
circumstances warrant, direct the Contractor to modify his working methods to provide greater
protection for his workers and the Contractor shall thereupon provide such greater protection at
his own cost.
The Contractor is responsible for, and must provide, such temporary works, including items
such as temporary bridges for pedestrians and vehicles, as may be necessary to permit the
general public free and unobstructed use of the roads throughout the execution of the works
wherever the works intersect with any public facility.
All excavation will be provided with safety barriers, warning signage, lighting, water pumping
and drainage as required for safe working conditions.
Backfilling shall be carried out simultaneously and equally on both sides of the structure to avoid
unequal lateral forces.
When backfilling with soil, material will be compacted at +/-2% of the optimum moisture content
determined according to SM GOST 22733-2009.
Backfill materials will be compacted for each course, until the homogenous density will be no
less than 95% out of the maximum density, according to SM GOST 22733-2009.
Any excavation and filling of the foundation pits shall be approved by the Engineer.

203.05. Preparation of Foundation works

Where ground conditions are such that a satisfactory foundation at final excavation level can not
be achieved the Contractor shall remove the unsuitable material either until a suitable material
is encountered or to the depth and width agreed by the Engineer and it shall be replaced with
approved material compacted to 95% in accordance with SM GOST 22733-
2009.

203.06. Bedding
Where shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer bedding material shall be placed
beneath the structures. Depth of excavation shall take into account the required thickness of
any bedding. Bedding shall be a granular, free draining material conforming to SNiP
2.05.02-85.
a) Structures other than culverts
Place, shape, and compact bedding materials confirming to the specified standard in
layers not exceeding 150 mm.
b) Culverts
The bottom of the excavation shall be compacted to 92% MDD (AASHTO T180) prior to
the placement of granular bedding layer or concrete foundation. The granular bedding
layer, in the thickness as specified in the drawings, shall be compacted to 95% MDD
(AASHTO T180), and in layers not exceeding 150 mm. Bedding shall be according to VSN
81-90, SNiP 2.05.03-84 and typical Album 3.501.1-144, also VSN 24-88. Where
applicable, recess the shaped bedding to receive the joints according to SNiP 2.05.03-84.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

79
 203.07. Backfill General
All backfill shall conform to typical drawings 3.501.1-144 and VSN 24-88. The largest stone
shall not exceed 75 mm in its longest dimension.
a) General
Place backfill in horizontal layers not exceeding 150 mm in depth. Compact each layer
according to Sub-Clause 203.08.
Bring backfill up evenly on all sides of the structure, and extend each layer to the limits of
the excavation or to natural ground.
b) Culvert
Place and compact backfill material under the exposed portion of the haunch. The
Contractor shall take all necessary steps as directed by the Engineer to prevent frost
susceptibility of soils around and under culverts. Extend each layer to the sides of the
excavation, the natural groundline, or 3,5 metres beyond the edge of the structure,
whichever is less. Repeat the layering process to a minimum of 300 mm above the pipe
top.
Material for ditch backfill shall be suitable soil taken from cuts or borrow areas. Materials
are to be placed in layers of not more than 20 cm thick layers and shall be compacted in
accordance with subsection 201.11

203.08. Compaction
Compaction shall be obtained through the use of mechanical equipment such as rubber tired
rollers, vibrating rollers (steel wheeled), sheepsfoot rollers, hand operated plate vibratory
machines, and mechanical or hand tamping in very restricted areas.
Compaction Requirements are as follows:
• Under structures:
95% of maximum density (according to SNiP 2.05.02-85)
• Structures and trenches in roadway or beside roadway:
93% of maximum density
• Structures and trenches in right of way but not part of travelled way:
90% of maximum density
• Trenches off right of way:
Not less than 90% of maximum density.
Only materials meeting the backfill requirements standard shall be used.

203.09. Acceptance
The work will be accepted for payment providing that it has been built in conformance to the
drawings and specifications and approved by the Engineer including Chapter 001.
Measurement and Payment
Structural excavation, bedding, foundation fill, backfill and temporary support of excavation will
not be measured for payment. These costs shall be included in the cost of the structure.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

80
 CHAPTER 204. SHAPING AND PLANTING OF SLOPES AND
EXCAVATED SURFACES
204.01. Introduction
The chapter deals with the finishing of earthworks comprising the spreading and shaping of
topsoil, seeding and other forms of vegetating and watering as necessary throughout the period
of germination and first growth until a viable, self sustaining, vegetative layer has been
established.

204.02. Materials
Depending on the method adopted, materials shall conform to the requirements of:
Hydroseeding
ENIR E2-1-45
Seeding
ENIR E18-45
Bushes
Bushes and shrubs shall be selected from locally available stock and approved by the
Engineer. Approved bushes shall have a height, when fully grown, of some 1.5 to 3.0
Metres and shall be of species which exhibit a strong and extensive root system with
dense foliage.

204.03. Seeding Season

Seeding will be carried out at the start of the growing season. Seeding shall not be carried out
during strong winds, in very wet soil, in frozen soil, or under other unsuitable conditions.

204.04. Ground preparation for seeding

The selected ground will be graded to final shape and lightly scarified; topsoil spread to a depth
of not less than 150 mm and vegetation, stones bigger than 50 mm, etc. will be taken out. The
topsoil will be lightly compacted and then scarified to a depth of 100 mm. Planting and seeding
will take place immediately after scarification.
Bushes shall be planted by excavating a hole not less than 50 cm. diaMetre by 50 cm deep.
The bush shall be securely rooted in the prepared hole using a growing medium of black soil,
peat moss and sand approved by the Engineer. The hole shall be filled to within 5 cm of the
original ground level leaving a depression around the plant which will hold water during
watering. If bush vegetating is carried out using cuttings rather than young bushes, they shall be
planted in “nests” of 5-6 cuttings of a length of 0.5 to 0.8 m. planted at a depth of 0.45 to 0.6 m.
using a prepared hole as above.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

81
 204.05. Watering
The planted area will be lightly watered 10 days after seeding, or earlier if required in
exceptionally dry weather. Watering procedures and equipment shall be so designed that
adequate water is provided for germination and growth at all times and that no erosion of the
topsoil takes place. Watering shall preferably be carried out in the late afternoon or evening.

204.06. Fertilization
According to ENIR E2-1-45 or ENIR E18-24.

204.07. Seeding and Planting

The seeds shall be spread in accordance to ENIR E2-1-45 or ENIR E18-24.
Bushes of approved, selected species will be planted on all embankment and cutting slopes at
the rate of approximately one young bush or one “nest” of cuttings per 5 sq.m. Bushes or nests
will be planted in irregular patterns with a bias towards contour planting.

204.08. Preparation of Seeds

Preparation of the seeds will be done in accordance to ENIR E2-1-45 and/or ENIR E18.

204.09. Protection and maintenance of the plants

Protection and maintenance for growing plants will be provided including watering as needed
until works acceptance.
The Contractor shall rectify any areas where seeding has failed to germinate and he will repeat
the seeding exercise with the use of additional fertiliser, lime or ammonium nitrate as necessary
and using supplementary or alternative seeds as appropriate.
Three months after bushes have been planted an inspection will be made and any bushes
which are not growing properly shall be removed, the planting location reprepared and fertilised
and a new specimen planted.

204.10. Works acceptance

The works shall be accepted in accordance with the Technical Specifications including Chapter
001. The works will be paid 50% on completion of the seeding exercise and 50% when the
Engineer is satisfied that a complete, vigorous and viable growth of grass and bushes has been
satisfactorily established over the whole area under consideration which shall not be less than
2000 sq.m.
Measurements
Water to establish and maintain germination will not be measured but will be included in the
seeding cost per square Metre.
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid according
to the Unit Price of the Contract indicated in the tender. The payment is made for the completed
works indicated into the present chapter.
Payment
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
82
 No. Item Unit of Measure
Loading of stockpiled topsoil, spread on embankment
20401 Cubic Metre
slopes of min 150 mm thickness, light compaction
Provide grassing to embankment and road sides, incl
20403 Square Metre
maintenance up to end of defects liability period

CHAPTER 205. PLANTING OF TREES AND SHRUBS

205.01. Introduction
The chapter deals with the planting of trees, both at the roadside and on embankment slopes or
other areas as directed.

205.02. Materials
Materials shall be deciduous trees and large shrubs, such as poplar and willow trees, which
experience has shown will be suitable for the locations in which they are to be planted.

205.03. Planting Season

Planting will be carried out at the start of the growing season. Seeding shall not be carried out
during strong winds, in very wet soil, in frozen soil, or under other unsuitable conditions.

205.04. Planting
Trees shall be planted out in pits suitable for the seedlings dimensions and species. Pits shall
be dug by excavators or by earth augur machines, in cases where the sites are inaccessible to
equipment; pits shall be dug by hand. Edges of machine pits will normally require hand
trimming.
Each pit shall be partially filled with fertile soil with added compost, humus and fertiliser as
required and appropriate for the species being planted. For plants with bare or spreading roots
the initially charge of soil shall be formed into a hillock at about half the hole depth and for
plants with root balls into a pillow. Pits shall then be filled in layers with further fertile soil, each
layer being carefully and firmly compacted. Before planting the tree roots shall be trimmed and
the crown pruned as appropriate for the species. Trees shall be planted at spots indicated by
the Engineer or, for general tree cover at about 8 Metre spacing or such other spacing as may
be suitable for the species.

205.05. Watering
Immediately after planting, the tree shall thoroughly watered with about 25 litres of water soaked
into the planting soil. Thereafter the newly planted trees shall be carefully monitored for signs of
wilting or drying out and additional watering carried out as necessary depending on the climatic
conditions and the condition of the plants. Watering shall preferably be carried out in the late
afternoon or evening.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

83
 205.06. Fertilization
According to ENIR E2-1-45 or ENIR E18-24.

205.07. Protection and maintenance of the plants

Protection and maintenance for growing plants will be provided including watering as needed
until works acceptance.
Three months after trees have been planted an inspection will be made and any trees which are
not growing properly shall be removed, the planting location reprepared and fertilised and a new
specimen planted.

205.08. Works acceptance

The works shall be accepted in accordance with the Technical Specifications including Chapter
001. The works will be paid 50% on completion of the planting exercise and 50% when the
Engineer is satisfied that a complete, vigorous and viable tree growth has been satisfactorily
established. Payment will be per tree finally accepted. Payments on completion of planting will
be deducted in the event that no tree is finally established.
Measurements
Water to establish and maintain germination will not be measured but will be included in the
planting cost per tree.
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid according
to the unit price of the Contract indicated in the tender. The payment is made for the completed
works indicated into the present chapter.
Payment
The payment will be made under the following item.

No. Item Unit of Measure

20501 Planting of trees Pieces

20502 Planting of shrubs Pieces

3. PAVEMENT
CHAPTER 301. COLD RECYCLING OF THE ASPHALT
CONCRETE PAVEMENTS
PART A: GENERAL
This section of the specification includes requirements for the Cold Recycling of Asphalt
Concrete Pavements (CRACP) and related work as indicated on the drawings and as
hereinafter specified. The work consists of furnishing all plant, labour, equipment and materials
to perform all operations as required for the construction of CRACP as part of the pavement
base material.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

84
301.01 REFERENCE
The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.
301.01.1 Government Furnished Data
The results of the pavement coring and testing performed during the design phase are included
in Appendix H, Pavement Report, of the contract specifications for reference. This information
is offered in good faith but, in the circumstances pertaining to sampling and testing procedures
and the type of information furnished, no guarantee can be given that all the information is
correct or representative of the in-place conditions at the time of construction. Any reliance
placed by the contractor on this information shall therefore be at his own risk.
301.02 DEFINITION
Cold Recycling of Asphaltic Concrete Pavement (CRACP) is a technique of recycling the
existing asphalt pavement materials recovered through milling the existing asphalt pavement to
a certain depth and to mix the recovered material with new aggregates and binding agent in
such a proportion that the blended mix complies with the required gradation, strength and other
specified properties. The blended material is to be distributed, spread and compacted on top of
a tack-coated remaining asphalt or base layer to create a new Base layer of a pavement
system. These operations include:
 Breaking down and recovering material in the existing road asphalt;
 Changing the nature of the recovered material by the addition of imported material;
 Applying stabilizing agents and water; and
 Mixing, placing, compacting and shaping to achieve a new pavement Base layer.
301.03 SUBMITTALS
Government approval is required for submittals with a "G" designation; submittals not having a
"G" designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval. The following shall be submitted
for review and acceptance.
301.03.1 Product Data
 Aggregates(G)
 Portland Cement (G)
 Recycling Agent (G)
Submit notification on sources from which aggregates, cement and recycling agent are to be
obtained within 30 days after contract award.
301.03.2 Work Plan (G)
Submit the Work Plan after the award of the contract and at least 30days prior to placement of
recycled mixture. The Work Plan is as described in Section 301.05.
301.03.3 Job-Mix Formula (JMF) (G)
Submit the Job-Mix Formula (JMF) after the award of the contract and at least 30 days prior to
placement of recycled mixture. The JMF is as described in Section 301.06.
301.03.4 Samples (G)
Submit samples from the existing pavement obtained from at least five locations per one
kilometer of the road to be milled to provide representative samples of the pavement.
 Cold Recycled Mixtures (G)
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
85
 Submit a 50 kg sample of each aggregate, a 100 kg representative sample of the recyclable
asphalt
Pavement, a 20 L sample of recycling agent, and a 10 kg sample of Portland cement for mix
design, not less than 30 days before material is required in the work.
301.03.5 Test Reports (G)
Submit copies of test results within 24 hours of completion of tests. Submit copies of test
reports for aggregate source, not less than 30 days before the material is required in the work.
Submit certified copies of the recycling agent manufacturer's test reports indicating compliance
with applicable specified requirements, not less than 30 days before material is required in the
work.

301.04 WORK PLAN

Notwithstanding the information provided in the drawings, the Contactor shall perform a site
reconnaissance and document the actual pavement condition and perform all necessary
verification pavement coring and analyses to determine the prevailing conditions for optimal
pavement mix design. The cost of these investigations shall be borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall submit a detailed work plan describing his proposed construction
equipment, procedures, and schedules. This shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
 Listing of supervisory personnel: Name and experience of the various persons,
their role and primary responsibilities.
 Equipment set-up and site use layout: Including storage areas, mixing plant
locations, haul roads, and work platform.
 CRACP equipment specifications, including milling, mixing, spreading and
compacting machines to be used in the project.
 Construction means and methods: Listing of equipment and capabilities,
construction steps, control of surface storm drainage, spills, wastes, pollutions,
etc.
 A layout drawing showing the limits of the CRACP zones both horizontally and
vertically along with the planned sequence of construction.
 A quality control plan describing all testing, sampling, reporting forms, methods,
responsible persons, non-conformance procedures, and all other means to
ensure the quality of work.
 Schedule: A bar chart schedule showing all major activities and durations.
In addition to the Work Plan, the following specific information shall be submitted prior to the
start of CRACP construction:
 Sampling Plan: A description of the methods and locations of all samples used in
the design mix testing. Description of the materials and method used to restore
the disturbed pavement and roadway areas where asphalt pavement samples
were collected.
 Source of all imported material, including aggregates, mix water, cement, and
any additives. Shipment of materials to the site shall be accompanied by the
vendor's written certification of the quality or specification of the material.
301.05 JOB-MIX FORMULA (JMF)
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
86
 A pre-construction, laboratory design mix program is required to determine appropriate
materials and material proportions for the required CRACP performance. The Contractor shall
furnish the JMF for approval to the Engineer, for verifcation to the Employer (State Roud
Administration Laboratory in Chisinau) for review and acceptance at no later than 21calendar
days prior to date when the Contractor intends to commence execution of the rehabilitation of
the pavement . The formula will indicate the gradation of the imported aggregate, recycled
asphalt and a definite percentage of water, recycling agent, and cement to be added to the
mixture. The JMF shall establish the minimum curing period for all proposed mix design.
The general percentage by weight of individual constituents of the mixture is as follows:
 Portland Cement (Slag Portland Cement) 4-5%
 Recycled Asphalt concrete granules 40 – 50 %
 Crushed Stone As indicated by the Engineer
 Sand and Fillers As indicated by the Engineer
 Water 2-6%
Select the optimum cement content to provide the properties indicated in Section 301.06.1
Physical Property.
301.05.1 Physical Property
The following minimum physical properties are required:
 Flexural Strength (ODMD since 27.06.2002) = 1.7 MPa
 Unconfined Compressive Strength (ODMD
since 27.06.2002) = 2.0 MPa
 Minimum Density (ODMD since 27.06.2002) = 98 %
 Water saturation by volume,% not more than
(ODMD since 27.06.2002) = 12 %
 Coefficient of water resistance, not less than
(ODMD since 27.06.2002) = 0.6 %
Four (4) sets of batch trial samples for each proposed JMF shall be made available to the
government for independent testing and verification. The samples shall be made in accordance
with GOST 12801-98 (ODMD since 27.06.2002 p.7.12 to 7.16) and shall be compacted and
properly cured in accordance with GOST 12801-98.
The JMF may be adjusted during construction by the Contractor to improve paving mixture.
Written consent from the Engineer will be required for changing the JMF. The proposed revised
JMF shall satisfy the physical property requirement indicated in this section.
301.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE
301.06.1 Sampling and Testing
The Contractor shall perform sampling and testing using his own facilities approved by the
Engineer or by using a commercial testing laboratory approved by the Engineer. No work
requiring testing will be permitted until the testing facilities have been inspected and approved.
301.06.2 Samples
The Contractor shall take :-

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

87
 - recyclable asphalt pavement and aggregate samples for laboratory tests in accordance with
GOST 12801-98(ODMD since 27.06.2002 p.10.4 to 10.5).
- emulsified asphalt cement / recycling agent (bituminous material) samples in accordance with
GOST 12801-98(ODMD since 27.06.2002 p.10.4 to 10.5).

301.06.3 Sampling and Testing During Construction

The Contractor shall perform quality control sampling and testing as required in paragraph
ACCEPTABILITY OF WORK
PART B: PRODUCTS
301.07 RECYCLED ASPHALT - ASPHALT GRANULES (АG)
The AG consisting of material from cold milling or from removal and crushing of the existing
asphalt concrete pavement shall have a particle size distribution consistent with the particle
sizes and ranges established in the JMF. The maximum particle size of the AG material shall
not exceed one-half the thickness of the compacted recycled pavement base. When lifts of 75
mm or more are used, the maximum particle size of the AG material shall not exceed a
maximum of 38 mm and a minimum of 98 percent of the AG shall pass a 25 mm sieve.
301.08 IMPORTED MATERIALS
301.09.1 Aggregates
The aggregates consisting of naturally occurring or manufacturer crushed stone, crushed
gravel, crushed slag, screening, sand, and mineral filler shall conform to GOST 8267-93*. The
portion of materials retained on the 4.75 mm sieve will be known as coarse aggregate, the
portion passing the 4.75 mm sieve and retained on the 0.075 mm sieve will be known as fine
aggregate, and the portion passing the 0.075 mm sieve will be known as mineral filler. The
combined recycled aggregate gradation shall create a uniform specific gravity. Adjustments of
percentage passing various sieves may be required when the specific gravity of the aggregates
varies by more than 0.2.
301.08.1.1 Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, sound, durable particles meeting the requirements
indicated in GOST 8267-93*. Testing of Coarse Aggregates shall be in accordance with GOST
8269.0-97.
301.08. 1.2 Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, sound, durable particles including natural sand or
crushed stone, slag, or gravel that meets requirements of GOST 8267-93*. Fine aggregate
produced by crushing gravel shall have at least 90 percent by weight of crushed particles
having two or more fractured faces in the portion retained on the 0.600 mm sieve. This
requirement shall apply to the material before blending with natural sand, when blending is
necessary. Quantity of natural sand to be added to the wearing and intermediate course
mixtures shall not exceed 25 percent by weight of coarse and fine aggregate and material
passing the 0.075 mm sieve. Natural sand shall be clean and free from clay and organic matter
meeting requirements of GOST 8736-93. Testing of Fine Aggregates shall be in accordance
with GOST 8269.0-97.
301.08. 2 Mineral Filler
Mineral filler shall conform to GOST 16557-78 with grain size determined in accordance with
GOST 12784-78.
301.08.3 Cement
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
88
 Portland cement shall conform to GOST 10178-85 – Type 400
From the time of purchase to the time of use, all cement shall be kept under cover and
protected from moisture, all in accordance with the manufacturer’s or supplier’s
recommendations. All consignments of these materials shall be used in the same sequence as
that of their delivery on site. Stocks stored in excess of three months shall not be used in the
Works without authorization.
301.08.4 Slag
Slag shall conform to GOST 10178-85 – Type 300
301.08.5 Water
Water shall be clean and free from detrimental concentrations of acids, alkalis, salts, sugar and
other organic or chemical substances. If the water used is not obtained from a public drinking water
main, tests may be required to prove its suitability. Water shall conform to GOST 23732-79.
301.08.6 Gradation Tolerance
The tolerances allowed on the gradation are as follows: according to SM STB 1033-2008 Table
D.1 for porous and highly porous mixtures.
Grading of mineral aggregates

% by weight of mineral aggregates finer than, mm

40 20 15 10 5 2.5 1.25 0.63 0.315 0.14 0.071

95- 65- 54- 42-88 30-65 25-65 18-65 12-65 8-40 5-22 2-8
100 100 100

301.09 EQUIPMENT
301.09.1 General
All plant and equipment shall be supplied and operated in such a manner as to recycle in-place
material to the specified depth and construct a new layer, all in accordance with the
requirements of the specifications. All plant and equipment deployed on the site shall be of
adequate rated capacity and in good working order.
The Contractor shall allow the the Engineer access at any time to all equipment used to
produce the cold-recycled mixture. This can involve checking the adequacy and the operation
of the equipment used. Plant, machines, tools, and miscellaneous equipment to be used in the
successful demonstration test sections shall be used for the production and placement of the
cold recycled mixture. Changes in the plant, machines, tools, and miscellaneous equipment
shall be approved by the Engineer.
301.09.2 Central Plant Mixing
The mixing plant designed, coordinated, operated to produce mixture within the job mix formula
(JMF), shall be capable of producing recycled mixture at a minimum rate of 150 tons per hour.
The plant shall be equipped with positive means to control the amount of cement, water, and
time of mixing.
301.09.3 In-Place Mixing
Equipment used for in-place mixing construction shall be designed, coordinated, and
maintained to produce mixture within the JMF. The mixing equipment used shall be equipped

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

89
 with positive means to control the amount of cement and water added and shall be capable of
producing a homogeneous mixture.
301.09.4 Straight-edge
The Contractor shall furnish and maintain at the site, in good condition, one 3.0 meter straight-
edge for each mechanical spreader and make straight-edges available for use by the Engineer..
Straight-edges shall be constructed of aluminum or other lightweight metal with blades of box or
box-girder cross section with flat bottom reinforced to insure rigidity and accuracy. Straight-
edges shall have handles to facilitate movement on pavement.
301.09.5 Recyclers
Recycling shall be carried out by utilizing a modified milling machine or purpose-built recycler to
recover the material in the existing pavement. For the in-place mixing operation, the recycler
shall have the capability of milling the asphalt pavement and blending the milled material
together with any imported material pre-spread as a uniform layer on the existing road surface.
The machine employed shall be capable of achieving the required grading and consistency of
mix in a single pass. As a minimum, the recycler shall have the following features (type WR
4200):
 The machine shall be capable of recycling to a minimum depth of 200mmin a
single pass
 The milling drum shall have the capability of changing the speed of rotation.
 The machine shall have a level-control system that maintains the depth of milling
within a tolerance of ± 5 millimeters of the required depth during continuous
operation;
 All fitted systems to the recycler for the spreading and spraying of cement or
cement slurry shall be controlled by micro-processor and shall be able to
regulate the application rate with the speed of advance of the machine.
 All spray systems will also have the ability to allow variable widths of application
and shall have the capability to supply the cement slurry at the required rate
during continuous operation to comply with the mix design
 It shall have sufficient power to mix the recycled material together with all
additives to produce a uniform homogeneous reconstituted material during
continuous operation
 There shall be a method for monitoring cement usage during operation that can
be validated by simple physical measurement for control purposes.
301.09.6 Equipment for compaction and finishing
Initial compaction of the recycled material shall be undertaken using a heavy smooth-drum or
vibrating roller operated only in high-amplitude vibration mode. The static mass of the roller to
be used shall be determined by the thickness of the recycled layer, in accordance with the
following table:

Thickness of compacted Minimum Static mass of

layer roller (Ton)

<150 mm 12

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

90
 150 mm to 200 mm 15

200 mm to 250 mm 19

>250 mm 24

The operating speed of the primary roller shall not exceed 3 km/h and the number of passes
applied over the full width of each cut shall be sufficient to achieve the specified layer density.
PART C: EXECUTION
301.10 PREPARING THE SURFACE
Before any recycling work commences, the surface of the existing road shall be prepared by:
 Clean all vegetation, garbage and other foreign matter from the full road width,
including any adjacent lanes or shoulders that are not to be recycled
 Remove any standing water
 Pre-mill where high-spots are to be removed (if required)
 Accurately mark the proposed longitudinal cut lines on the existing road surface.
 Remove all road marking features that will be destroyed by recycling
 Identify pavement areas with obvious underlying structural deficiencies
(settlement, lateral spreading of embankment). Propose fixing methods to the
Government for approval.
301.11 MILLING OF THE EXISTING PAVEMENT
The milling of the pavement during the process of cold recycled asphalt shall be carried out in
compliance with CHAPTER 302. MILLING ASPHALT PAVEMENT of this specification.
The contractor shall take all necessary steps to ensure that the gradation that results from the
recycling process conforms to the gradation established in the JMF. The forward speed of the
recycling machine, rate of rotation of the milling drum and the positioning of the gradation
control beam shall be set so that the in-place material is broken down to an acceptable
gradation. When required by the Engineer, samples of in-place materials shall be collected and
tested for particle size and gradation requirements.
The actual milling depth shall be measured at interval no longer than 100 m along the milling
cut length using the same survey references that will be used to achieve final surface grades.
Longitudinal joints between successive milling cuts shall overlap by a minimum of 150 mm.
Transverse joints between successive milling cuts shall overlap by a minimum of 500 mm.
The speed of advance shall be checked and recorded at least once every 200 m of cut to
ensure conformity with the planned production rate and on-going compliance with the recycling
process. Acceptable tolerance limits shall be dependent on the type of recycler and material
being recycled, but shall not be less than 4 m/min nor greater than 12 m/min.
301.12 CONSTRUCTION METHOD
301.12.1 Central Plant Mixing
The central mixing plant shall be capable of producing a uniform blend of the AG, aggregate,
cement, and water. The required amount of cement material for each batch, or calibrated
amount of continuous mixing, shall be introduced into the mixer to meet the requirements of the
JMF. The mixing process shall provide a uniform dispersion of the cement and water to achieve
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
91
 a thorough coating (visually) of all aggregate particles. As a minimum, when the recycled
mixture contains fine particles passing the 4.75 mm sieve, the mixing process shall provide a
thorough coating of these particles.
301.12.2 Test Section - Central Plant Mixing
The Contractor, prior to the start of the recycling in the Works shall prepare a sufficient quantity
of mixture to construct a test section at least 200 meters long, two spreader widths wide and of
thickness to be used in the project by placing, spreading, and compacting the mixture with the
equipment to be used in the Works and in accordance with requirements specified above. This
test section will be tested and evaluated as a lot conforming to all specification requirements. If
approved by the Engineer, the test section shall be located in one of the less critical areas of
the in the normal course of embankment construction Works pavement construction otherwise,
it shall be located outside the project paving. If tests results are satisfactory if constructed in the
area of the Works pavement the test section shall remain in place as part of the completed
pavement. If tests indicate that the pavement does not conform to specification requirements,
the test section of pavement shall be removed and material disposed of offsite at the
Contractor's cost.
In case test section does not conform to the Specification, the Contractor shall make necessary
adjustments to the plant operations and rolling procedures immediately, and construct another
test section, at no additional cost to the Employer. Other additional test sections, as necessary
and as directed, shall be constructed and will be sampled and tested for conformance with
specification requirements. Full production with the recycled mixture shall not commence
without approval of the Engineer.

301.12.3 In-Place Mixing

In-place mixing procedure and machinery shall be capable of producing a uniform blend of the
GA, aggregate, cement, water, and a mixture containing the required amounts of cement and
water as given in the JMF.
In-place mixing operation may be carried out simultaneously with the milling operation or
separately, depending on the equipment proposed by the Contractor. The batching of the
mixture constituents is performed automatically, depending on the speed of the lead machine,
and is checked with gauges. To ensure the feed of the necessary components of the mixture,
use auxiliary self-moving machines, in compliance with chapter 3.05.While the mixture is
prepared the components are added to the AG in the following sequence: crushed stone, water
for curing, emulsion (as required), cement. The quality of mixing shall be visually assessed: the
mixture should be evenly colored and should not contain clots (bunches) of bitumen. The
mixing time shall be determined on the site.
301.12.4 Test Section - In-Place Mixing
Prior to the start of the recycling project, construct a test section at least 200 meters long, two
spreader widths wide and of thickness to be used in the project. Mill, add and mix in all required
constituents in accordance to the JMF, place, spread, and compact the mixture with the
equipment to be used in the project and in accordance with requirements specified above. This
test section will be tested and evaluated as a lot conforming to all specification requirements.
Test location shall be contractor select and approved by the Engineer. If tests results are
satisfactory, the test section will remain in place as part of the completed pavement. If tests
indicate that the pavement does not conform to specification requirements, remove the test
section and the material be remixed and used elsewhere along the project. Make necessary
adjustments to the mixing operations and rolling procedures immediately, and construct another
test section, all at no additional cost to the Government. Other additional test sections, as
necessary and as directed, shall be constructed and will be sampled and tested for
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
92
 conformance with specification requirements. Full production of the recycled mixture cannot
start without the approval of the Engineer.
301.12.5 Controlling the moisture content of recycled material
Sufficient water shall be added during the recycling process to meet the moisture requirements.
Water shall be added only by means of the micro-processor control system on the recycling
machine and particular care shall be taken to prevent any portion of the work from excessive
wetting. Any portion of the work that becomes too wet will be rejected and the contractor shall
be responsible for corrections at his own expense.
301.13 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A CRACP course shall not be constructed in rain or on a layer which contains free water either
within the layer or on its surface. Construct the CRACP courses only when the weather
conditions are favorable and the atmospheric temperature is 10ºC or above, and at the direction
of the Government. No further work, other than finishing and compaction, will be permitted if
the air temperature falls below 10ºC during operations. Spreading of powdered chemical
stabilizing agents (lime and cement) on the road ahead of the recycler shall not be permitted
when windy conditions adversely affect the operation.
301.14 PLACEMENT
301.14.1 Spreaders
Provide spreading equipment capable of spreading material uniformly; and conforming to the
surface grade, elevation and smoothness requirements when compacted. Spray contact
surfaces of previously constructed pavement, curbs, manholes, and other structures with a thin
coat of bituminous material conforming to CHAPTER 304. PRIME AND TACK COATS FOR
SUPPORTING SURFACE. Place the recycled mixture without segregation; when segregation
occurs during placement, suspend the spreading operation until the cause is determined and
corrected. When placing by hand, the mixture shall be dumped, distributed into place, and
spread with lutes in a uniformly loose layer of such thickness to conform to the required grade
and thickness when compacted. In no case shall mixture be placed by throwing or
broadcasting.
301.14.2 Placement with a Paver
Place the recycled asphalt mixture with a self-propelled asphalt paver or similar equipment
containing a vibrating or tamping screed. Operate the paver so that the surface course being
laid will be smooth and continuous without pulling or tearing.
301.14.3 Layer Thickness and Curing
Construct each layer of compacted mixture at least 60mm but no more than 300mm in
thickness. After evaporation of free moisture content (approximately in 2 hours after
completion of compaction) the road will be open for trafficking; the speed limit of vehicles
prior to placing the next layer shall be up to 40 km/h.
The next layer shall be placed not earlier than 4 - 5 hours after pavement regeneration; if
during the process of regeneration cement is added, then prior to the next asphalt concrete
layer there should be a tack-coat. Apply a thin coat of bituminous material conforming to
CHAPTER 304. PRIME AND TACK COATS FOR SUPPORTING SURFACE.
301.14.4 Windrows
When windrows are used, construct them of such size and shape to allow adequate mixing of
materials without segregation, ensuring that the required thickness of pavement can be
constructed.
301.15 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
93
 Conduct compaction of the mixture to satisfy density, grade, and smoothness requirements.
Roll mixtures until all roller marks are eliminated, and a field density of at least 98 percent of the
theoretical maximum density has been obtained when tested in accordance with GOST 12801-
98 and SM STB 1115:2008.
301.15.1 Operation of Rollers and Tampers
Provide the sufficient number, weight, and type of rollers to obtain the required density. Begin
initial rolling of the recycled mixture as the emulsion is starting to break. Where lift thicknesses
exceed 75 mm, accomplish breakdown rolling with a large 10 to 15 Mg pneumatic roller. Use
either a pneumatic or a steel-wheel roller to breakdown roll thinner lifts. All rollers shall be
equipped with watering devices to prevent material adhesion; however, excess water will not be
permitted. Vibratory rolling will be allowed to achieve required density. Use finish rolling with a
steel-wheel roller to remove any existing roller marks.

301.15.2 Correcting Deficient Areas

Remove mixture that becomes contaminated with foreign material, or is defective in any way, to
the full thickness of the course. Cut the hole with sides vertical and perpendicular to each other,
with one pair parallel to the direction of traffic. Rolled areas shall not be skin patched to correct
low areas and shall not be planed to correct high areas. Place fresh paving mixture in holes in
sufficient quantity to produce a finished surface conforming to grade and smoothness
requirements. Paving mixture shall be aerated, if necessary, and shall be compacted to the
density specified herein. Provide competent workmen capable of performing all work incidentals
to the correction of deficiencies and defects.
301.16 JOINTS
Joints shall present the same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of the
course. Carefully make joints between old and new layers or between successive days' work
to ensure continuous bond between old and new sections of the CRACP layers.
301.16.1 Transverse Joints
Pass the roller over the unprotected end of freshly laid mixture only when laying of the course
has been discontinued. Cut back the edge of the previously laid course to expose even, vertical
surface for the full thickness of the course. The fresh mixture shall be raked against the joints,
thoroughly tamped, and then rolled.
301.16.2 Longitudinal Joints
Construct longitudinal joints without mixture segregation. When directed by the Engineer, cut
back the longitudinal joint to expose an even, vertical surface for the full thickness of the
course. The fresh mixture shall be raked against the joints, thoroughly tamped, and then rolled.
301.17 EDGES OF PAVEMENT
Edges of pavement shall be straight and true to required lines. After final rolling, cut off square
excess material and dispose of as directed.
301.18 TRAFFIC, PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Traffic on newly placed recycled mixtures will only be allowed after the completion of
compaction and the curing period.
If the placement of the next layer is projected to be postponed for more than 28 days, a
bituminous emulsion protection layer shall be spread on to the regenerated works
immediately after compaction. The bituminous emulsion protection layer shall be spread at a
rate of 1.2 – 1.4 l/m2. A fine sand or filler materials with sizes no less than 3 - 8 mm shall be

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

94
 spread evenly on top of the bituminous emulsion treatment at a rate of 8 - 12 kg/m2. The
regenerated surface is then rolled after the protection layer is placed. A tack-coat in
conformance with Chapter 304. PRIME AND TACK COATS FOR SUPPORTING SURFACE
shall be applied prior to the next layer is placed.
Perform maintenance repairs immediately upon discovery of damage sections. Ensure even
and uniform surface is restored after completion of the repair work.
301.19 ACCEPTABILITY OF WORK
Acceptance of CRACP works is carried out in compliance with the requirements of SNiP
3.06.03-85 and as indicated by the Government.
301.19.1 Testing
Perform field tests in sufficient numbers to ensure that the specifications are being met. Testing
is the Contractor's responsibility and performed by an approved commercial laboratory. Perform
the following tests at the appropriate time, as the minimum acceptable for each type of
operation
301.19.2 Mixture Properties
Obtain a sample of the recycled mixture for every four (4) hours of placement of the mix.
Determine the cement content of the mix according to GOST 12801-98. The cement content of
the recycled material shall be within the tolerance given in paragraph JMF. Determine the
gradation of the extracted aggregate in accordance with SM STB 1033:2008.The extracted
gradation shall meet the JMF and the corresponding tolerances.
301.19.3 Strength Properties
The physical-mechanical characteristics of the CRACP must be in compliance with the
requirements of SM STB 1033-2008 for porous asphalt concrete. The compressive and flexural
strength of the finished product is determined on the basis of core testing, the core being taken
from the compacted pavement. Minimum 5 (five) cores should be taken from each 7000 square
meters of laid pavement, but no less than 3 (three) during a working day. The results of the
strength tests shall be compared to the strength established in the JMF.
301.19.4 Density Testing
Density shall be determined based on sampling according to SNiP 3.06.03-85, testing and
submittal of test results shall be performed by a specialized laboratory according GOST 12801-
98 and SM STB 1115-2008. Determine the moisture content of the recycled mixture by GOST
12801-98. The calibration testing shall occur in an area representative of the entire project in
regards to materials and compactive effort.
Perform a minimum of three (3) of these tests and at least three (3) nuclear readings shall be
taken near each of these areas. Calibrate each nuclear device accordingly. Each day the used
nuclear devices shall be recalibrated in the manner stated above or the selected area
preserved and the devices calibrated in the same approximate locations each day. The field
density shall be expressed as a percentage of the maximum theoretical density in accordance
with SNiP 3.06.03-85. Furnish all tools, labor and materials for obtaining samples and refilling
sample locations. Perform a minimum of one nuclear field density test for every 500 square
meters of mixture placed.
301.19.5 Grade Conformance
Take measurements for deviation from grade by running lines of levels at intervals of 100
meters longitudinally and five (5) meters transversely to determine the elevation of the
completed pavement. The finished and completed surface shall conform within 15 mm to lines,
grades, cross section, and dimensions shown on the drawings.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

95
 301.19.6 Surface Smoothness
Take measurements for deviation from surface smoothness with a 3.0 meter straightedge. The
finished surface of the pavement shall not deviate more than 10 mm from the testing edge of
the straightedge in the transverse or longitudinal direction. Place the straightedge parallel to the
centerline of each lane paved at intervals of 100 meters and perpendicular to the centerline at
intervals of 5 meters. Record the locations and deviations from the straightedge of all
measurements. Remove defective areas and replace them with fresh paving mixture at no
additional cost to the Employer
At the request of the Engineer, during or after compaction, the layer surface shall be smoothed
by an auto-grader.
301.19.7 Material Samples
Obtain a sample of all materials used in the recycled mixture under the supervision of the
Engineer. The sample will be retained by the Government.
301.20 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
301.20.1 Measurements
The description of certain pay items states that quantities will be determined from ‘authorized
dimensions’. This shall be taken to mean the dimensions as specified or shown on any drawing
or written instruction given to the contractor, without any allowance for tolerances. If the work is
constructed in compliance with the authorized dimensions, plus or minus any tolerances
allowed, quantities will be calculated from the authorized dimensions regardless of the actual
dimensions.
Measurement and payment for each work item are listed below:
Item Unit
A. Prepare the existing road surface prior to recycling square meter (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square meter of existing road surface that is to be
rehabilitated by recycling, calculated from the authorized width dimension multiplied by the
actual length as measured along the centerline of the road.
The rate tendered shall include full compensation for all work necessary to clean the road of all
water, vegetation, garbage, and other foreign matter and for the removal, transporting and
disposal of all resulting debris, as specified.
B. Recycling in all in-place pavement materials for the construction
of new pavement layers: cubic meter (m3)
B.1 Recycling in all in-place pavement materials for the construction
of new pavement layers: square meter (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic meter of completed pavement layer constructed by
recycling the in-place pavement material, regardless of the hardness or type of such material,
and with or without the inclusion of imported material. The quantity shall be calculated from the
authorized dimensions for width and thickness of the completed layer, multiplied by the actual
length as measured along the centerline of the road. The authorized width shall not be
increased to include any allowance for the specified minimum overlap between adjacent cuts,
nor for the number of cuts required to cover the full road width.
The rates tendered shall include full compensation for setting out the works, for recycling all
types of material in the existing pavement structure to the specified depth together with any
stabilizing agents and/or imported material that may have been incorporated, for the supply and
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
96
 addition of water, for mixing, placing and compacting the material, for the reworking of all
material in overlapping adjacent cuts regardless of the number of cuts or width of overlap
necessary to cover the full road width, for all curing, protection and maintenance of the layer,
and for conducting all process and acceptance control inspections, measurements and tests.
C. Imported material for addition to the cold in-place recycling process:
a) Crushed-stone products from commercial sources: ton (t)
b) Natural gravels and sands from commercial sources: cubic meter (m3)
The unit of measurement for crushed-stone products purchased from commercial sources shall
be the ton of material brought onto the site and incorporated into the recycled material.
Measurement shall be based on weighbridge tickets. The unit of measurement for natural
material, purchased from commercial sources or obtained from borrow pits, shall be the cubic
meter, measured as 70 % of the struck volume of the haul vehicle.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring, furnishing and spreading the
imported material on the existing road as a level-correcting layer, or as a layer of uniform
thickness, or for tipping into the receiving hopper of a recycling unit where milling is undertaken
separately from recycling, for hauling the material from the point of supply to its final position on
the road, for watering and light rolling where required, and for any wastage.
D. Chemical stabilizing agents:
a) Ordinary Portland cement ton (t)
b) etc. for each type of chemical stabilizing agent specified
The unit of measurement shall be the ton of stabilizing agent actually consumed in the cold in-
place recycling process. Measurement shall be based on weighbridge tickets where the supply
is bulk or on agreed counts where the supply is in pockets or bags.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring and providing the stabilizing
agent, for its addition to the cold in-place recycling process, including all transport, handling,
storage under cover where required, rehandling and spreading, or fluidizing into a slurry and
pumping into the process, for all wastage and safety measures necessary during handling, and
for the disposal of all packaging.
E. Bituminous stabilizing agents: ton (t)
The unit of measurement shall be the ton of bituminous stabilizing agent actually consumed in
the cold in-place recycling process. Measurement shall be based on physical dips of bulk
tankers, undertaken before and after the bituminous stabilizing agent is applied, supported by
weighbridge tickets issued for each tanker-load at the point of supply.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for procuring and providing the bituminous
stabilizing agent, for its addition to the cold in-place recycling process, for any chemicals or
other additives introduced, for the water added to achieve foaming where required, for all
transport, heating, handling, storage, and applying by pumping into the process, for all wastage
and for taking all safety measures necessary during handling.
The description of quantities will be determined from ‘authorized dimensions’. The rate tendered
shall include full compensation for all work necessary for a successful completion of the project.
301.20.2 Payment
The quantities of recycled paving mixture, aggregates, recycling agent, and cement determined
as provided above, will be paid for at respective contract unit prices. If deficiencies in the
finished product exceed specified tolerances, no payment will be made for such areas of
pavement until the defective areas are corrected and accepted by the Engineer.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
97
 301.20.3 Adjustment for Density
The present requirements refer to the density of the pavement, regenerated by cold method.
Each core taken from the pavement represents a certain surface area as a part of the whole
laying area, divided to the number of samples selected during a working day. According to the
rates specified in the Contract, the following coefficients are applied for payment. If the payment
for the materials is done by unit rates per ton, the coefficient is applied for all the materials used
for the production of cold-recycled asphalt concrete, payable per ton.

Percent of density of Coefficient of Coefficient of

the sample Payment Compaction

>100 1.10 > 1.0

99 – 100 1.05 > 0.99 – 1.00

98 – 99 100 > 0.98 – 0.99

97 – 98 0.90 > 0.97 – 0.98

No more than 97 The sector is not < 0.97

accepted

Note:
a. The density of the sample is determined by dividing the average density to the apparent
density, being expressed in %.
b. The coefficient of compaction is determined by dividing the average density of the cores
to the density of the specimens remoulded from the cores (cl. 4.16 GOST 12801-98).

The payment shall be for the following items:

No. Item Unit of Measure

30101 Cold recycling of the asphalt concrete pavement Cubic Metre

CHAPTER 302. ASPHALT PAVEMENT MILLING

302.01. Introduction
This work consists of the milling of the existing asphalt pavement where other works than cold
recycling are foreseen. The milled asphalt shall only be used for the works on instruction from
the Engineer.

302.02. Construction Requirements

Equipment – Asphalt milling machine

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

98
 The asphalt milling machine should have the following characteristics:
• Working speed of 16 m/min at 50 mm depth.
• Sufficient power, traction and stability to ensure an accurately consistent
processing depth of 50 mm.
• Automatic level control system
• Covering width of not less than 1.5 m.

302.03. Milling
The existing bituminous pavement is made from different asphalt and gravel shall be milled and
processed by at least sieving (if necessary) to meet the requirements for re-use in the regulating
layer. If the existing bituminous pavement material does not conform to any given grading, but
consists locally of larger gravel and finer material then it shall be re-used or disposed as
instructed by the Engineer.

Milling and removal of existing pavement layers shall be conducted during dry weather
conditions. Milling and removal shall be conducted on small sections only as approved by the
Engineer. Construction of new pavement layers in such disturbed sections shall be completed
as soon as possible. Only after the completion of new pavement layers, except the final surface
course, shall another section for removal is approved by the Engineer.
The existing pavement shall be milled at a depth as specified with a minimum milling width of
1.5 m. A traffic lane should be processed to its full width, and the cross-section of the newly
obtained surface should be even The evenness of the surface shall be measured with a 3-m
straight-edge, the gap between the straight-edge and the road surface should not exceed 20
mm, and shall be in accordance with SNiP 3.06.03 – 85.
The transition between the milled asphalt lane and the existing pavement shall have a smooth
transition to ensure safety of the travelling public.
Before opening the milled surface to traffic all loose asphalt, particles and other loose material
shall be removed.

302.04. Acceptance
The acceptance of the asphalt milling shall be in accordance with the drawings and
Specifications and approved by the Engineer.
Measurement
The milling of the existing asphalt pavement shall be measured either in cubic Metres to any
depth or in square Metres to depths as specifiedin the Bill of Quantities.
Payment
The accepted works shall be paid according to the rates as specified in the Bill of Quantities.
The payment shall be done for the payment items listed below, and which are contained in the
bid. The indicated payment is the full amount of remuneration for the works under this chapter.
The payment shall be for the following items:

No. Item Unit of Measure

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

99
 30201 Asphalt Concrete Pavement Milling to any depth Cubic Metre

30202 Asphalt Concrete Pavement Milling at a depth of 8-10 cm Square Metre

CHAPTER 303. WIDENING AND RECONSTRUCTION OF THE

EXISTING CARRIAGEWAY AND PROVISION OF
NEW PAVEMENT
303.01. Introduction
This work consists of the construction of new full depth pavement. It applies where existing
pavement is to be reconstructed and where completely new pavement is to be constructed.
New construction may take the form of climbing lanes, of widening of the existing pavement or
of wholly new pavement made necessary by a significant change in horizontal or vertical
alignment.

303.02. Materials
The materials used for the construction or reconstructions of pavements have to meet the
following requirements:

Asphalt mixture Chapter 305 and SMSTB 1033-2008

Bituminous primer SM GOST 22245-90

Crushed stone SM GOST 8267-93

Bitumen filled Macadam SNiP 3.06.03.85, VSN 123-77

Cement stabilized pavement GOST 23558-94

Ballast GOST 23735-79

Crushed Grading as 306.04 below Limestone

Sand SM GOST 8736-93

Geotextile EN 13249

303.03. General information

The construction of sections of new pavement in widening, reconstruction or new road shall
comprise excavation to the designated subgrade level, compaction of subgrade, sand drainage
layer, subbase layer(s), of gravel or crushed limestone, base layer(s) of graded crushed granite,
prime coat and asphalt binder course(s) and wearing course. The thicknesses of the various
layers are indicated in the Drawings. In conjunction with new pavement works shoulder
reconstruction will be required as detailed in chapter 306 of this Specification.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

100
 303.04. Construction Procedure
The whole area of new pavement construction shall be excavated to the required subgrade
level and the subgrade compacted in accordance with NCM D.02.01:2015 Chapter 7. Subgrade
level after compaction shall be correct for level in all areas within a tolerance of +0 to -35 mm.

Following acceptance of the subgrade a drainage layer of approved ballast material shall be
placed and compacted using vibratory rollers or vibrating plate compactors. Top of ballast layer
after compaction shall be correct for level in all areas within a tolerance of +0
to -35 mm.
The ballast layer shall be extended beyond the limits of the carriageway beneath the shoulder to
meet the side drain or the embankment face.

The ballast layer must meet the following requirements:

Content in % finer grains of mineral material, mm
40 20 10 5 0,63 0,071
Ballast 90-100 65-85 - 35-50 8-20 2-6
95-100 95-100 60-75 41-56 9-21 2-6

Following acceptance of the ballast layer a subbase of approved material, crushed limestone
complying of SM GOST 25607-2010 with the following grading requirements:

Sieve size (mm) Percentage passing by weight

63.0 100

40.0 70 – 100

20.0 50 -85

10.0 40 – 75

4.75 30 – 60

2.36 20 – 45

1.18 15 – 37

0.075 4 – 15

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

101
 Compaction shall be by vibrating roller and the degree of compaction shall be not less than 98%
MDD (AASHTO T180). On completion of the subbase layer the upper surface of the final course
shall be accurate to line and level within a tolerance of +0 to –35 mm.
Following acceptance of the subbase layer a base of approved, graded crushed granite
aggregate shall be laid to the overall thickness shown in the drawings. The material shall meet
the requirements of SM GOST 8267-93 and shall be executed in accordance with SniP 3.06.03-
85.
The compacted thickness of any layer of either base or subbase laid, processed and compacted
at one time shall not exceed 150 mm and when a greater compacted thickness is required, the
material shall be laid and processed in two or more layers. The minimum layer thickness shall
be 100 mm. Compaction requirements for the sub-base and granular base shall be at least 98%
MDD (AASHTO T180).
Asphaltic binder and wearing courses shall be laid to the levels indicated in the drawings.
Asphalt mixtures will be designed, produced and laid in accordance with the requirements of
chapter 305.
Wherever new asphalt is laid abutting existing asphalt pavement, the edges of the old pavement
shall be carefully cut to expose clean fresh vertical joint faces which will be tack coated with
bituminous material meeting the requirements of chapter 304 and in compliance with the
requirements of chapter 305 immediately before the fresh adjoining asphalt is laid. Minimum
compaction requirements for the Binder and Wearing course shall be in accordance with
Chapter 305.
Surface Tolerance
Surfaces shall be checked for tolerance and shall meet tolerances in accordance with the
requirements of chapter 305.
303.05. Work Acceptance
The work of new pavement construction will be accepted according to the Technical
Specifications including Chapter 001.
Measurements
The whole work of new pavement construction shall be measured under the items below in
square Metres of subgrade, cubic Metres of sand, subbase and base and in 102ones of
asphaltic concrete. The volumes shall be measured strictly net based on the design levels.
Tonnes of asphaltic concrete shall be derived from the net volume converted to tons on the
basis of the compacted density.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.
Payment will be made under some or all of the items below:

No. Item Unit of Measure

30301 Drainage layer of ballast

30301.1 Drainage layer of ballast h – 200mm Cubic Metre

30301.2 Drainage layer of ballast h – 150mm Cubic metre

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

102
 30301.3 Drainage layer of ballast h – 100mm Cubic metre

30302.1 Base course of mixture of Lime Stone Nr.5, h - 220 mm Square metre

30302.2 Base course of crushed limestone M 400, h – 300mm Square metre

30303.3 Base course of crushed limestone M 400, h – 120mm Square metre

CHAPTER 304. PRIME AND TACK COATS FOR SUPPORTING

SURFACE
304.01. Introduction
This chapter deals with the provision and application of prime and tack coats. Prime coat is a
layer of cutback bitumen applied to the completed surface of the granular base course as a
preliminary to asphalting. Tack coat shall be applied wherever new asphalt is laid over or
adjacent to old asphalt. In the case of major asphalt operations tack coat shall also be use
between overlying courses where the underlying course is more than 72 hours old at the time of
laying the next course.

304.02. Materials
The materials used have to be in accordance to the following standards:
• Вitumen SM GOST 22245-90.
• Cutback Road bitumen, GOST 11955-82
• Bituminous emulsion SM GOST 18659-81.

304.03. Equipment
• Self-propelled bitumen distributor.
• Mechanical rotary brush.
• Compressor (for particularly dusty base layers).

304.04. Surface Preparation

Before any prime or tack-coat operation is done the surface will be prepared by brushing.
Care shall be taken during brushing of base course that the structure of the base is not
disturbed. Water shall not be used in the cleaning of base course, however, just before the
application of prime coat and after all brushing is complete, the basecourse should be lightly
watered to help promote the penetration of the prime.
The existing or newly laid asphalt surfaces shall be cleaned off every foreign substances or
matter, including bitumen or bituminous or non-bituminous joint sealant material, rubber, oils,
fuels, markings and loose particles. The Contractor is free to employ mechanical brooms, jet-
water devices, sand-blasting or surfaces milling. The method employed must be suitable to
prepare and achieve a surface ready for application of tack coat.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

103
 After cleaning and before application of Prime or Tack coats the surface shall be inspected and
approved by the Engineer who may require further cleaning.

304.05. Weather conditions

If cutback bitumen is to be used for prime or tack coat the work shall only be carried out in
settled, dry weather. Tack-coat in particular shall only be sprayed on clean dry surfaces. No
prime or tack coat shall be applied during foggy or wet conditions, when rain is imminent, when
the wind is sufficiently hard to cause uneven spraying, when the surface is visibly wet (more
than damp), when the surface temperature is below 10°C and when the moisture content of the
base is more than 50% of optimum moisture.

304.06. Application of Prime and Tack Coats

Prime and tack coats shall only be laid using an approved bitumen distributor.
Distributors shall be of constant pressure type, self-propelled, and have a minimum binder
capacity of 4000 liters.
Distributors shall be equipped with low range speedoMetre (fifth wheel) in good working
condition, so located to be visible to the driver to enable him to maintain accurately the constant
speed for spraying at the uniform specified rate. They shall be fitted with a calibrated pressure
gauge which accurately records the pressure of the bitumen at the spray bar. Binder pumps
shall be capable of maintaining constant pressure during spray runs.
Distributors for cutback bitumen shall be fitted with burners in combination with a circulating
pump capable of maintaining the bitumen without overheating within the specified temperature
range and an accurately calibrated thermoMetre for indicating the spraying temperature of the
bitumen.
The spray bar shall be capable of applying bitumen binder to a minimum width of
2.30 Metres with provision for application of lesser widths by closing jets. The spray bar shall
have the capability of being raised and lowered to specified heights above the road and of being
adjusted so that it is parallel with the road surface. The distributors shall be so designed to allow
the circulation of hot binder through the spray bar when not spraying.
Spray bars shall be fitted with either slotted spray jets or preferably whirling spray jets, whose
essential features are the ability to spray binder uniformly at the specified rate of spray. If
whirling spray jets are fitted the spray bar shall be protected by a hood to reduce wind
interference. Distributors shall be fitted with hand spraying equipment with nozzle spray
attachments for spraying small, inaccessible areas and to correct deficiencies in the spray rate.
Calibrate the asphalt distributor spray bar height, nozzle angle, and pump pressure and check
longitudinal and transverse spread rates weekly.
Protect the surfaces of nearby objects to prevent spattering or marring. Ensure even distribution
with no areas missed nor with overlap. Spraying will commence with areas adjacent to the edge
of the road and then on the centre section to minimize run-off. Similarly spraying will commence
at the low end of gradients and inside of superelevated curves.
Prime coat application is to be at the rate directed by the Engineer and will normally be in the
range of 0.8 to 1.0 l/m2. The Engineer will approve the exact application rate, temperature, and
area to be treated before application and may make adjustments for variations in field
conditions.
Tack coat application is to be at the rate directed by the Engineer and will normally be in the
range of 0.25 to 0.4 l/m2, The Engineer will approve the exact application rate, temperature, and
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
104
 area to be treated before application and may make adjustments for variations in field
conditions.
For both Tack coat and prime coat the exact rates of application of tack coat shall be
determined from field trials.
If excess asphalt material is applied, squeegee the excess from the surface. Allow the tacked
surfaces to completely cure before placing the covering course. Place the covering course
within 4 hours of placing the tack coat. No traffic should be allowed on the tack coat, other than
unavoidable construction traffic.
Prime coat applications shall be in accordance with the rate directed to a tolerance of
+/-0.1 L/sq.m. and tack coat applications within a tolerance of +/-0.05 L/sq.m. Actual application
rates will be checked in the field.

304.07. Works acceptance

The surface where the prime and tack coats have been laid will be accepted according to the
Sub-Clause 001.04.
Measurements
The quantity of prime coat work will be measured in square Metres of binder applied to the road
based on the lesser of the recorded rates of spread and the instructed rates of spread.
Tack coat will only be measured for payment where it is applied to the original asphalt surface
immediately prior to the laying of the regulating layer or new asphalt. Tack coat to the
subsequent surfaces of the regulating layer, the binder and of any intermediate layers which
may be required to make up the required thickness shall not be measured for payment but will
be considered an integral part of the asphalt laying process and the cost of such tack coating
will be deemed to be included in the rates quoted for the laying of asphalt concrete.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

Payment will be made under some or all of the items below:

Unit of
No. Item
Measure
Prime-coat using cutback bitumen, bitumen (bitumen
30401 Liters
emulsion), 0.8 (0,9) l/m2
Tack coat using cutback bitumen, bitumen (bitumen
30402 Liters
emulsion), 0.3(0,4) l/m2

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

105
 CHAPTER 305. ASPHALT CONCRETE FOR PAVEMENTS
305.01. Introduction
This chapter gives the requirements for the execution of one or more courses made from hot
asphalt concrete according to SM STB 1033-2008.

305.02. Materials
The materials will be in accordance to the following standards:

Asphalt concrete SM STB 1033-2008 and section 305.08

SM GOST 22245-90 supplemented by the additional

Road bitumen from crude oil
requirements of Chapter 011

Crushed stone SM GOST 8267-93

Sand SM GOST 8736-93

Filler SM GOST 16557-78

305.03. General Requirements

Asphalt concrete road pavement (the preparation, the equipment, the transport, the laying, and
the compaction) will be according to Chapter 10 SNiP 3.06.03-85.
Asphalt will be produced in various types according to the job requirements and shall be either
fine grained dense or coarse grained dense.

305.04. Mixing equipment

The asphalt plant shall be capable of producing a consistent product conforming to these
specifications. It shall be of the batch mix type and shall have a rated output capacity of at least
120 tons per hour. Smaller plants of lower output acting in combination are not acceptable.
The proportioning, mixing, and discharging will be automatic. The equipment shall be approved
by the Engineer. The asphalt plant scales shall be sensitive to 0.5% of the maximum load that
may be required.
The plant shall be fitted with a modern system of emission control for exhaust gases and shall
be equipped with effective dust collectors. The system shall collect all fine particlesdust
discharge and shall be so equipped that the collected fines are available for re-use as filler in
the mixes or to be spoiled as appropriate.

305.05. Asphalt finishers

Bituminous materials shall be laid by a self propelled spreader finisher equipped with a
hopper, delivery augers and a heated adjustable vibrating screed. It shall be capable of laying
bituminous materials to the required width and profile without causing segregation, dragging,
burning, irregularities or other defects and within the specified level and surface regularity
tolerances. Delivery augers shall terminate not more than 200 mm from the edge plates.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
106
 Only asphalt finishers having automatic system for level and cross section control, approved by
the Engineer will be used for the placing of asphalt layers.

305.06. The preparation of the supporting surface

Tack coat shall be provided wherever new asphaltic concrete is laid over existing pavement and
wherever a first course of new asphaltic concrete has been exposed to traffic or left to weather
to such an extent that the Engineer considers it necessary to provide tack coat in the interests
of satisfactory adhesion between the courses. In any event a tack coat will be required
wherever a period of more than 10 days is allowed between successive courses. This period
may be substantially reduced if the surface of the underlying course is exposed to excessive
traffic. Provision of tack coat, other than the initial coat on the old existing asphalt, will not be the
subject of any separate payment and is considered to be included in the rate for asphaltic
concrete.
Before laying of asphalt and before any tack coating, the surface shall be inspected and
approved by the Engineer who may require further cleaning or other preparation before tack
coating (if necessary) is allowed to be carried out.
Where the edges of the asphalt course to be laid are bounded by adjacent kerbs, islands, or
other upstands, the area of the upstand which will come into contact with the completed asphalt
course shall be carefully primed with cutback bitumen to provide an adhesive bond between the
freshly laid asphalt and the upstand. Areas of upstands above the asphalt course design level
or which will be left exposed for any reason shall be carefully protected during this priming
operation with either heavy paper or plastic film carefully taped in place. Kerbs and upstands
which remain exposed after completion of the asphalt work must not be stained or marked with
bitumen spray/splash. Such marking may lead to rejection of the work area affected with a
requirement that the Contractor shall make good the damage at his own cost.In extreme cases
such making good is likely to require the removal and replacement of concrete kerbs.

305.07. Weather conditions

The laying of asphalt concrete courses shall only be done at ambient temperatures exceeding
6°C and rising with an allowable wind velocity of less than 25 km/h and/or at an ambient
temperature exceeding 10°C and rising with an allowable wind velocity of less than 55 km/h or
for asphalt with a thickness of equal or less than 30 mm with an allowable wind speed of 25
km/h. With falling temperatures all work shall be stopped when the temperature reaches 6°C.
Asphalt concrete shall not be laid when the surface is visibly wet or when rain is immenent.
To the extent practicable, the Engineer and the Contractor shall jointly agree a shutdown date,
and subsequently a start up date, for asphalt laying operations such that operations are stopped
for the whole of the winter period before any extensive periods of expected rain/snow and do
not recommence before there is reasonable expectation of prolonged periods of suitable
weather.
In the absence of any agreement on the shutdown period the Engineer shall be entitled to order
that asphalt shall not be laid during the period 15-th October to 31-st March.

305.08. Asphalt Mix Design and Testing

Asphalt mixes to be used in the Works shall be designed by the Contractor in accordance with
the requirements and procedures of SM STB 1033-2008. The Contractor shall allow the
Engineer to participate in the mix design process and shall keep him fully informed throughout

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

107
 the procedure. When a satisfactory mix design has been prepared it shall be forwarded to the
Engineer with all supporting test documentation for approval. Before approving a mix the
Engineer shall confer with the Employer’s laboratory that shall be satisfied that the mix is
appropriate for conditions in Moldova.
Following approval, the mix as used in the field shall comply with the requirements of
SM STB 1033-2008 and with the tolerances given below.
Throughout the course of the Works, asphalt shall be sampled and tested on a regular basis.
Samples will be drawn from the mixing plant and/or from the finisher as directed by the
Engineer at a frequency of not less than:
• At least one sample for each 400 tons of mixture for regulating and binder course
materials and
• At least one sample for each 200 tons of mixture for wearing course materials.
These samples shall be tested in the accordance with the requirements of
SM STB-1033-2008.
The percentages of aggregate grading as determined by testing shall not vary from the
approved mix design values by more than:
• +/- 5% aggregate sizes >15 mm
• +/- 3% aggregate sizes >5 mm
• +/- 2% aggregate sizes <5 mm

Bitumen content as determined by testing shall not vary from the approved design mix in binder
courses and regulating asphalt by more than +/-0.3% and in wearing courses by more than +/-
0.2%.
If tests show that the mix being produced does not comply with these requirements all asphalt
work will cease immediately the problem is noted and no further asphalt will be laid until, either
the causes of the fault with the existing mix have been established and rectified or until a new
mix design has been prepared and approved following the procedures above.
The thickness and the density of the asphalt course being laid will be checked by coring.
At least one 100 mm diaMetre twin core for each 800 m2 of asphalt mix laid shall be tested for
density, thickness and voids.
With an absolute minimum of 3 cores being taken for any day’s work. Cores will be checked for
thickness of layer as the average of three uniformly spaced thickness measurements by caliper
round the circumference of the core. The compacted asphalt in the field shall achieve a density
in accordance with Chapter 305.14.
The grading and specific gravity of the cold aggregates will be tested as directed by the
Engineer but normally not less than once per day.

305.09. Bitumen preparation

The bitumen will be uniformly heated to permit a continuous introduction of bitumen from the
storage tank into the mixer.
It is forbidden to heat bitumen to a temperature above 175°C. Bitumen heating shall be by
indirect means using oil-filled heating coils or other approved systems. Any bitumen which has
been heated above 180°C or has suffered carbonization from prolonged heating shall be
removed from the plant and disposed off.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
108
 305.010. Preparation of the aggregates
Before introduction into the mixer, the aggregates have to be heated and dried to the correct
temperature. Unless otherwise agreed with the Engineer aggregates shall be discharged from
the heating process at such a temperature as will ensure their introduction to the mixer at a
temperature of between 155 and 170 deg C. The aggregate moisture content at the moment of
introduction to the mixer shall in no circumstances exceed 1%.
The burners to be used for heating and drying the aggregates shall be so adjusted as not to
damage or contaminate the aggregates either by overheating or by the deposition of soot, oil or
other residues.
The mixing plant shall be so designed as to separate the aggregate into not less than four sizes
of aggregate which will then be combined by weight to reproduce, within the specified
tolerances, the design mix.
The mixing plant shall be designed to ensure the precise weighing of the bitumen to be added
to each batch of asphalt being mixed.

305.011. Mixing
The proportioning of bitumen and aggregates in the mixer shall be according to the approved
mix design formula.
The mixing period shall be sufficient to achieve a complete coating of the aggregates with
bitumen and the complete mixing of filler with bitumen and shall in no case be less than the
mixing period recommended by the plant manufacturer.

305.012. Transport
Mixed asphalt material shall be transported from the mixing plant to the laying site in tipping
trucks specially reserved and designated for this purpose.
Trucks shall be metal bodies, insulated and equipped with insulated tarpaulin covers. Covers
shall be deployed at all times when the truck is being used for the transport of asphalt.
Trucks for the transport of asphalt shall be equipped with ports in each side of the body for the
measurement of load temperatures. The Contractor shall supply and maintain suitable heavy
duty thermoMetres (Rototherm or similar or other approved type) at the delivery point, able to
measure temperatures at 1 Metre penetration into the load, for checking asphalt temperatures
prior to discharge into the finisher.
Limited quantities of approved release agent may be used to prevent asphalt material hanging
in, or adhering to the body during discharge. Release agents shall be subject to the approval of
the Engineer both as regards type and rate of application. Under no circumstances will agents
which react with or which are miscible with the binder be permitted. Any members of the
Contractors staff found applying such agents will be subject to immediate and automatic
removal from the site with an absolute prohibition on their re-employment on the project at any
time in any capacity. The Contractor shall ensure that this provision is brought forcefully to the
attention of all staff involved in asphalt work.

305.013. Supplying and laying

The supplying and laying of the asphalt mixture will be done according to SNiP 3.06.03-85.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

109
 Materials shall be spread, leveled and tamped by an approved self-propelled paving machine.
The mixed material shall be supplied continuously to the paver and laid without delay. The rate
of delivery of material to the paver shall be so regulated as to enable the paver to be operated
continuously and it shall be so operated whenever practicable.
The rate of travel of the paver and its method of operation shall be adjusted to ensure an even
and uniform flow of material across the full laying width, freedom from dragging or tearing and
without segregation of material.
In confined areas where irregularities or unavoidable obstacles make the use of mechanical
laying impracticable, the mixture may be spread by hand. Hand spreading shall be done by staff
experienced in the work and the standard of finish of the completed hand spread asphalt shall
not be noticeably inferior to the machine laid areas.
No asphalt shall be laid in courses of less than 40 mm thickness unless specifically called for in
the design. Asphalt wearing course shall not be laid in thicknesses greater than 60 mm and
asphalt binder course shall not be laid in thicknesses of more than 80 mm without first obtaining
the specific approval of the Engineer.

305.014. Compaction
The compaction of the mixture will be done according to SNiP 3.06.03-85.
The Contractor shall provide sufficient rollers of adequate size and weight to achieve the
specified compaction. Prior to commencing the laying of bituminous mixes in the permanent
works the Contractor shall carry out site trials to demonstrate the adequacy of his plant and to
determine the optimum method of use and sequence of operation of the rollers.
Rolling shall be carried out parallel to the axis of the road with transverse movement of rollers
being accomplished by gradual diagonal rolls not varying by more than 15 degrees from the
axial direction. Sharp turning movements of rollers on fresh asphalt shall not be permitted. The
Contractor shall be responsible the repair of any and all damage which may result from the
improper or careless use of rollers. The only exception to the use of rollers in an axial direction
shall be when the need arises to compact transverse joints. In these cases the rollers shall be
turned off the asphalt surface and shall be used at right angles to the axis of the road. All
exposed edges of the lane/layer shall be adequately supported by the use of suitable timbers so
that the roller(s) may move onto and off the asphalt without deforming the edges. Rolling shall
be commenced before the mix temperature falls below 120°C and final compaction shall be
accomplished before the temperature falls below 80°C. No further rolling will be allowed if the
temperature falls below 80°C. In general the pattern of rolling shall be started from edge/down
side and procced towards center/upper line. In case of joint rolling should commenced first at
the joint.
The compacted asphalt in the field shall achieve a coefficient of compaction in accordance with
SNIP 3.06.03-84 and SM STB 1115-2008.
Coefficient of compaction shall be determined comparing the density of the core with the density
of the remolded sample and with the average density of the laboratory samples taken on the
same day. If any of the above coefficients of compaction are less than requirement in SNiP
3.06-03-84 and SM-STB 1115-2008 then that area of pavement shall not be accepted.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

110
 305.015. Joints, shaping and edge cleaning
In places where the freashly laid mixture is adjoining the existing pavement or previously laid
asphalt, joints will be formed. Such joints shall ensure a perfect and continuous transition
between the old and the new surface.
The existing pavement or previous laid asphalt shall be carefully cut to a neat vertical face using
an approved cutting device (roller mounted disc cutter or approved alternative), immediately
before laying of new asphalt this face shall be covered by a cutback bitumen priming material in
accordance with Chapter 304.
Laying new asphalt against an uncut edge of previously laid asphalt shall only be permitted
when the previously laid edge is less than 6 hours old and in this case only with the express
permission of the Engineer and using procedures approved by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible for ensuring that the required degree of compaction is
achieved throughout joint areas. The Engineer may direct that cores for compaction checks be
carried out through joints.
The asphalt mixture shall be continuously and uniformly laid, to have the same thickness and
surface texture as the previous lane. Great care shall be taken to avoid deforming the edge of
the layer by over-rolling. If necessary the edge of the lane/layer shall be confined with timbers of
suitable thickness fixed to the underlying layer to permit compaction of the edge.
All material removed during cutting and trimming processes shall be removed from the site and
disposed of in accordance with Specification requirements and in a manner approved by the
Engineer.

305.016. Tolerances on finished work

As soon as possible after compaction is completed the surface will be checked for tolerance.
Completed asphalt overlay courses shall not be less than the thickness indicated in the
drawings and the final levels of asphalt wearing course shall be within a tolerance of
+15 mm to 0 mm. Levels shall be checked using a grid stipulated by the Engineer comprising
not less than 6 points per 100 sq.m. and spaced at intervals which ensure that no more than
30% of the grid points coincide with locations used by the Contractor for setting out the initial
surface level control.
A 3 Metre straight edge shall be used to check the final surface for regularity after initial rolling
and while the material is still hot enough for corrections to be made. Checks shall be made at
regular intervals specified by the Engineer, but not less than two checks per lane at 10 Metre
intervals, and at any other location where the Engineer’s staff considers that there appears to
be excess irregularity. Checks shall be made both parallel to and at right angles to the axis of
the road. A defective area is an area with surface deviations in excess of 5 mm relative to the
straightedge. If it is shown to be an acceptable procedure, within the capabilities of the
Contractor, and resulting in an acceptable surface at the specified degree of compaction,
defective areas may be corrected by loosening the material, adding or removing material,
reshaping, and compacting. If correction cannot be made in this manner, defective areas shall
be removed to the full thickness of the layer and re-laid. Areas to be removed and re-laid shall
be not less than one lane in width and 25 Metres in length. All costs of rectification shall be
borne by the Contractor.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

111
 305.017. Acceptance procedures
Asphalt pavements it will be accepted according to the provisions of chapter 002, of this
specification and of SNiP 3.06.03-85.
Bitumen acceptance will be on the basis of SM GOST 22245-90 and additional requirements in
chapter 011.11.
Bitumen supplied to the site shall be routinely tested for conformity with these Specifications.
For bitumen delivered in bulk, tests shall be conducted at a minimum rate of one set of tests per
tanker/truck load. For bitumen delivered in drums tests shall be conducted at a minimum rate of
one set of tests per 10 tonnes received. These test rates are intended to be used for routine
testing when deliveries are confirmed as uniform and of acceptable quality. Initially, the
Engineer may order tests at a greater intensity. In addition to the site tests all shipments of
bitumen must have a manufacturer’s test certificate indicating compliance with all the
requirements of the Specification. This test certificate must be presented to and approved by
the Engineer BEFORE the relevant shipment of bitumen is permitted to enter the site.
Filler acceptance will be made according to the Sub-Clause 012.05.
The material in the asphalt concrete pavements and mixtures will be accepted in accordance to
the Sub-Clause 012.04.
The finished pavement courses will be accepted on the basis of Sub-Clause 305.16
All aspects of asphalt work shall comply with the requirements of this chapter.
Measurements
The asphalt pavement works will be measured in tonnes or square Metres of each type of
asphalt provided as itemized in the Bills. The measurement and payment includes aggregates,
bitumen, filler, all mixing, transport, laying and compacting operations, the treatment of joints
and application of tack coat (other than one initial tackcoat) as required or directed together with
all testing and all other associated works of whatsoever nature. Where measurement is in
tonnes, the payable tonnage shall be calculated as the square Metres of asphalt laid and
accepted multiplied by the lesser of (i) the average thickness as determined by coring (where
results greater than the required thickness are treated as being of the required thickness) and
(ii) the required thickness, to give the volume of asphalt. This shall then be transformed to
tonnage using the average density of the asphalt as determined from density tests on the cores.
Where measurement is in square Metres of a specified thickness of asphalt the asphalt shall be
measured as the net square Metres of asphalt required to be laid in accordance with the
requirements of the drawings and the instructions of the Engineer. Where for any reason the
thickness of the asphalt course being measured is less than the thickness required as specified
and the Engineer permits such reduced thickness to remain, the payment for the area of
reduced thickness shall be calculated as the nominal payment due multiplied by the square of
the measured average thickness divided by the square of the specified thickness. Average
thickness shall be the average thickness as determined by coring (where results greater than
the required thickness are treated as being of the required thickness). The area to be
considered in any calculation of average thickness for the purpose of adjusting payment shall
be as directed by the Engineer.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and certified by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

112
 Payment will be made under the Bill of Quantity items set out below. The pavement bill will use
either the series of items measured in square Metres with the appropriate thicknesses inserted
or the three items measured in tonnes:

No. Item Unit of Measure

Wearing course of stone mastic asphalt concrete SMSc-
30501 Square Metre
I/2,2 SM STB 1033:2008 h - 50 mm
Binder course of dense asphalt concrete SKBg-II/2.3 SM
30502 Square Metre
STB 1033:2008 h - 60 mm
Wearing course of asphalt concrete SMVg-III / 2,0 SM
30503 Square Metre
STB 1033:2008 h- 40 mm
30504 Binder Course SKPg-II, SM STB 1033:2008 h- 60 mm Square metre

CHAPTER 306. REMOVING, RESTORING AND REPAIRING THE

SHOULDERS
306.01. Introduction
This chapter deals with the work of excavating existing shoulders and rebuilding with drainage
layer, approved backfill and gravel or paved shoulder surface.

306.02. Materials
The materials to be used in the reconstruction of shoulders shall be:

Sand drainage layer SM GOST 8736-93

Select fill Select fill with PI<17 and CBR>15%

Crushed stone, gravel, sand mixture for the
SM GOST 25607-2010
shoulder surface

306.03. The removal and reconstruction of shoulders

Shoulders will be removed and reconstructed/constructed wherever the pavement works require
such works to be carried out (e.g. where the existing carriageway is to be widened, where a
lane is to be added, where the pavement is to be reconstructed or where indicated on the
Drawings that shoulder reconstruction is required to improve subgrade drainage or as instructed
by the Engineer).
Wherever the works of shoulder reconstruction/construction require any of the existing asphalt
to be removed, the final position of the required asphalt edge shall be carefully marked and the
excess asphalt cut away with a saw (diamond or other abrasive disc cutter) to leave a clean
edge against which shoulder construction shall proceed.
Shoulders will first be excavated to depth shown on the drawings or as instructed by the
Engineer. In general, excavation shall be carried down to the level of the underside of the sand
drainage layer in the base of the carriageway pavement.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

113
 Shoulder subgrade will then be compacted at OMC to a density of not less that 95% of
maximum dry density (AASHTO T180).
A 200 mm sand drainage layer will be placed, continuous with the drainage layer in the
pavement and connecting that layer to the side drain or embankment face. Select fill will then be
used to bring the shoulder up to the level of the underside of the shoulder surface layer. Select
fill shall be placed and compacted at OMC in layers not exceeding 150 mm in thickness to a
density of not less that 97% of maximum dry density (AASHTO T180).
Shoulders will be completed with a 150 mm layer of shoulder surfacing material or crushed
limestone(M 300), compacted at OMC to a density of not less that 98% of maximum dry density
(AASHTO T180) adjacent to the carriageway and with topsoil at the back of this layer as shown
on the drawings.
Where the pavement layers are to be reconstructed, all layers of shoulder reconstruction shall
be constructed simultaneously with the adjacent layers of pavement construction.
The material resulting from the removal of the shoulders may be used for earthworks if it meets
the requirements of Chapter 201. If unsuitable, material from shoulder excavation will be
removed and disposed of as spoil in accordance with the requirements of this Specification.

306.04. Surfacing of the shoulders with asphalt concrete

In the event that shoulders are to be surfaced or partially surfaced with asphalt concrete, those
parts which are to be surfaced shall be reconstructed simultaneously with the pavement
surfacing and in accordance with the requirements for the pavement reconstruction given in
Chapter 305.

306.05. Acceptance of Works

Work stipulated in this chapter will be accepted according to Sub-Clause 001.04.
Measurements
The excavation and disposal of shoulder material and the reconstruction of shoulders shall be
measured in cubic Metres of material removed or required to be placed except for prime coat
which will be measured in square Metres and asphalt which will be measured in square Metres.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter. If shoulders are to be asphalted the works of subbase, base,
prime coat and asphalt concrete shall be paid under the items given for these works for the
reconstruction of pavement in Chapter 305. The select fill to shoulder construction will be paid
under the Earthworks items for material from Borrow Pits and Formation of Embankment. The
demolition (excavation) of the old shoulders shall be paid for under the Earthworks item for
general excavation and the provision and spreading of topsoil will be paid under the Earthworks
item for supply and spreading of topsoil.
Payment will be made under some or all of the items below:

No. Item Unit of Measure

30601 Crushed stone shoulder M300, h-0,15 m Square Metre

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

114
 CHAPTER 307. VARIOUS ASPHALT WORKS
307.01. Introduction
This chapter deals with the execution of small asphalt works for sidewalks, kerbs, and
pavements at bus stops, etc. The works in this chapter are areas of asphalt which it is not
possible to lay with a asphalt finisher and which are not adjacent to, contiguous with or ancillary
to areas of bulk asphalt laying carried out with a paver.

307.02. Asphalt mixture formula

The asphalt used shall be identical with the mixes used for the main works of asphalt paving
and the mix and quality of asphalt shall comply in all respects with the requirements of chapter
305. The procedures for checking quality and testing set out in Chapter 305 shall be followed in
full, except that the requirements the Piecess of tests shall be revised by the Engineer having
regard to the volumes of asphalt being produced and placed at any one time.
307.03. Preparation of supporting surface
The supporting surface will be prepared in accordance with Sub-Clause 304.04 and 305.06 as
appropriate. The contact surfaces of the kerbs, islands or other upstands will be coated with a
bituminous tack-coat in accordance with the requirements of chapter 304. When the binder is
spread, all adjacent surfaces must be protected in accordance with the requirements of Chapter
304 and Sub-Clause 305.06.

307.04. Weather limits

Asphalting shall be limited to suitable weather conditions as defined in , Sub-Clause 305.07.

307.05. Transport
Asphalt shall be transported in dedicated trucks complying with the requirements of
Sub-Clause 305.12.

307.06. Mixture laying

Asphalt for small works shall be laid by hand. Laying shall be done by experienced crews, fully
equipped with suitable hand tools, shovels, barrows, rakes, screeds, etc. Care shall be taken
that asphalt residue does not build up on tools and suitable means shall be provided for heating
tools and maintaining them hot throughout the laying and spreading process to facilitate this.

307.07. The compaction

The compacted asphalt in the field shall achieve a coefficient of compaction in accordance with
SNIP 3.06.03-84 and SM STB 1115-2008.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

115
 307.08. Surface tolerance
The longitudinal and transverse uniformity will be verified using a 3 Metre long metallic
straightedge. Areas with deviations of more than 10 mm from the straightedge will be rejected.
They will be repaired using approved methods or removed and re-laid if repair is not possible.

307.09. Works acceptance

The works will be accepted for payment if such work is in accordance with the drawings and
Technical Specifications and approved by the Engineer.
Measurements
The work is measured in Square Metre.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and certified by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter. Payment will be made under the item below:

Unit of
No. Item
Measure
Asphalt concrete SMVg-III / 2,0 SM STB 1033:2008 Square
30701
h- 30 mm Metre

CHAPTER 308. SOIL STABILIZED WORKS

308.01. Introduction
Soil-stabilized base course consists of soil, Portland Cement or hydraulic binder uniformly
mixed, moistened, compacted, finished and cured in accordance with these Specifications, and
it conforms to lines, grades, thicknesses and typical cross-section shown or as directed by the
Engineer, and shall be according to GOST 23558-94.

308.02. Materials
Portland cement and water according to Specifications, curing seal shall be emulsified asphalt
and the granular material shall not contain gravel or stone retained on a 50 mm sieve or more
than 45 percent retained on a 5.0 mm sieve.

308.03. Equipment and preparations

Soil stabilized base shall be constructed by any machine, combination of machines or
equipment thatwill produce results meeting the requirements for soil pulverization, cement or
hydraulic binder application, mixing, water application, incorporation of materials, compaction,
finishing and curing as controlled by these Specifications. All equipment necessary for the

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

116
 proper construction of the base course shall be on the project and in satisfactory condition
before construction begins.
Before other construction operations are begun, the areas to be paved are graded and shaped
as required to construct the base course in conformance with grades, lines and typical
crosssection shown on the plans. Unsuitable or excess material shall be removed, disposed of
and leveled at a designated dump area. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support, without
displacement, the construction equipment and compaction hereinafter specified. Soft or yielding
subgrade shall be made stable before construction proceeds.

308.04. Central Plant-Mix Operation

The soil material, cement or hydraulic binder and water are mixed at a central mixing plant of
the pugmill or rotary drum type using a batch or continuous feed. If a batch feed is used, the
materials are proportioned by weight, and if a continuous feed is used, the materials are
proportioned by volume. If the Contractor employs a continuous type mixer and feed, the soil
shall be drawn from storage bins or areas through adjustable calibrated gates or fixed gate
feeder with adjustable speed control. The mixer shall be equipped with Metreing devices of an
approved type which introduce the cement or hydraulic binder and water into the mixer in
desired proportions. The Metreing devices and soil feeder shall be interlocked and so
synchronized as to maintain a constant ratio between soil, cement and water. Where the
Engineer deems it necessary for the accurate control of cement feed, the Contractor equips the
cement storage hoppers with a compressed air system to eliminate the possibility of arching of
the cement. The plant shall be equipped with facilities satisfactory to the Engineer for calibrating
gate opening or rate of feed, by weighing check samples.
The weight of charge in a batch mixer or the rate of feed to a continuous type mixer shall not
exceed that which permits complete mixing of all material. Dead areas in the mixer, in which
material does not move or is not sufficiently agitated, are corrected either by reduction in
volume of material or by other adjustments. Mixing of the materials shall be continued until the
cement and water are evenly distributed through the mass and a uniform mixture of unchanging
appearance is obtained. In no case shall the period of mixing be less than thirty (30) seconds
from the time all materials are in the mixer. Sufficient mixing capacity shall be provided to
produce a minimum of 150 t of cement stabilized mixture per hour. The Engineer reserves the
right to order the use of any proportioning or mixing equipment discontinued, where in the
opinion of the Engineer it fails to produce a satisfactory mixture. Immediately prior to spreading
soil-cement base course material, the surface of the prepared subgrade shall be moistened and
kept moist until covered by the mixture. Materials are transported from the central mixing plant
to the street by means of suitable vehicles, equipped with protective covers, and deposited by
employing approved spreading equipment. Dumping in piles on the subgrade shall not be
permitted. The mixture shall be spread in one layer of uniform density and of such thickness
that after compacting, the finished soil-cement base conforms to the required grade and cross-
section. The spreading progresses continuously without breaks and shall be organized so that
not more than thirty (30) minutes elapses between the time of placing the material in adjacent
lanes at any location.
After a part width section is completed, the longitudinal joint against which additional material is
to be placed shall be trimmed in a neat line parallel to the curb and with a vertical edge. Material
cut away from the edge shall be spread uniformly over the adjacent subgrade and compacted or
otherwise disposed of as directed by the Engineer. Transverse construction joints are treated in
a similar manner.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

117
 308.05. Compaction
The mixture shall be compacted within two (2) hours after the addition of water. Any soil and
cement mixture which is not compacted and finished shall not remain undisturbed for more than
thirty (30) minutes. At the start of compaction, moisture in the mixture shall be within two (2)
percentage points of the specified optimum moisture content.
Prior to the beginning of compaction, the mixture shall be in a loose condition for its full depth.
Compaction shall be carried out on the loose material until it has attained a uniform density of
one hundred (100) percent of the Maximum Design Density as determined by a moisture
density test. Compaction may be obtained by steel wheel, grid or pneumatic rollers, vibratory or
sheepsfoot packers or any other means approved by the Engineer. Following initial compaction,
the mixture shall be shaped to the required grade and cross-section. Where necessary the
surface shall then be scratched to remove compaction planes which may have developed
during compaction. Final compaction to the specified density shall be done with steel wheel or
pneumatic rollers, or vibratory packers. If the specified density is not attained, the Contractor, at
his own expense, shall complete one of the following operations as instructed by the Engineer.
• Reprocess the same soil-cement material within twenty-four (24) hours of the original
application of cement and water, with the addition of seventy-five (75) percent of the
original cement content.
• Reprocess the same soil-cement material after the elapse of twenty-four (24) hours
with the addition of one hundred (100) percent of the original cement content.
• Remove the soil-cement base and replace it with new approved material processed in
accordance with these Specifications.
• Complete the surfacing operation in two (2) lifts, applying a total average depth of 75
mm of asphaltic concrete.

308.06. Finishing
After final compaction, the surface shall be smooth and free from cracks, ridges and loose
material. Any ridges or undulations are removed by planing with a motor grader, and the
resulting loose material removed from the area. The finishing and construction operations shall
be completed before six (6) hours has elapsed from the time of addition of water to the mix.
The surface of the compacted base course shall be kept moist until a curing seal has been
applied. Water shall be applied in a fine spray which does not segregate the cement from the
soil particles.

308.07. Curing
A curing seal of emulsified asphalt shall be applied to the dampened surface at a temperature of
20ºC - 50ºC, and at a uniform rate of 2.5 litres per square Metre. The seal covers the full width
of the roadway and shall be allowed to cure thoroughly before the Engineer grants permission
to continue further works.

308.08. Maintenance
The Contractor shall, within the Limits of Contract, maintain the soil-cement base course in
good condition. Faulty areas are replaced for the full depth of the base course with fresh
soilcement mixture or concrete. Surface depressions are brought up to proper grade by
patching with asphaltic concrete prior to the application of the asphaltic surface course. Areas
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
118
 where the curing seal is removed by traffic or otherwise, shall be resealed immediately, at the
Contractor’s expense.
Measurements
The volume of work is measured in tons.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

119
 CHAPTER 309. COATED MACADAM
309.01. General
The Coated Macadam shall conform to SNiP 3.06.03-85, chapter 9.

309.02. Aggregate
The aggregate shall consist of crushed rock or crushed gravel of angular shape and of such
character that it will compact and interlock under rolling. It shall be of reasonably uniform quality
throughout and free from clay, earth, dust or other deleterious matter.

309.03. Bitumen
The binder shall be Gudron as specified in the SNiP or ordered by the Engineer.

309.04. Preparation of the base or existing surface

If the surface to be treated contains holes or depressions such irregularities shall be repaired by
removal of all loose material and replacement with a suitable patching mixture or other material
approved by the Engineer, which shall be compacted to produce a tight surface conforming with
the adjacent areas. Bumps and waves which impair the riding qualities of the surface shall be
removed by scarification and re-compaction or other such means as shall be agreed or ordered
by the Engineer. The base shall then be swept clean of all loose and foreign material.

309.05. Application of Choke aggregate

Immediately after the Coated Macadam has been applied and while it is still warm a light
sprinkling of choke aggregate will be spread over the surface in just sufficient quantity to
prevent sticking of the roller wheels. This will then be rolled and simultaneously with the rolling
additional choke aggregate shall be added in samll quantities and lightly broomed over the
surface while rolling continues until the surface intersticies between the coarse aggregate have
been filled but without covering the coarse aggregate itself. The surface shall then be rolled until
the stone is thoroughly inbedded into the binder and anchored in place. Rolling will be continued
until the surface is hard and smooth and shows no perceptible movement under the roller.

309.06. Seal Coat

The surface shall be swept clean of all loose material and treated with a second coat of binder
under the same conditions as in Sub-Clause 309.06 of this Clause. Immediately after
application of the binder, cover aggregate will be spread and broomed uniformly over the
surface.

309.07. Protection of Pavement

The seal coat will be applied as soon as practicable after the application of the choke aggregate
and the surface course shall be protection from all traffic (other than that essential to the
construction) until completion of the seal coat.
Measurements

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

120
 The volume of work is measured in tons.

Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.
Payment will be made under the item below:

No. Item Unit of Measure

30901 Coated Macadam, h - 80 mm Square Metre

CHAPTER 310. MEASUREMENT OF PAVEMENT ROUGHNESS

310.01.
Within 28 days after notice to commence, the Contractor shall present to the Engineer the name
and qualifications of an independent third party laboratory or testing company that will perform
pavement roughness measurements, using the International Roughness Index (IRI). The
qualification shall also include the IRI profiling equipment information including manufacturer’s
specifications and current calibration certificate from an internationally recognized authority, and
the qualification and training records of individuals conducting the roughness survey.

310.02.
The Contractor shall not be able to commence with asphalt concrete wearing course until the
Engineers approves the testing company or laboratory and the proposed IRI profiling
equipment, and the Quality Control (QC) plan submitted by the Contractor as per Appendix B.
Any delays in asphalt concrete wearing course construction caused by the Engineer’s
determination of inadequate qualifications of the testing company, the profiling equipment,
and/or the QC plan will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

310.03.
All roughness measurements and reporting costs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

310.04. Measuring IRI

310.04.1. Introduction
Pavement roughness is defined in accordance with ASTM E867 as "The deviation
of a surface from a true planar surface with characteristic dimensions that affect
vehicle dynamics and ride quality." The International Roughness Index is used in
this Contract as the standard roughness index for the finished roadway surface.
The summary numeric is the IRI in Metres/kiloMetre (m/km). The primary
advantages of the IRI are:

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

121
 1. It is a time-stable, reproducible mathematical processing of the known profile.
2. It is broadly representative of the effects of roughness on vehicle response
and user's perception over the range of wavelengths of interest, and is thus
relevant to the definition of roughness.
3. It is a zero-origin scale consistent with the roughness definition.
4. It is compatible with profile measuring equipment available in other European
countries.
5. It is independent of section length and amenable to simple averaging.
6. It is consistent with established international standards and able to be related
to other roughness measures.

310.04.2. IRI Measurement Procedure

The reference method for obtaining IRI data is based on AASHTO PP 37-04:
Standard Practice for Determination of International Roughness Index for
Quantifying Roughness of Pavements. The reference method in Appendix to
pavement calls for the use of a longitudinal profile measured in accordance with
ASTM E-950 as a basis for estimating IRI reported in units of centiMetre per
kiloMetre (cm/km).
Roughness data should be measured and reported in IRI units for all sections in
both traffic lanes, and in all third lanes sections. The Contractor shall plan the IRI
survey as appropriate to obtain meaningful roughness measurements with the
profiling equipment to overcome obstacles such as: speed restrictions, safety,
traffic congestion, etc. If needed, subject to prior approval by the Engineer, the
Contractor may be able to overcome such obstacles by collecting roughness data
during non-peak hours or at night, where speed, traffic, and safety are less of a
problem.
The Contractor shall submit the QC plan to perform roughness survey plan to the
Engineer no less than 60 days prior to panned commencement of the asphalt
concrete wearing course construction. The QC plan shall be prepared in
accordance with Appendix to pavement. The contractor shall not commence with
the roughness survey without prior approval of the QC plan by the engineer.
All equipment must be operated within manufacturer's specifications. When in
doubt regarding roughness measurement data, the Engineer has the right to
request additional quality assurance measurements to be performed by the
testing company, at the Contractor’s cost.

310.04.3. Additional Requirements for Collection of Roughness

Data
The following field survey guidelines are recommended for use in addition to the
standard practice shown in Appendix to pavement:
• Because roughness data shall be collected in both directions, and on the third
lane sections, the Contractor should clearly identify the "inventory direction" for
reporting IRI data so that the Owner can use this same data for the appropriate
direction for all future IRI surveys.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

122
 • Roughness data collection should be performed when the pavement is in
stable condition. Data should not be collected during winter (frost/freeze or
freeze/thaw) or wet base conditions. Data collection should be performed
during good weather conditions when wind conditions will not affect equipment
stability and on dry pavement. All recommended procedures of the equipment
manufacturer should be observed.
• Data should only be collected at the speeds that correspond to the
manufacturer's recommended speed range. Constant speeds should be
maintained for all measurements within specified ranges.
• Exclude the impacts of bridge approaches and railroad crossings (or other
localized discontinuities) from the roughness measurement for the roadway.
Bridge decks should not be included; the objective is to obtain a measure of
pavement not bridge roughness.
• Roughness measurements should be taken over the entire length of the
roadway section in both lanes, and along the third lane sections, where
applicable. However, in order to achieve equipment and speed stability, a
minimum run-in length, consistent with the manufacturer's specification, may
be required prior to the beginning of the measurement area. If this minimum
cannot be met prior to the start of the sample section, a shorter portion of the
section may be measured, but noted accordingly so that the same portion can
always be measured in future roughness data collection activities by the
Owner.

310.05. IRI Requirements

310.05.1. IRI Acceptance Criteria
The asphalt concrete wearing course shall be accepted for all road sections where
the IRI is not greater than 2.50 m/km (250 cm/km), and where all other applicable
contract requirements are met. The acceptance determination will be made by the
Engineer on sections that are no less than on kiloMetre in length (1 km). The
Engineer will use the measurement report provided by the Contractor (via its testing
company) for this determination. The Engineer may request the Contractor to
perform additional IRI measurements as quality assurance (QA) for verification of
certain sections where there may be questions about the quality of the reported IRI
results. Such QA measurements shall not exceed ten percent (10%) of the overall
QC measurement length. A section where IRI exceeds 250 cm/km will be rejected by
the Engineer where each such rejected section shall be no less than one kiloMetre
(1 km) long. The Engineer shall notify the Contractor about the rejected section upon
completing the review of the IRI measurement report within 14 days of its submittal
by the Contractor.

310.05.2. Asphalt Concrete Wearing Course Repairs

The repair procedures for rejected road sections shall be as follows:
• Within 14 days after receiving the Engineer’s notice of rejection, the Contractor
shall prepare a repair plan based on the IRI measurement report to remove
and replace the asphalt concrete wearing course from the rejected sections.
The length of any repair section shall be no less than 50 m. The repair plan
shall also address repair schedule, and traffic control and safety.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

123
 • No repair work shall commence without prior approval of the repair plan by the
Engineer.
• Upon completion of the repairs the Contractor shall re-measure the IRI along
all lanes in the rejected and repaired sections.
• This repair process shall continue until all rejected one-kiloMetre sections meet
the IRI acceptance criteria. Any and all repair costs and delays, also including
IRI re-measurements, shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
CHAPTER 311. CEMENT-STABILIZED BASE WORKS
311.01. Introduction
The base course of stabilized material with hydraulic binder consists of uniformly mixed
materials (crushed stone mixes, mixes of sand and stone, mixes of sanor d and soil) with
hydraulic binder, with addition of water, which is compacted, finished and cured in accordance
with these Specifications, and it conforms to lines, grades, thicknesses and typical cross-section
shown the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The base course of stabilized material with
non-organic binders shall be performed in compliance with SNiP 3.06.03-85 and GOST 23558-
94.

311.02. Materials
The materials used shall be compliant with these Specifications and standard norms,
as follows: ther non-organic binders shall be compliant with the requirements of GOST 10178-
85* and SMV ENV 13282:2010, the crushed stone - with the requirements of GOST 8267-93*,
the natural sand must be clean with no clay content or organic inclusions according to GOST
8736-93, the water shall be compliant with the requirements of GOST 23732-79. The soil used
for works shall have pH 4,5<pH<9,5, moisture content of 3% to 5% less than optimal moisture
and the density of 0,85 to 0,90 of the maximal density, according to GOST 25100. The
requirements for stabilized soils shall be those from GOST 23558-94. It is not admissible to use
soils of Plasticity Index higher than 12 and soils with more than 10% of passings of fines grains
through the 0.063 mm sieve.
The granular materials used for mixtures shall not contain rounded, elongated or soft gravel; it
should be of an approximately cubical form. The grading curve envelopes must be compliant
with the requirements of Table 2 in the GOST 23558-94. It is desirable to select and use of
homogeneous materials for use in the implementation of the stabilized base layers. It is
preferable to select and use consistently homogeneous materials for stabilized base courses.

311.03. Job Formula

To determine which are the materials used and their proportions, it is necessary, prior to the
start of works, to set a laboratory program to determine the type of stabilized materials with
hydraulic binders and the mix designs.
Not later than 21 calendaristic days before the commencement of road rehabilitation works by
Contractor, the Contractor shall have to submit the Mix Job Formula for approval by the
Engineer. The Job Formula shall include the the type of materials used, the grain content
(grading), the ratio of water and hydraulic binder added to the mixture, which shall be variable
dependent on the type and strength of materials selected for stabilization.
The physical properties of the obtained mixture to be used into the structural base copuse of the
road system shall have the following minimal values:

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

124
 • Compressive strength - 6.0 MPa
• Flexural strength - 1.2 MPa
• Frost rezistance - 25 cyclesi
Thus, the mixrture shall be of M60 grade by strength and of F25 grade – by frost resistance.
In the course of construction works, the Job Formula may be subject to adustment by
Contractor, so as to have a better laying mixture. To change the Job Formula, it is neccessary
to obtain the written Engineer’s concent. The proposed changed Job Formula must satisfy the
requirements for the physical properties included in this Compartment.

311.04. Equipment and preparations

The base course stabilized with hydraulic binder shall be constructed by means of any
machines, combination of machines or equipment that will produce results meeting the
requirements for use of hydraulic binder, its mixing, use of water, incorporation of materials,
compaction, finishing and curing in accordance with these Specifications. All equipment
necessary for proper construction of the base course must be in place on site and in satisfactory
condition before construction begins.
Before other construction operations are begun, the areas to be paved are graded and shaped
as required to construct the base course in conformance with grades, lines and typical cross-
section shown on the plans. Unsuitable or excess material shall be removed, disposed of and
leveled at a designated dump area. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support, without
displacement, the construction equipment and compaction hereinafter specified. Soft or yielding
subgrade shall be made stable, of a minimally necessary capacity bearing, before the
construction proceeds.

311.05. Central Plant-Mix Operation

The materials, hydraulic binder and water are mixed at a central mixing plant of the pugmill or
rotary drum type using a batch or continuous feed. If a batch feed is used, the materials are
proportioned by weight, and if a continuous feed is used, the materials are proportioned by
volume. If the Contractor employs a continuous type mixer and feed, the materials shall be
drawn from storage bins or areas through adjustable calibrated gates or fixed gate feeder with
adjustable speed control. The mixer shall be equipped with metering devices of an approved
type which introduce the binder and water into the mixer in desired proportions. The metering
devices and soil feeder shall be interlocked and so synchronized as to maintain a constant ratio
between the materials, binder and water. Where the Engineer deems it necessary for the
accurate control of binder feed, the Contractor equips the binder storage hoppers with a
compressed air system to eliminate the possibility of arching of the binder. The plant shall be
equipped with facilities satisfactory to the Engineer for calibrating gate opening or rate of feed,
by weighing check samples.
The weight of charge in a batch mixer or the rate of feed to a continuous type mixer shall not
exceed that which permits complete mixing of all material. Dead areas in the mixer, in which
material does not move or is not sufficiently agitated, are corrected either by reduction in
volume of material or by other adjustments. Mixing of the materials shall be continued until the
binder and water are evenly distributed through the mass and a uniform mixture of unchanging
appearance is obtained. In no case shall the period of mixing be less than thirty (30) seconds
from the time all materials are in the mixer. Sufficient mixing capacity shall be provided to
produce a minimum of 150 t of binder-stabilized mixture per hour. The Engineer reserves the
right to order the use of any proportioning or mixing equipment discontinued, where in the
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
125
 opinion of the Engineer it fails to produce a satisfactory mixture. Immediately prior to spreading
binder-stabilized base course material, the surface of the prepared support surface shall be
moistened and kept moist until covered by the mixture. Materials are transported from the
central mixing plant to the street by means of suitable vehicles, equipped with protective covers,
and deposited by employing approved spreading equipment. Dumping in piles on the support
surface shall not be permitted. The mixture shall be spread in one layer of uniform density and
of such thickness that after compacting, the finished hydraulic binder-stabilized base conforms
to the required grade and cross-section, the thicknesses being according to typical profiles. The
spreading progresses continuously without breaks and shall be organized so that not more than
thirty (30) minutes elapses between the time of placing the material in adjacent lanes at any
location.
After a part width section is completed, the longitudinal joint against which additional material is
to be placed shall be trimmed in a neat line parallel to the kerb, on a strip of 15 cm width, with a
vertical edge. Material cut away from the edge shall be spread uniformly over the adjacent
subgrade and compacted or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Engineer. Transverse
construction joints are treated in a similar manner.

311.06. Compaction
The mixture shall be transported, spread and compacted within an interval of two (2) hours after
the addition of water. Any stabilized materials with hydraulic binders, which is not compacted
and finished, shall not remain undisturbed for more than thirty (30) minutes. At the
start of compaction, moisture in the mixture shall be within two (2) percentage points of the
specified optimum moisture content.
Prior to the beginning of compaction, the mixture shall be in a loose condition for its full depth.
Compaction shall be carried out on the loose material until it has attained a uniform density
of >98% of the Maximum Design Density. Compaction may be obtained by steel wheel, grid or
pneumatic rollers, vibratory or sheepfoot packers or any other means approved by the
Engineer. Following initial compaction, the mixture shall be shaped to the required grade and
cross-section. Where necessary the surface shall then be scratched to remove compaction
planes which may have developed during compaction. Final compaction to the specified density
shall be done with steel wheel or pneumatic rollers, or vibratory packers. If the specified density
is not attained, the Contractor, at his own expense, shall complete one of the following
operations as instructed by the Engineer.
• Reprocess the same stabilized material within twenty-four (24) hours of the original
application of binder and water, with the addition of seventy-five (75) percent of the
original cement content.
• Reprocess the same stabilized material after the elapse of twenty-four (24) hours with
the addition of one hundred (100) percent of the original binder content.
• Remove the stabilized base course material and replace it with new approved material
processed in accordance with these Specifications.
• Complete the surfacing operation in two (2) lifts, applying a total average depth of 75
mm of asphaltic concrete.

311.07. Finishing
After final compaction, the surface shall be smooth and free from cracks, ridges and loose
material. Any ridges or undulations are removed by planing with a motor grader, and the

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

126
 resulting loose material removed from the area. The finishing and construction operations shall
be completed before six (6) hours has elapsed from the time of addition of water to the mix.
The surface of the compacted base course shall be kept moist until a curing seal has been
applied. Water shall be applied in a fine spray which does not segregate the binder from the
particles of materials.

311.08. Curing
A curing seal of emulsified asphalt shall be applied to the dampened surface at a temperature of
20ºC – 50ºC, and at a uniform rate of 2.5 litres per square Metre. The seal covers the full width
of the roadway and shall be allowed to cure thoroughly before the Engineer grants permission
to continue further works.

311.09. Maintenance
The Contractor shall, within the Limits of Contract, maintain the binder-stabilized base course in
good condition. Faulty areas are replaced for the full depth of the base course with fresh
stabilized material or concrete. Surface depressions are brought up to proper grade by patching
with asphaltic concrete prior to the application of the asphaltic surface course. Areas of
removed curing seal due to traffic or otherwise, shall be resealed immediately, at the
Contractor’s expense.
Measurements
The volume of work shall be measured in square meters.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.
Payment will be made under the item below:
Unit of
No. Item
Measure
Base course of mineral aggregates stabilized with
31101 Square Meter
cement or hydraulic binder, M60 h - 230 mm

4. BRIDGES AND OVERPASSES (NOT USED)

CHAPTER 400. VARIOUS

PREPARATORY WORKS, SITE INSTALLATION, ACCOMODATION OF TRAFFIC

Traffic Accommodation
During the entire construction period and independent of the weather, the traffic to be
accommodated permanent on all bridges.
Temporary roads, crossing the riverbed, to be constructed, are according the design drawings.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

127
 Construction of temporary bypass (furnished with a proof surface), level crossing of railroad,
barriers, appropriate railroad crossing, traffic signs for traffic diversion; incl maintenance of the
road diversion and its access ramps (kept dust-, snow- and icefree during the entire time of use)
and operation of barriers. Railroad crossing to be approved by the State Railway Corporation.

TECHNICAL SUPPORT
Working Drawings of the Bridges
The contractor shall provide working drawings according to the chosen construction system of
all bridges (e.g. but not limited to: topographic setting-out, geotechnical investigations,
reinforcement inc. steel-lists, pre-stress system, construction details) elaborated with CAD-
system and submitted as DXF-file to the client on CD-Rom and hard copy in 3 copies to the
Engineer for approval.
Structural analyses of the Bridges
Structural analyses for new construction parts of bridge, selected pre-stressed -system for pre-
cast beams (pre-stress forces and pre-stress-assignment), construction-stages, temporary
constructions and stability analyses. Corrections /amendments in 3 copies in English to the
Engineer on CD-Rom for approval.

Construction (Progress) Photographs (digital) of the Bridges

Coloured photographs showing the progress of the works shall be taken every month from
position to be selected by the Engineer. Prints of photographs shall not be less than 150 mm x
100 mm and shall be inscribed with the location, date when taken and a brief description or title.
The photographs shall be used for illustrating the monthly report.
On completion of the works, the digital photographs shall become the property of the Employer,
i.e. the Contractor shall hand over all photographs on CD.
As-built Drawings for Bridges
The Contractor shall prepare and submit as-built drawings for all bridges showing the executed
works and all subordinated elements and details (e.g. but not limited to topograhic data, levels,
reinforcement, construction details, landscaping, etc.) elaborated with CAD-system and
submitted as DXF-file to the Engineer on CD-Rom and 4 hard-copies each.

MISCELLANEOUS
Illumination of Roads and Bridges
Roads and Bridges to be illuminated by street lights where shown in the drawings. Foundation
or fixation is detailed shown in the drawings. Dia 75 mm PVC lining/sleeve pipes are embedded
in the bridge caps to allow thread cables.
Type of street light according to clients detailed instruction.

PILE LOAD TEST

For each Bridge the following pile tests to be executed, one for each bridge.
• Static Pile Tests according to EDIN 1054: 2000-2012 (chapter (8.4.2 / page 56 ff)
• Dynamic Pile Tests according to EDIN 1054: 2000-2012 (chapter (8.4.3 / page 58 ff)
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
128
 Not later than 30 days from the date of the letter of acceptance the Contractor shall submit to
the Engineer for approval details of his method and equipment for the pile loading test.

DYNAMIC AND STATIC LOAD TEST ON BRIDGES

All bridges have to be subjected a live load test in order to ascertain that actual distortions
under live load coincide with the distortion derived from respective calculations as part of the
structural analysis.
At least one month before completion of a bridge the Contractor has to submit the program of
testing to the Engineer for approval consisting in the different steps of live load application, the
respective location selected for measurement, the kind and accurateness of measurement and
the calculated results depending on applied load at these selected measurement points.
The live load test according to approved procedure shall be performed as soon as possible after
completion of each bridge, but at least before the provisional handing over.
The results of the live load test have to be compiled in a report containing the preparatory
calculations, the description of al live load applications with records of all consecutive
measurement data and respective interpretation.
Payment will be made as lump sum for the successful performed live load test separate for
each bridge.

CHAPTER 401. REMOVAL OF EXISTING STRUCTURE

401.01. Introduction
Works covered in this chapter cover the various types of demolition required in the execution of
bridge works and include the following:
• Demolition of reinforced concrete parapets;
• Dismantling of metal pedestrian parapets;
• Dismantling of reinforced concrete walkways;
• Removal and disposal of existing asphalt layer on bridges;
• Removal and disposal of existing pavement on the approaches to bridges;
• Demolition of the protection layer, the waterproofing, and the leveling layer on bridge
decks;
• Dismantling of PC reinforced concrete deck slabs;
• Demolition of reinforced concrete in infrastructure and deck elements;
• Demolition of the deteriorated elements of the reinforced concrete slope and channel
protection;
• Demolition of reinforced concrete at deck beam joints;
• Demolition of deteriorated reinforced concrete stairs on bridge abutment slopes;
• Removal of metal expansion joint elements;
• Cleaning the collar beams at piers and abutment of waste.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

129
 401.02. Equipment
The following equipment will likely be required for works under this chapter:
• Crane for removal of bridge deck slabs length 6.0 m.; weight 5 tons;
• Crane for removal of walkway elements; weight 2 tons;
• Oxyacetylene cutting equipment;
• Compressor(s) with tools for demolition of concrete and of asphalt surfacing;

401.03. Dismantling and demolition of elements

Dismantling and demolition of the various bridge elements must be executed so as not to
deteriorate the structure of the concrete and waterproofing left in the remaining structure, and
not to damage the existing reinforcement.
The waste material from demolition shall be transported and disposed of in accordance with the
requirements of this specification and in accordance with the regulations of the local authorities.
Complete prefabricated elements arising from the demolition and dismantling which are
considered to have further utility shall be identified by the Engineer and transported by the
Contractor to the Employer’s designated storage compound.

401.04. Works Acceptance

The works will be accepted in accordance with the provisions of chapter 001 provided they are
in accordance with this Specification, Design type 3.503.1-81, SNiP 3.06.04-91,
VSN 32-81 and are to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Measurement.
The various works of dismantling and demolition will generally be measured in cubic Metres of
items dismantled and demolished. This volumetric measurement shall be strictly net. If
appropriate, agreement may be reached with the Engineer on a case by case basis to measure
the quantity of demolished material on a tonnage basis and then use typical densities to
transform this measurement to cubic Metre for payment purposes.
Metal parapets dismantled and scrapped as unusable shall be measured in linear Metres of
parapet prior to demolition.
Demolition of metal expansion joint elements shall be measured in the linear Metre.
Asphalt pavement to bridge decks shall be measured in square Metres.
Cleaning of collar beams and pier heads shall be measured as a single item payable as a sum
for each structure where cleaning is required.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

130
 CHAPTER 402. REPAIRS TO ABUTMENT EARTHWORKS
402.01. Introduction
The work in this chapter includes providing backfill to gaps behind abutments and wingwalls and
reinstating the correct shape of the conical and semiconical slopes at open abutments using
selected, granular, approved free draining soil.
Additionally works include the reshaping of washed out stream and waterway banks by
excavation and by placing and compacting fill of normal soil.
These works include excavation of soil, transporting, stockpiling, unloading, spreading, grading,
compaction and finishing works. The width of the fill of draining material behind the abutment
will be calculated according to the SNiP 3.06.04-91.

402.02. Materials
The free draining granular soil, used for the works of this chapter shall have a filtration
coefficient not less than 2.00 m in 24 hours and must comply with Technical Report, SNiP
3.06.04-91. The filtration coefficient will be determined according to SM GOST 25584-90.
Washed out stream and river banks will be reinstated using normal soil of sandy clay.

402.03. General requirements

The free draining and normal material for fill may only be used after the quality of the material
has been tested and verified according to the Technical Specification and approved by the
Engineer.
The requirements for the fill and the testing methods are indicated in the SNiP 3.06.04-91. The
soil will be spread in layers of 10-15 cm thickness and compacted by rammers or vibrating plate
compactors and by hand where mechanical compaction is not possible at the optimum moisture
content.
The coefficient of compaction of the soil up to 98% of proctor density. The moisture content and
the properties of the soil shall be determined according to the Sub-Clause 201.11. For repairs to
sloping surfaces, benches shall be cut in the existing surfaces.

402.04. Works acceptance

Acceptance of the work will be in accordance with chapter 002.04. Work shall comply with SNIP
3.06.04-91, technical specifications and be approved by the Engineer.
Measurement
The work executed under this chapter shall be measured as the cubic Metres of compacted soil
placed under the appropriate location in one of the three fill items below. Excavation in river
beds shall be measured in cubic Metres of material excavated and removed.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

131
 CHAPTER 403. CONSTRUCTION OF BRIDGE SUBSTRUCTURE
(FOUNDATION, PIER AND ABUTMENT)
403.01. Introduction
This work includes the construction of foundation piers and abutments of cast-in-situ reinforced
concrete on an earth foundation for the widening of the existing bridges. The foundation piers
and abutments shall be constructed in compliance with the design as approved by the Engineer.

403.02. Materials
The materials and the precast units for the works under this chapter must be compliant with the
following requirements:

Design, SM GOST 26633-91 and

Concrete mixture and components
SNiP 3.06.04-91
Crushed stone used for the pad under the piers and
SM GOST 8267-93
abutments foundation
Reinforcing bars and built-in elements Design and SM GOST 5781-82
Bituminous Primer for waterproofing VSN 32-81
Bituminous Mastic for waterproofing VSN 32-81

403.03. General requirements

The pier construction woks should be performed in compliance with the requirements of SNiP
3.06.04-91.

403.04. Equipment
The following equipment should be provided:
• Crane for mounting and dismantling of the formworks, for installation or reinforcing grids
and for concrete supply by a bucket;
• Excavator for excavation of foundation pits;
• Welding machine for welding works;
• Vibrator for compaction of the concrete, cast into a structure;
• Pump for water pumping from a pit.

403.05. Excavating for the pier foundations and backfilling

The works should be performed in compliance with the requirements set out in Chapter 203.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

132
 403.06. Formworks
Formworks should be carried out in compliance with the requirements of SNiP 3.06.04-91.

403.07. Reinforcing Works

The reinforcing works should be carried out in compliance with SNiP 3.06.04-91. It is not
allowed to use reinforcing bars without a certificate of the manufacturing plant. The replacement
of the class, type and diaMetre of the reinforcing bars specified by the Design must be agreed
with the Engineer. The reinforcing bars and the built-in elements, used in a structure, must be
clean of rust, dirt, dust and oil strains.
The bars, which are not welded, must be connected by overlapping according to the Design.
The connection of reinforcing bars and of built-in elements by welding must be performed
according to the Design and in compliance with the requirements of SM GOST 14098-95.

403.08. Concrete Works

Preparation, transportation and casting of concrete, as well as concrete curing during its
hardening in the structure, must be performed in compliance with Specifications, SM GOST
26633-91 and SNiP 3.06.04-91.
The concrete mix, which lost its workability by the moment of casting, cannot be used in the
structure supposed for concrete casting. It is prohibited to restore the workability of a mix by
adding water in situ. The minor defects found after removal of the formworks should be
removed using cement-and-sand mortar in accordance with Chapter 417.

403.09. Waterproofing
Waterproofing should be carried out in compliance with SNiP 3.04.03-85 and VSN 32-81. The
pier surfaces, buried in the ground, must be waterproofed by coating in two layers.
Waterproofing should be performed on a primed concrete surface. The surface to be
waterproofed must be dry and clean of oils, dirt and dust. Waterproofing Works should be
carried out at an outdoor temperature above plus 5°С.

403.010. Work acceptance

The acceptance of the works under this chapter shall be in compliance with chapter
002 provided the works are performed in compliance with the Design, SNiP 3.06.04-91,
VSN 32-81 and Specifications, being approved by the Engineer.
Measurement
The works under this chapter shall be measured in cubical Metres of R/C used.
Payment
The accepted volume, measured as described above, shall be payable according to unit rates
specified in the Contract, contained in the bid. This payment represents the full amount of
remuneration for the works performed under this chapter.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

133
 CHAPTER 404. CONSTRUCTION OF BRIDGE SUPERSTRUCTURE
404.01. Introduction
The works described in this chapter cover the provision of bridge precast reinforced concrete
beams and slabs, of various lengths at new bridges and replacement of deteriorated reinforced
concrete slabs and beamsat existing bridges. The works consist of manufacturing, transporting,
and handling, execution of the bearing parts, and transversal slabs jointing. The work of
demolishing bridge elements and dismantling of the existing reinforced concrete slab decks do
not form part of this chapter and are included in chapter 401. The work of waterproofing new
bridge deck and repaired bridge deck is covered in chapter 408.

404.02. Materials
All materials and pre-cast elements used for the works of this chapter must comply with:

404.03. Equipment
The following equipment will be required:
• Crane for the mounting of deck slabs, weight to 3 tons;
• Welding equipment for welding works;
• Vibrators for compaction of the concrete cast-in-situ;
• Concrete mixer with pumps.

404.04. Mounting the deck slabs

Execution of the pre-cast reinforced concrete slabs, acceptance of the executed items, and their
transporting and erection are to be carried out in compliance with the requirements of the
Technical Report and SNiP 3.06.04-91. The slabs for the superstructure are to be mounted on a
bearing platform, consisting of a layer of sand cement mortar 2-3 cm in thickness placed on top
of bituminous felt layer, Slabs shall be placed while the mortar is still soft. Slabs jointing has to
be done in compliance with the Technical Report.

404.05. Concrete casting and curing of construction joints

Concrete casting and curing at the joints will be done as described in the Clause 402.08.
404.06. Piling
General
Piling shall conform in all respects with the principles contained in standard SNiP
2.02.03-85.
In addition to submitting the records required, the Contractor shall report immediately to the
Engineer any circumstance which indicates that the ground conditions differ from those
expected by the Contractor from his interpretation of the soil survey so as to affect materially the
bearing capacity of the pile.
Maximum permitted tolerances are:
- Position 75 mm in either direction at cut-off level

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

134
 - Verticality 1 in 75 deviation from vertical
- Rake 1 in 25 deviation from specified rake
Where piles have not been positioned within the limits described in the Contract, no method of
forcible correction will be permitted.
Pile load test ref to chapter 400 “VARIOUS”.

404.07. Precast Concrete Piles

General
The manufacture, storage, handling and lengthening of reinforced concrete and pre-stressed
concrete piles shall comply in all respects with Series 1400-1700 of this Specification, with the
following amplifications:
Piles shall be supported, handled and pitched, as described in the Contract.
Where piles have to be stored, they shall be placed on sufficient supports on firm ground to
avoid damage by excessive bending.
Each pile shall be marked indelibly to show its identification Pieces, length and date of casting.
Pre-stressed concrete piles shall be marked with the pre-stressed force applied.
Driving
Piles shall not be driven until at least 28 days after casting unless agreed by the Engineer. The
Engineer shall be notified 24 hours before the commencement of driving. Piles shall be driven to
the set or depth and in the sequence of driving approved by the Engineer. The set shall be
taken in the presence of the Engineer or his Representative unless permission to the contrary
has been obtained in writing.
Lengthening of Piles
Unless another method is approved by the Engineer, the main or splicing reinforcement shall be
stripped of concrete for a distance of 40 times its diaMetre and additional reinforcement
securely tied in position. Alternatively, subject to the Engineers approval, the reinforcement may
be exposed for a minimum distance of 300 mm and additional reinforcement butt welded in
position.
Driving shall not be resumed until:
• the cube strength of the concrete in the extension is at least equal to the specified 28
day cube strength of the concrete in the pile and
• the approval of the Engineer has been obtained.

Removal of Surplus Length

Any length of pile surplus to that required for incorporation in the substructure shall be cut off
and removed.
Risen Piles
Piles which have risen as a result of driving adjacent piles shall be re-driven to the requirements
of the Engineer.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

135
 404.08. Works acceptance
Acceptance of the works of this chapter shall be in compliance with chapter 001 provided the
works have been executed in accordance with the requirements of SNiP 3.06.04-91 and the
Specifications and are approved by the Engineer.
Measurement
The works for constructing new bridge decks and replacing slabs of existing bridge decks will be
measured as the total cubic Metres of precast reinforced concrete and of cast-in situ concrete
required to be placed in the works. The work of actually placing the new slabs in position will be
measured by the Pieces of slabs placed.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter and shall be the full payment due in respect of all works
required to provide the new bridge deck elements in place, mounted and jointed.

CHAPTER 405. BRIDGE APPROACH SLABS

405.01. Inroduction
The work in this chapter covers the execution of approach slabs to new bridges and to existing
bridges where there are no slabs and the repair/replacement of damaged or incorrect approach
slabs for spans greater than 10 Metres. Works will be carried out on the basis of the Project,
Technical Reports and the Design type 3.503-41 and include the demolition and removal of
existing slabs, provision of crushed stone bed, the provision and placement of new approach
slab.
405.02. Materials
Materials, precast units and elements for the works of this chapter must comply with the
following requirements:
Technical Report, SM GOST 26633-91,
Concrete and components
SNiP 3.06.04-91
Crushed stone for the foundation bed of the
SM GOST 8267-93
abutment wing wall
Reinforcement Project-tip 3.503-41
Bitument treatment for waterproofing VSN 32-81
Bitumunous mastic for waterproofing VSN 32-81
Reinforced concrete approach slab Technical Report
Approved Backfill SM GOST 23735-79 and Chapter 406

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

136
 405.03. General requirements
The works in this chapter will not be executed until completion of any works required under the
provision of chapter 402. Execution and repair works to bridge approach slabs shall be carried
out in compliance with SNiP 3.06.04-91 and Design type 3.503-41.

405.04. Equipment
The following equipment will be required:
• Concrete mixer with pumps for concrete curing;
• Vibrators for compaction of the concrete cast-in-situ.

405.05. Crushed stone bed for backfill

The bed will be executed of graded crushed stone to achieve an interlock according to SNiP
3.06.03-85.

405.06. NOT USED

405.07. Casting and curing of concrete at the approach slab

Casting and curing of concrete at the approach slab shall be in compliance with Sub-Clause
403.08.

405.08. Waterproofing
The surface of the approach slabs must be waterproofed. The works must be executed as
described in the Clause 403.09.

405.09. Works acceptance

The acceptance and repair works of the approach to the bridge shall be in accordance with the
requirements of chapter 002. The works shall comply with the Technical Specification, Design
type 3.503-41, SNiP 3.06.04-91 and SNiP 3.09.01-85.
Measurements
The Works under this chapter shall be measured for payment only as the square Metres of
approach slab affected, measured on the surface of the approach slabs. No separate payment
shall be made for the works of excavation and backfilling but the work of replacing road
pavement shall be paid under the appropriate items of Chapter 3 based on the area derived by
multiplying the road pavement width by a length equal to the distance from the rear of the
abutment wall to the back face of the bearing beam plus the depth from the underside of the
crushed stone pad to the finished road level.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
137
 CHAPTER 406. Concrete safety parapet
NOT USED.

CHAPTER 407. EXPANSION JOINTS

407.01. Introduction
The present works consist of the replacement of the damaged elements of the expansion joints
using new elements for the existing bridges without any expansion joints and for the newly
executed bridges. For bridge decks with length up to 12 m joints will be executed according to
drawings. Joints will be executed using an approved proprietary expansion joint, appropriate to
the size of deck and incorporating a waterproof

407.02. Materials
The materials of the joint structure shall meet the following requirements:
(i) expansion profile
• elastomere (polymer SBR/BR)
• shore hardness A 58 ± 5 SHE
• tensile strength min. 14 N/mm²
• elongation at break min 400%
• ageing resistance (7 days at 70°C)
hardness + 8 SHE
tensile strength ± 15 %
elongation ± 25 %
• ozone resistance
0.5 pphm/48 h “0“, no visible cracks
• compression deformation
72 h/20°C max. 20 %
22 h/70°C max. 25 %
(ii) steel elements
• clamping profile fy = 360 N/mm²
• bolts high tensile
• anchors to concrete fy = 460 N/mm²
• corrosion protection 80 μm hot-dip galvanised, 2x80 μm iron-
oxide/epoxy-resin coats

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

138
 407.03. General Requirements
For the existing bridges and overpasses, in the new expansion joints area, the pavement of the
carriageway will be taken out, to expose the surface of spans and abutment end walls.
Joints shall be installed in compliance with the Manufacturer’s Specifications / instructions and
drawings. Expansion joints shall be assembled and fitted only when air temperatures are above
+50°C.

407.04. Modular Expansion Joint Specifications:

1) The Expansion Joints shall be of the modular type, consisting of load-carrying steel
edge beams integrated into the adjacent structural elements, centre beams (in case
the movement exceeds 80 mm) and one (movement ≤ 80 mm) or several (movement
>80 mm) elastomeric sealing elements. and hot-zinc galvanised as protection against
corrosion
2) The Expansion Joint shall be designed to accommodate the movement and rotation
demands given hereafter.
3) The Expansion Joint shall be absolutely watertight. All elements below the bridge deck
surface have to be protected against humidity percolating from the surface of the
bridge.
4) All metallic parts of the Expansion Joint shall be made of hot-rolled steel. To achieve
the required precision, the centre- and edge- beams shall be made of two steel
elements which are connected by longitudinal submerged arc-welding process,
executed by an automated welding procedure. No extruded steel beams shall be
allowed.
5) No transverse butt welds of the steel beams in the roadway area shall be allowed –
except for connecting welds in case of lane-by lane installation.
6) The Expansion Joint shall be delivered to the site as one single unit. No assembly
works (apart from a longitudinal joint extension due to transport length limitations or
lane-by-lane installations sequences) are allowed on site.
7) It must be possible to exchange the strip seals up to minimum gap opening of
30 mm. This must be proven by a demonstration to the client.
8) The strip seals must be able to adjust automatically gap openings up to 120 mm and
then still fulfill their functionality (i.e. not get torn out of the steel sections but maintain
the watertight connection of two steel beams).
9) Vehicle wheels shall not contact the sealing elements.
10) The strip seal shall be connected to the steel beams by a positive and a non-positive
interlocking system. It shall not be fixed with screws, bolts, glue or other additional
fixation devices.
11) The strip seal shall not be designed to transfer any loads (horizontal or vertical).
12) The motion control system shall consist of series of only compression loaded urethane
elements. The minimum control force shall be developed when the joint is completely
closed, the maximum control force shall be developed when the joint is completely
opened. A progressive force-increase has to be guaranteed.
13) For swivel joist joints:

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

139
 14) A motion control system based on springs is not allowed. The motion control has to be
done by a kinematic system with a sufficient resilience to compensate temperature
expansion as well as manufacturing and installation tolerances. The joint has to
accommodate the specified movements in all directions independently.
15) The Expansion Joint is an integral element of the structure, i.e. anchor elements to be
welded to the edge beams of the Expansion Joint and properly embedded into the
concrete or welded to the steel superstructure. Subsequent bolting is not allowed.
16) The connection between centre beams and support bars shall be realised with full-
penetration welding, no fillet welding or screwed connections shall be allowed.
17) All fatigue-critical connections (e.g. centre beams – support bar) have to be tested by
an independent laboratory, experienced with the execution of dynamic testing. A
minimum service life of 40 years has to be shown by fatigue testing.
18) The Expansion Joint manufacturer has to show a minimum experience of 10 years in
supplying Expansion joints of similar movement range.

407.05. Installation
The Expansion Joint shall be installed in the recesses of the deck slab and abutment/backwall.
The anchors (loops) of the joint structure are to be connected with the reinforcement of the
structure by stirrups or hooks and longitudinal bars passing through the loops of the anchors.
The gap between both sides of the joint structure is to be fixed dependent on the actual
temperature of the superstructure in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
The recesses have to be filled with well compacted concrete after alignment.

407.06. Works acceptance

The repairing of the expansion joints for the existing bridges and the construction of the
expansion joints for the new bridges will be accepted on the basis of chapter 001 provided they
are in accordance to the project requirements, technical specifications and are approved by the
Engineer.
Measurements
The works for the construction and repair of expansion joints will be measured in linear Metres,
along the joint for each of the three item descriptions given below. This measurement shall be
the only measurement for works under this chapter and shall include for all operations
necessary to provide the completed expansion joints in place inlcuding the proper reinstatment
of the pavement, if applicable.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

140
 CHAPTER 408. WATERPROOFING
408.01. Introduction
The works under this chapter include the replacement of the waterproofing to the carriageway
and walkways of existing bridge decks and the waterproofing of the decks on new bridges. The
works of waterproofing on existing bridges includes the application of a regulating layer of
concrete 30 mm thickness, the waterproofing layer of 8 mm thickness and a protection layer of
asphalt mastic of 40 mm thickness. During the replacement of waterproofing works on existing
bridges it will be necessary to remove the existing protection layer waterproof membrane and
regulating layer, . The reinstatement of the asphalt pavement over these works is not included
în execution work of waterproofing and is payable under the appropriate items of Chapter 305.
The works of this chapter also include waterproofing works on the reinforced concrete walkways
of bridge decks.
The works of this chapter also include waterproofing works to buried infrastructure elements.
These consist of two layers of bituminous mastic being applied by brush in compliance with
VSN 31-82.
408.02. Materials
The materials used in waterproofing shall be in accordance with the following requirements

Treatment with bituminous mastic VSN 32-81

Bituminous mastic VSN 32-81
Rolls of reinforced waterproofing VSN 32-81and manufacturer’s
membrane, 6 mm thick specifications
Concrete for the levelling and asphalt Technical Specification, Proiect-tip course
mastic protection course 40mm 3.503.1 - 101
SM STB 1033-2008, Chapter 305 of these
SMA 50mm
specifications

408.03. General requirements

The levelling course, waterproofing and the protection layer shall be executed in accordance
with the project drawings, Design type 3.503.1 – 101, VSN 32-81, and SNiP 3.06.04 – 91.
The existing levelling course on the carriageway will be taken out down to the structural deck
level.
The waterproofing will be carried out on the smooth, clean, dry surface of the levelling course.
The waterproofing will be done only after the expansion joint elements have been installed.
The waterproofing membrane will be laid on the leveling course of the deck, adhesion will be
achieved by flame heating, Waterproofing materials will be overlapped by at least 10 cm at all
joints, laps will be arranged to lie in the direction of drainage flow; Any overlap for a subsequent
layer will be offset at least 30 cm. from the preceding lap. The waterproofing shall to be smooth,
continuous, without signs of swelling or bubbling on the surface and shall be firmly adherent
throughout. The asphalt mastic protecting course must be laid immediately after waterproofing.
Waterproofing works must be carried out only when air and concrete deck temperatures are
higher than 5°C. The waterproofing will be covered with a 40 mm asphalt mastic protection layer
followed by a layer of SMA, as specified in chapter 412.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

141
 Waterproofing to the faces of buried elements of the abutments and wingwalls shall be made in
accordance with the requirements of VSN 32-81 using and approved bituminous mastic applied
by brush in at least two coats. Such waterproofing shall be fully dry before being buried.

408.04. Works acceptance

Waterproofing to new and existing structures will be accepted according to chapter 001
provided it is in accordance with project requirements and Technical Specification and is
approved by the Engineer.
Measurement
Waterproofing will be measured in square metres of surface waterproofed under the four
different classes of waterproofing itemised below.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.
CHAPTER 409. SAFETY BARRIERS
409.01. Introduction
The works under this chapter include the provision and erection of metal safety barriers for the
safety of vehicular traffic on bridges and on the approach to bridges. Barriers, posts and fittings
shall be hot dip galvanised.
The removal of the old parapeţs on bridges and embankments are included in chapter 416.

409.02. Materials
Materials and prefabricated units used for the works of this chapter have to be in accordance
with:

Concrete for foundations Project Drawings, SM GOST 26633-91 and

SNIP 3.06.04-91, this specification
Metal safety barriers Project Drawings, SM GOST 26804-86
Paint SM GOST 26804-86 and SNiP 3.04.03-85,
SNiP 2.03.11-85

409.03. Working requirements

Execution of the works of metal safety barriers on emabankment shall be in accordance with the
requirements of chapter 601 but with reference to the bridge drawings.
Execution of the works of metal safety barriers on structures shall generally conform to the
requirements of chapter 601 except that the details of the structures shall conform to the
appropriate project drawings and the erection shall be by bolting down to the deck. Two variants
are foreseen: one variant with a short post mounted on an existing concrete stub footing and
one variant with a longer post mounted directly to the deck. These variants are shown in the
Drawings.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

142
 Galvanising of all elements shall conform to the requirements of chapter 601.

409.04. Works acceptance

The works will be accepted under chapter 001 provided they are in accordance with the
Drawings, SM GOST 26804-86 and these Specifications and are approved by the Engineer.
Measurement and Payment
The provision and installation of metal safety parapets shall be measured in Metres of each type
of parapet installed measured along the face of the rail.
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

CHAPTER 410. SURFACE WATER DISPOSAL

410.01. Introduction
This category of works includes the construction of water disposal chutes, located on the
slopes, of embankments, and the repair of drainage gullies and outlets in bridge decks. The
chutes will be constructed according to the project design Design type 503-09-7.84. Chutes are
made using cast-in-place reinforced concrete and stones. Note that the repair of chutes is
covered in chapter 502.
Repair of drainage gullies in bridge decks will require the provision of cast iron gratings to gully
entries where these are missing and repair works to the extremities beneath the bridge decks
requiring the extension of the outlet pipe to a point below the lowest part of the adjacent deck
structure. Extension shall be by means of plastic pipe. Where the existing extremity is of
sufficient length the extension pipe shall be clamped in place. Where the remaining extremity is
too short for this option alternative means of attachment shall be found; use of an epoxy
adhesive is foreseen in these circumstances. Such repairs shall conform to Design type
3.503.1-81.

410.02. Materials
The materials and the precast reinforced concrete units used must be in accordance with the
technical specification and the Design type 503-09-7.84. The grid used on the outlets must
comply with this specification and the Design type 3.503.1-81. The metal must be painted in
accordance with SNiP 2.03.11-85 and SNiP 3.04.03-85.

410.03. General Requirements

Any earthworks required in the repair of chutes will be executed according to Chapter 203. The
foundation for chutes must be strictly parallel to the designed surface of the embankment and
chutes.
Any parts of the PC chute units, which are in a contact with the soil, must be treated with
a layer of bitumen according to SNiP 3.06.03-85.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
143
 The provision of metal grilles to bridge deck gully inlets shall include all necessary works,
including reseating the surround frame if necessary, to provide a well fitting grille parallel with
the finished surface of the bridge deck and set 20 mm below the level of the final asphalt
surface (tolerance +/-5 mm).
The work on gully inlets shall be coordinated with any deck waterproofing work to ensure that
neither item of work disrupts/damages the other.

410.04. Precast reinforced concrete units

Pre cast concrete chute units will preferably be supplied from a precast factory equipped for the
production of such units. If units are precast on site the concrete works shall be in accordance
with Chapter 504 and reinforcement will be in accordance withSM GOST 23279-85 and SM
GOST 5781-82. The detail design of any chutes, whether cast on site or provided from a
precast factory shall be subject to the review and approval of the Engineer.

410.05. Concrete works

All in situ concrete works will be executed in compliance with the provisions of Chapter 504.

410.06. Works acceptance

Works under this chapter will be accepted on the basis of compliance with the drawings of the
Design type 503.09-7.84 and relevant specifications and their acceptance by the Engineer.
Measurement
The construction of chutes will be measured in linear Metres along the centre line of the chute.
Repair works to gullies in bridge decks will be measured in units repaired with inlets (metal
grilles) and outlets (extension pipes) measured separately.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

CHAPTER 411. ACCESS STAIRS ON SLOPES

411.01. Introduction
The works under this chapter comprise the construction of access stairs on the earthworks
slopes at the approaches to the bridges and the repair works of existing stairs. Repair works
consist in casting concrete in the deteriorated gaps and mounting of metal safety rails for
pedestrians.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

144
 411.02. Materials
The materials, precast units and prefabricated items for use in this work shall be in accordance

Crushed stone for the bed underneath the stairs SM GOST 8267-93
Project Design, SM GOST 26633-91
Concrete and components
SNiP 3.06.04-91
Reinforcing bars and build-in elements Project Design, SM GOST 5781-82
Metallic handrails for the stairs Project Design

The materials used for reinforced concrete stairs shall comply with the requirements of chapter
402.
The handrails and all fixings and fittings shall be hot dip galvanised after fabrication in
accordance with the standards for guardrails.
The paints used shall comply with the requirements of SNiP 2.03.11-85 and design drawings
3.04.03-85.

411.03. General conditions

The construction of the stairs will be made after the earthworks on the approaches are
completed. For the construction of the stairs precast units will be used. The units shall be
fabricated in accordance with the requirements of chapter 504 to a detail design in accordance
with the project drawings and approved by the Engineer. Any in situ concrete requied for the
positioning and fixing of the PC stair units shall be in accordance with the requirements of
chapter 504.
The required eathworks for the stairs will be in accordance with chapter 203.

411.04. Works acceptance

Acceptance of the works will be on the basis of chapters 001. Works shall be in compliance with
Technical Specification, the drawings, SNIP 3.06.04-91, Design type 3.501.1-156, and shall
have the approval of the Engineer.
Measurement
The execution of access stairs and repair works will be measured in linear Metres along the
slope stairs, starting at the top and finishing at the bottom of the embankment.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

145
 CHAPTER 412. EMBANKMENT SLOPE PROTECTION
412.01. Introduction
The works under this chapter include the provision of hard protection to semicone slopes and
approach embankment slopes, the repair of existing protection of this nature and the provision
of protection to the river bed beneath bridges.

412.02. Materials
The materials used for these works must comply with the following requirements:

Concrete and components SM GOST 26633-91**, SNIP 3.06.04-91 and Chapter 504
Reinforcement SM GOST 5781-82*****
Crushed stone SM GOST 8267-93***
Stone of 25 cm size SM GOST 8267-93***

412.03. General requirements

Protection works shall be executed in accordance with project Design type 3.503.1-156. The
protection must be executed on a smooth and compacted surface, which has been divided into
strips according to the Design type 3.503.1-156.
Reinforcing works must be executed in compliance with the requirements of SNiP
3.06.04-91.
All concrete protection shall be reinforced with a single layer of 200x200mm mesh of 6 mm
diaMetre wires complying with SM GOST 5781-82.
Any filling required to make good cone surfaces and embankment slopes prior to applying
protection shall be executed in accordance with the requirements of chapter 402.
The demolition, removal and cleaning work required to prepare damaged or deteriorated
protection for repair with reinforced concrete, are included in chapter 401.

412.04. Protection of the conical surfaces at bridge abutments

The protection of conical surfaces will be executed of reinforced concrete cast-in-situ of 8 cm
thickness on a layer of crushed stone of 10 cm thickness.

412.05. Protection to embankment slopes at bridge approaches

The protection of embankment slopes adjacent to the abutment will be formed using
a 12 cm. Thickness of concrete cast-in-situ with 12 cm thickness over a layer of crushed stone
10 cm. in thickness. The protection of the embankment slopes of the approaches will carry out
for a length not less than 1.00 m.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

146
 412.06. Protection to river beds beneath bridges
The protection of river beds beneath bridges will comprise a layer of boulder rock of 50 cm
thickness over a layer of crushed stone of 10 cm thickness and will be carried out in conformity
with the project Design type 3.501.1-156.

412.07. Works acceptance

Acceptance of the works will be on the basis of chapters 001. Works shall be in compliance with
Technical Specification, the drawings, SNIP 3.06.04-91, Design type 3.501.1-156, and shall
have the approval of the Engineer.
Measurement
The slope protection and repair works with reinforced concrete cast-in-situ and the river bed
protection with boulder rock will be measured in square Metres of the protected or repaired
surface.
The work of filling and making good the cone slopes with free draining material will be accepted
and measured in accordance with chapter 402.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

CHAPTER 413. ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT

413.01. Description
The works in this chapter cover the application of SMA 50mm surfacing to the completed bridge
deck between bridge walkways (on roadway) and as protection to the shoulders on the
approaches.
The work of demolishing and removing asphalt pavement on bridge decks is covered in chapter
401.

413.02. Materials
The materials for use in the works of this chapter shall conform to the following requirements:

SMA 50 mm Chapter 305 and SM STB 1033-2008

Asphalt mastic protection layer 40 mm
Crushed stone at the shoulders surface SNiP 2.05.02-85, SM GOST 8267-93

413.03. Carriageways and walkways

After completion of all waterproofing and waterproofing protection and of all works to bridge
deck gullies, carriageways on bridges will be covered with 50 mm of Stone Mastic Asphalt
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
147
 (SMA). Laying will be in accordance with the requirements of chapter 308 for machine laid
asphalt. Asphalt to walkways will be laid in compliance with the requirements of chapter 307.
Asphalt mastic sealing protection layer will be laid by hand.

413.04. Shoulders
Where indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer, shoulders to bridge embankment
approaches shall be protected with a 50 mm layer of asphalt on a base of crushed stone of 100
mm thickness. Base and asphalt to shoulders shall be in compliance with the requirements of
chapters 303, 305 and 307. Asphalt protection to shoulders shall be laid after the execution of
the safety guardrails and the drainage chutes.

413.05. Work acceptance

Acceptance of the works of asphalt to bridge decks and walkways and shoulder protection will
be under chapter 001. The works shall be in accordance with SNiP 3.06.03-85, the Drawings
and Specification and shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Measurement
The pavement works on the carriageway, existing walkways and the shoulder protection works
shall be measured in square Metres of the finished surfacing laid of the specified thickness or in
tons of asphalt used. The measurement of the shoulder protection shall include within this
asphalt measurement the provision of crushed stone base layer and any excavation and
disposal of material required to perform the works of shoulder protection.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

CHAPTER 414. PEDESTRIAN BRIDGE RAILING

414.01. Introduction
The works consist of the provision of new metal pedestrian safety railing, the repair of existing
railing and cleaning and painting of all the railings.

414.02. Materials
The materials and elements shall comply with the following requirements:

Technical Specification,
Standard sections of metal pedestrian railing
Design type 3.503.1-81
SNiP 2.03.11-85, SniP 3.04.03-85,
Paints
CPE 04.03-2005 SM GOST 9.032-74

414.03. General Requirements

Metal pedestrian safety railings shall meet the requirements of the Design tip 3.503.1-81 or
according to drawings. The bent and damaged elements of the existing railings shall be
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
148
 straightened, revelded where necessary and reused, those elements which are too badly rusted
to permit repair shall be replaced by new ones. The work of repair shall include all necessary
dismantling and re-erection of railing elements.
Painting of railing shall to be executed according to the SNiP 3.04.03-85, CPE 04.03-2005 and
SNiP 3.06.04-91. Before painting, all old paint, rust, grease and oil and any other contaminants
shall be removed and the railing elements cleaned to bright metal. Immediately after cleaning,
the railing elements shall be given a full coat of zinc rich, epoxy based, cold galvanizing
compound followed by two coats of calcium plumbate primer.
Two coats of paint will be applied: prime coat (0.1-0.15 l/m2);final coat (0.15-0.20 l/m2). Welded
parts are to be painted with zink paint.
The undercoat and balance of the approved paint system shall follow within one week of the
primer. The color and quality of the paints to be applied shall be approved by the Engineer.

414.04. Work Acceptance

Acceptance of the works of pedestrian railings to bridge walkways will be under chapter 001.
The works shall be in accordance with Design tip 3.503.1-81 or final design and shall be to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Measurement
The works related is the provide assembly and including anchoring and repair of the pedestrian
railings are measured in linear Metres, on the total length of parapet provided, repaired and
painted.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

CHAPTER 415. BRIDGE BEARINGS

415.01. Introduction
The works of this chapter include the provision of bearing pads of reinforced rubber to new
bridge decks and existing bridge decks where no bearings currently exist. The works include the
necessary temporary works to enable jacking of bridge decks to allow preparation of seating,
repair of concrete and insertion of rubber bearings.
The works also include the cleaning and painting of existing steel bearings.

415.02. Materials
The materials used for the works described in this chapter shall be in accordance with the
following requirements:

SM GOST 9.032-74, SNiP 2.03.11-85,

Priming and painting
SNiP 3.04.03-85, CPE 04.03-2005
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
149
 Reinforced rubber bearings pads VSN 86-83
Concrete with polymer SNiP 3.06.04-91
Reinforcement SM GOST 5781-82
Cement Mortar SM GOST 28013-89

415.03. Equipment
The following items of equipment are likely to be required:
• Jacking capacity adequate to lift the estimated superstructure weight with a factor of
safety of 1.3 (See Special Specifications for bridge details)
• Temporary works for installing and controlling jacking, providing support and load
distribution
• Grit blasting equipment for rust cleaning surfaces of steel rocker bearings
• Autocrane for assembly and dismantling of the temporary works.

415.04. Lifting bridge decks for mounting of rubber bearings

The handling of bridge decks during rubber bearing installation must be done in accordance
with VSN 86-83 and SNiP 3.06.04-91. The temporary works must be in accordance with the
SNiP III-18-75 and SNiP 3.06.04-91. The jacking arrangements shall be such as to ensure that
the whole of the span is lifted uniformly with no distortion or applied stresses from the lifting
operation. Lifting of the span at one end only is not permissible.
Bridge decks shall not be lowered onto the new bearings until at least 7 days after all concrete
and mortar works in the vicinity of the bearing pads have been completed.

415.05. Bearing painting

Steel bearings with substantial areas of exposed steel work require be cleaning and painting.
The steel elements of such bearings shall be sand or grit blasted to bright metal. Care shall be
taken during the cleaning operation that no damage is caused to reinforced concrete elements
of the bearings or to surrounding concrete. Such concrete shall be shrouded or otherwise
protected throughout the cleaning process.
Immediately after cleaning the bearings shall be examined for defects. If serious defects are
found the Engineer will direct what steps are to be taken.
Painting shall be carried out using pneumatic or approved airless spray and shall only be
carried out during calm, dry weather at a temperature over +5°C, in accordance.

415.06. Trafficking on the bridge deck

Passage of vehicular traffic on the deck will be permitted immediately after mounting the deck
on the reinforced rubber bearing pads and removal of the jacking equipment but not before all
concrete used in repairs in the area of the bearings has reached at least 75% of the designed
strength.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

150
 415.07. Works acceptance
The installation of rubber bearing pads and the painting of bearings will be accepted under the
provisions of Chapter 001 provided all work complies with the drawings and Specifications and
meets with the approval of the Engineer.
Measurement
The installation of rubber bearing pads shall be measured by the Pieces of bearings. All
ancillary repair works to beam ends, bearing areas, collar beams, etc. shall be measured and
paid under the provisions of chapter 417. Cleaning and painting of bearings shall be measured
by the Pieces of bearings cleaned and painted
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

CHAPTER 416. SLAB TO BRIDGE DECK, BRIDGE WALKWAY,

PARAPET AND CONCRETE SLOPE LAYER
416.01. Description
The works covered in this chapter include cast in situ reinforced concrete slabs forming part of
the bridge deck, the parapet, concrete slope layer and the forming of reinforced concrete
walkways on existing and new bridges. The works shall be executed in accordance with the
requirements of the drawings and specifications and of SNiP 3.06.04-91.

416.02. Materials
Materials used for the works of this chapter shall be in accordance with the following
requirements:

Technical specification, SM GOST 26633-91,

Concrete
SNiP 3.06.04-91
Technical specification, SM GOST 5781-82,
Reinforcement and built in items
SNiP 3.06.04-91
Epoxy glue SNiP 3.06.04-91, Appendix 10

416.03. General conditions

The works shall be executed in accordance with the requirements of this technical specification
and of SNiP 3.06.04-91.

416.04. Equipment
The following equipment will be required for works under this chapter:

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

151
 • Crane, for erection and dismantling of formwork, installation of reinforcing mesh and
placing concrete;
• Drill for making holes in the concrete of a diaMetre up to 20 mm, for connections;
• Welding equipment;
• Oxyacetylene/Airacetylene burner for bending reinforcement for the parapet foundation;
• Vibrators for compaction of cast-in situ concrete.

416.05. Formwork
Formwork shall be in accordance with the requirements of SNiP 3.06.04-91.

416.06. Reinforcement
Reinforcing works are to be carried out according to SNiP 3.06.04-91. No reinforcement shall be
brought on to the site or used without a manufacture certificate certifying that it complies with
requirements. Any change or substitution in the category class, diaMetre, or type of the steel,
required by the Drawings or Technical Specification must be agreed by the Engineer.
Before use, all reinforcement must be cleaned of rust, mud, dust and grease; Lap joints of
reinforcing bars are to be executed by overlapping by a length of at least 40 bar diaMetres and
in compliance with requirements of the Technical Specification.
Where the welding of reinforcement and embedded elements is unavoidable the work shall be
executed in accordance with the requirements of SM GOST 14098-95. Welding of
reinforcement shall be avoided wherever possible and shall not be carried out without the
explicit permission of the Engineer.

416.07. Concrete Works

Concrete mixing, transportation and casting, as well as concrete curing works are to be carried
out in accordance with the requirements of this Specification, SM GOST 26633-91 and SNiP
3.06.04-91.
No concrete mixture which has lost its required workability shall be used. It is not permissible to
improve the concrete workability by adding additional water into the mixed concrete.
Any defects on exposed surfaces after removing formwork will be made good by smoothing with
sand cement mortar if the Engineer approves. If the defect is too serious for such approval the
Contractor shall remove the defective work and .replace it at his own cost.

416.08. Works Acceptance

The works will be accepted in accordance with the provisions of chapter 001 provided they re in
accordance with this Specification, SNiP 3.06.04-91, VSN 32-81 and are to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
Measurement.
The works of the bridge deck slab shall be measured in cubic Metres of reinforced concrete
used in work.
No separate measurement will be made for any other connected item of work. Measurement
under the items below shall be the full and complete measurement of all materials and works
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
152
 required for the works under this chapter, including concrete, reinforcement, any embedded
items, formwork and all other temporary works.
Payment.
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

CHAPTER 417. CONCRETE REPAIR

417.01. Introduction
The works described in this chapter cover the minor repair and restoration of elements of the
infrastructure and superstructures and comprise:
• consolidation of piers with major deteriorations;
• execution of works on the superstructure elements connecting joints;
• repair works of the infrastructure elevation;
• execution of the slope for water run off on the cross beams;
• Painting works of the visible surfaces of the infrastructure and superstructures.
The minor repair works include the restoration of sections of the abutments, piers and
superstructures to comply with the design requirements by repairing major failures of the
concrete, of cracks, of exposed reinforcing bars and of spalling in the concrete, by filling in the
cracks and fissures of the elements

417.02. Materials
The materials used for the works described in this chapter shall be in accordance with the
following requirements:

Polymer-based mortar and concrete SNiP 3.06.04-91, EN 1504-3

Polymer- modified, cement-based mortar and
SNiP 3.06.04-91, EN 1504-3
concrete
SM GOST 26633-91, Drawings and
Concrete
SNiP 3.06.04-91
SM GOST 26804-86, SNiP 3.06.04-91,
Cement-based mortar and concrete
EN 1504-3
Active pigments for reinforcement coating SM GOST 5781-82, ENV1504-9
Reinforcement and built in elements.Project SM GOST 5781-82
Water-repellent(silane and/or siloxane) EN 1504-2
Sealing with 20% organic polymer binder EN 1504-2

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

153
 Concrete Paint EN 1504-2
Hydraulic injection with cement paste of ultra fine
EN 1504-5
cement binder
Polymric injection materials (epoxy,
VSN 24-88, EN 1504-5
polyurethane and acrylic binders)

417.03. Equipment
The following items of equipment and special auxiliary installation are likely to be needed:
• Autocrane for assembly and dismantling of the auxiliary installation;
• Compressor for pneumatic hammer, cleaning /drying cracks;
• Concrete pumping equipment;
• Deep vibrator for concrete compaction;
• Injection concrete equipment, metallic brush or sandblasting equipment for the concrete
and reinforcement steel cleaning;
• Temporary scaffoldings, auxiliary piers, lifting equipment for repair works.

417.04. Repair Works

The repair works will be executed with mortar of cement and sand of 2-3 cm thickness on the
piers elevation and on the abutment, according to SNiP 3.06.04-91. A drainage slope with a
gradient of 1% will be executed with sand cement mortar on the collar beam and on the
abutment, according to SNiP 3.06.04-91. The jointing of deck elements and the consolidation of
pier piles will be executed with reinforced concrete after abrading and cleaning concrete and
reinforcing bars according to the Project, VSN 24-88 and SNiP 3.06.04-91. On completion of the
works under this section, surfaces of the piers, elevation, of the abutment and faces of the outer
deck beams will be painted with a liquid suspension of cement with polymers in accordance with
VSN 24-88, to obtain an improved, uniform appearance.
The works will be carried out only in dry and reasonably warm weather, the temperature being
higher than 5°C at all times.
Remove honeycomb and other defected concrete down to sound concrete. Saw-cut the edges
perpendicular to the surface or slightly undercut. Feather edges will not be permitted. Dampen
the area to be patched, and an area at least 150 mm wide surrounding it, to prevent absorption
of water from the patching mortar.
Where rock pockets or similar defect or voids expose steel reinforcement, cut-out to solid
surface behind the reinforcement tp provide a suitable key-lock for patching mortar. Patching
mortar shall envelope the exposed reinforcement bar.
Bond patching mortar to concrete with bonding grout or epoxy adhesive. Bonding grout shall
consist of 1 part Portland cement to 1 part No. 30 mesh sand, mixed to the consistency of a
thick cream, and then well brushed onto the concrete. Bond commercial patching mortar to
concrete in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Make patching mortar of the same materials and of approximately the same proportions as
used for the concrete, except omit course aggregate. Use not more than 1 part of porland
cement to 2.5 parts sand by damp volume, and substitute white Portland cement for a portion of

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

154
 the regular grey Portland cement to produce patching mix matching the surrounding concrete
when dry. Determine the proportion of white Portland cement by trial mixes.
After the surface water has evaporated from the area to be patched, brush the bond coat well
into the surface. When the bond coat begins to loose its sheen, apply the patching mortar.
Compact the mortar into place and strike off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the
surrounding surface.To permit shrinkage, leave the patch undisturbed for at least 1 hour before
being finallt finished. Keep the patch area damp for 7 days.
Neatly finish patched surfaces to match adjacent surrounding surface texture of concrete. Grind
or fill surfaces to produce level and plumb true planes.
For surfaces exposed to the finishing work, form tie-holes shall be patched and finished flush
with the adjacent surface. For holes passing entirely through the walls, a plunger type injection
gun or similar device shall be used to completely fill the hole.
Patching of honetcombed areas or rock pockets that are too large and unsatisfactory for mortar
patching shall be cut-out to solid surface, keyed and packed solid with matching concrete to
produce firm bond and flush surface. Patching shall match texture of adjacent surfaces where
exposed in the finishing work.
Repair work in exposed locations that do not match the texture and colour of surrounding
adjacent surfaces or that is not well performed, shall be removed and performed again until the
repair work conforms with this specifications requirements.
Surfaces to receive membrane waterproofing shall have fins, burrs and loose material removed,
and voids and cracks patched flush with adjacent surfaces.
The completed repairs shall be properly cured for 10 days using waterproof sheet materials,
dump burlap or curing compounds. Curing compounds shall however not be used on surfaces
when their use may be detrimental to bonding of concrete, mortar, membrane waterproofing,
calking and sealants, adhesives, plaster, paint or the specified surface finish or coating.
Cleaning and protection of reinforcement
Cleaned reinforcement should fulfil the following requirements:
• Rust, mortar, concrete, dust and other loose particles that may reduce the bond
between Reinforcement and the repair material to be applied should be removed.
• The whole circumference of the reinforcement should be uniformly cleaned.
However, this does not apply to electrochemical methods.
• Unless cleaning of reinforcement is made directly before application of repair
materials, the cleaned area of substrate and reinforcement should be protected
from additional pollution.
• Cleaning of reinforcement should be made without impairing the reinforcement and
the substrate or the ambient concrete and environment.
• When reinforcement is polluted by chlorine or other substances leading to
corrosion, the entire circumference of the reinforcement should be cleaned by low-
pressure flushing so that chlorides and other substances are moved. However, this
does not apply to electrochemical methods.
• When surface protection of reinforcement is necessary with ‘coating with active
pigments’, the reinforcement should be cleaned and the degree of cleaning should
be in accordance with the work specification for the project.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

155
 Surface protection of reinforcement should be applied to the entire exposed surface. The
surface protection agent should not pollute the substrate if it impairs the adhesive bond between
substrate and repair.
417.05. Cleaning and filling of cracks
Cracks will be cleaned and dried using water jets and blowing equipment. The cracks will be
filled according to VSN 24-88.
Filling of cracks, defects and interstices by injection can be performed by compression,
gravitation or vacuum. The allowable temperature range for the substrate should be observed
(only injection at temperatures above zero). Prior to injection, impurities in cracks, defects and
interstices should be removed if possible (e.g. by water or air). Aggressive liquids such as
hydrochloric acid, HCl, should not be used for cleaning. The permissible moisture content in
cracks, defects and cavities to be injected depends on the injection material. However, it is
possible to inject against water pressure with special injection materials. Cracks from corrosion
on reinforcement due to chloride attack should not be injected before concrete with chloride
content above the threshold value has been removed or the chloride content has been reduced,
e.g. by electrochemical chloride extraction.

417.06. Consolidation of reinforced concrete piles

The works shall be executed after cleaning the river bed beneath the bridge and shall include
excavation of the soil around the pile to the required depth, the placing of consolidation works of
reinforced concrete cast-in-situ, waterproofing works by applying of two layers of mastic with a
brush, soil back-filling and compaction works in layers of 15 cm thickness. The excavation and
waterproofing works are described in the relevant sections. Reinforcement and concrete work
shall be executed in accordance with the requirements of SNiP 3.06.04-91.

417.07. Work acceptance

Works acceptance will be in accordance with Chapter 1 and Sub-Clauses 002.02 and 002.04,
provided they are executed in compliance with SNiP 3.06.04-91, Project, with this Technical
Specification and approved by the Engineer.

Measurement
The minor repair, consolidation, jointing and slope execution works described in this chapter will
be measured in cubic Metres of reinforced concrete or reinforced concrete with polymers, or
mortar with polymers, or sand cement mortar. Repair works and painting works will be
measured in square Metres of the surface covered with sand cement mortar or with liquid
suspension of cement with polymers.

Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

156
 5. DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
CHAPTER 501. CULVERTS AND DRAINAGE FACILITIES
501.01. Introduction
This work consists of constructing culverts, extending existing culverts and/or replacing culverts
and other drainage facilities.

501.02. General
Culvert units and materials used for the works should meet SNiP 2.05.02-85,
OST 35-27.0-85, OST 35-27.1-85, OST 35-27.2-85, SM GOST 5781-82.

501.03. Joint sealing

Joints shall be sealed with materials of a type and mix design accepted by the Engineer.

501.04. Pipes
Culvert pipes shall conform to SNiP 2.05.03-84, SM GOST 12586.0-83 and SM
GOST 12586.1-83. The length of culvert pipes shall be as stipulated in the Album of typical
drawings unless otherwise specified. Concrete pipe shall be 2.5 m in length unless otherwise
specified.

501.05. Generalities
The extension of the culverts shall be carried out using precast elements, indicated on the
drawings, the dimensions and location will be in accordance with the drawings.

501.06. Extension of the existing culverts

The extension of existing culverts shall commence with the removal of the existing culvert
extremities. Starting at the lower end lay the bell or groove end upgrade. Fully joint all sections.
Surplus materials shall be removed from the site and disposed in accordance with the
Specification. Extension of the existing culverts should be done according to the project
drawings. Placing materials and structures shall be done only any preparatory or foundation
works have been approved by the Engineer.

501.07. Replacement of existing culverts

The Contractor shall prepare provisional schemes of traffic control during the Construction
periods and obtain approval from the relevant agencies and the Engineer.
Before replacing existing culverts the existing pavement shall be scarified and all pavement and
subgrade materials removed.
Dismantled culverts and culvert headwalls and inlet and outlet structures shall be removed from
the site and disposed in accordance with the Specification by the Contractor, or, if so instructed
by the Engineer, shall be transported to Employer’s premises indicated by the Engineer and
there stockpiled.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

157
 The work of replacement of existing culverts consist of excavation, placing crushed stone bed
foundation, installation of culverts, making culvert joints, waterproofing new culvert, inlet and
outlet structure installation and waterproofing, backfilling and soil compaction to culvert and inlet
and outlet structures according to the chapter 203.
On completion of backfilling to subgrade level the final layers of backfill shall be compacted to
the requirements of Sub-Clause 201.13. The laying and compacting of pavement layers shall
conform to the requirements of Chapter 303.

501.08. Construction of new culverts

The construction of new culverts shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of
Sub-Clause 501.07 above with the exception of the requirements in relation to the removal of
existing culverts.

501.09. Culverts to property entrances and side roads

Wherever the sides drain intersect a property entrance or crosses a side road junction, and
there is a requirement for a culvert to carry the side drain past the property or side road,
a 600 mm diaMetre pipe culvert in the line of the side drain shall be constructed to carry the
side drain flow. The property entrance and side road culverts shall be bedded on 150 mm
crushed stone and backfilled with crushed stone. They shall be provided with headwalls and
wingwalls to suit the dimensions of the side drain and ensure a smooth, unobstructed entrance
and exit flow. Where shown on the drawings or directed by the Engineer, additional protection
works shall be provided at inlet and outlet.

501.010. Additional protection

Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer additional erosion protection shall
be provided to side drains and waterways at the inlets and outlets of culverts. Such protection,
unless shown otherwise, shall consist of a layer of reinforced concrete in situ or as PC units,
having a minimum thickness of 70 mm, laid over a compacted bed of at least 100 mm of
crushed rock. PC units shall be carefully locked together with mortar pointing and in situ ling
shall be provided with expansion joint at not more than 7 metre intervals. Where lining extend
over a length of more than 3 metres it shall be provided with weep holes, diaMetre 50 mm, level
with the base of the drain on the road side of the lining at 1 metre intervals.
Where additional protection to this standard is considered inadequate because of the
unsupported height then a mass or reinforced concrete structure shall be provided in
accordance with the design of the Engineer and paid under the provisions of chapter 504.

501.011. Works Acceptance

The work of existing culvert extension, culvert replacement and new culvert construction will be
accepted according to Chapters 001 and 002 and to compliance with the drawings and
specifications and acceptance by the Engineer.
Measurement
Extension and replacement of existing culverts and construction of new culverts shall be
measured in the following manner:

Removal of existing culvert inlets Pieces of inlets and outlets removed

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
158
 Linear Metres of culvert dismantled
Removal of existing culvert barrels
and removed
Constructing pipe culvert inlets and outlets Pieces of inlets and outlets of each size
(pipe diaMetre to be stated) constructed
Constructing box culvert inlets and outlets Pieces of inlets and outlets of each size
(box size to be stated) constructed
Constructing pipe culverts (pipe diaMetre to be Metres of each size of culvert
stated) constructed
Metres of each size of culvert
Constructing box culverts (box size to be stated)
constructed
Extension pipe of culverts (pipe diaMetre to be Metres of each size of culvert
stated) constructed
Extension of box culverts (box size to be Metres of each size of culvert
stated) constructed
Protection works to inlets and outlets
Square metres of protection works
constructed
Culverts (600 mm dia) to property entrances
Metres of culverts constructed
and side roads

The Metre measurement of culverts to side roads shall include the cost of providing appropriate
inlet and outlet structures of headwall and wingwalls. Any additional protection works required
shall be measured in Sq.m. and paid under the item for protection works where such an item is
listed in the Bill of Quantities. If no item is listed, then the costs of additional protection shall be
included in the liner metre rate for provision of the culvert.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and certified by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.
Payment will be made under some or all of the items below:

No. Item Unit of Measure

50101 Removal of Culvert Inlet or Outlet Pieces

50102 Removal of existing culvert barrel Metre

Construction of culvert inlets and outlets to pipe culverts
50103 Pieces
(pipe diaMetre to be stated)
Construction of culvert inlets and outlets to box culverts
50104 Pieces
(to be stated)
Construction of new pipe culverts (pipe diaMetre to be
50105 Metre
stated)
50106 Construction of new box culverts (box size to be stated) Metre

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

159
 No. Item Unit of Measure

50109 Additional protection works at inlets and outlets Square Metre

CHAPTER 502. CLEANING, RECONDITIONING AND REPAIRING

EXISTING INLETS, OUTLETS, DRAINS,
SPILLWAYS AND CHUTES (NOT USED)
502.01. Introduction
This work consists of cleaning existing culverts in place, reconditioning existing inlets and
outlets and repairing and cleaning existing drains, spillways and chutes.

502.02. Materials
Concrete shall conform to Table 504-1 of this Specification. Before batching concrete submit the
proposed concrete proportions for approval to the Engineer. As a minimum, submit the
following:
(a) Type and source(s) of all material proposed for use.
(b) Material certification for all material proposed for use.
(c) Surface dry weight of the fine coarse aggregate per cubic Metre of concrete.
(d) Gradation of fine and coarse aggregate.
(e) Weight of mixing water per cubic Metre of concrete.
(f) Weight of cement per cubic Metre of concrete.
(g) Entrained air content of plastic concrete in percent by volume.
(h) Maximum slump of plastic concrete in cm.
Joint mortar use for concrete minor structure shall consist of the following:
a) One part hydraulic cement (see SM GOST 25192-87, SM GOST 26633-91). The
cement shall not contain lumps, be partially set, come from previously opened bag
or be subject to hydration.
b) Two parts fine sand free of clay or other deleterious materials.
c) Water as required to obtain a freely working mix capable of being forced into small
small openings, cracks or gaps.

502.03. Cleaning Culverts in Place

Remove and dispose of all foreign material within the barrel and appurtenances of the culvert
(including inlets and outlets) by any method that does not damage the culvert.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

160
 502.04. Repairing of the extremities of the culverts
Remove all debris from inlets and outlets designated to be reconditioned. Repair all leaks and
structural damage.

502.05. Repair of Drains, Spillways and Chutes

Lined side drains which are designated for repair shall be carefully rebuilt to provide the full
original drain section in solid, well bedded concrete.
Chutes which are designated for repair shall be dismantled, rebedded, units replaced and all
joints carefully mortared to provide a neat workmanlike chute, true to line and slope with upper
edges flush with the embankment surface.

502.06. Cleaning lined side drains

Where directed by the Engineer, existing lined side drains shall be cleared of all accumulated
debris. Drains shall be cleaned in the first three months of the contract and maintained clean
throughout the duration of the works

502.07. Works Acceptance

The work will be accepted for payment providing that it has been carried out in conformance to
the drawings and specifications pertaining to the segment involved and is accepted by the
Engineer.
Measurement
Repair of culvert joints and cleaning culvert in place will be measured in linear Metre of culvert
repaired or cleaned. Cleaning will only be measured and paid where no other work is required
to the section cleaned. Where other or additional works are required the act of cleaning shall be
considered ancillary to such works and shall be included in the cost of those works. The rate for
cleaning shall include the cost of maintaining the cleaned drain or structure in a clean condition
throughout the duration of the contract. Repair of inlet and outlet structures shall be measured
by the Pieces of inlets and outlets instructed to be repaired regardless of the extent of the
repairs. Repair of chutes and spillways and lined side drains will be by the linear Metre of
structure instructed to be repaired.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and certified by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

CHAPTER 503. PAVED WATERWAYS (NOT USED)

503.01. Introduction
This work consists of constructing paved chutes on the slopes, lined side drains and lined
waterways not contiguous to the travelled way together with the associated inlet and outlet
works.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

161
 Paved chutes and gullies on the slope are required to transport water from the pavement on
embankment to the foot of the slope without erosion.
Paved waterways will be constructed according to the requirements of the Drawings and
Schedules.

503.02. Materials
Material shall conform to the requirements of this specification and to the materials stipulated in
the Drawings. Paved waterways of all types shall be constructed using B20 concrete having a
maximum aggregate size of 20 mm. Where mesh reinforcement is required it shall comply with
the relevant GOST standard.

503.03. Generalities
Excavation shall be performed accurately to line and level. The bed of the excavation shall be
parallel to the required finished surface of the waterway. Concrete mixes shall be designed and
approved in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 504.

503.04. Concrete Chutes and gullies

Perform the work according to Chapter 504, utilizing commercially available precast units or
purpose made units for chutes. Entry gullies shall be of two types, one type for single direction
entry and a second type, to be used at low points, for double direction entry. Where indicated on
the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer, chutes shall terminate in a basin constructed as
shown on the Drawings. All gullies and chutes shall be in accordance with the details on the
Drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

503.05. Lined Side Drains and Waterway

Lined side drains and lined waterways shall be constructed in accordance with the Drawings
including filter materials and crushed stone bedding. Where indicated on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer, lined side drains shall terminate in a basin constructed as shown on
the Drawings. Four types of lined drain are foreseen:
• Type 1: A lining of standard size for slopes <5%.
• Type 2: A lining of standard size incorporating regularly spaced anchor blocks for use
on slopes >5%.
• Type 3: An oversized lining reinforced with mesh reinforcement for major non
roadside drains having a top width of 4 metres and a depth of 1 metre incorporating
regularly spaced anchor blocks for use on slopes >5%.
• Type 4: A rectangular side drain of width 60 cm and depth 45 cm constructed of in
situ reinforced concrete.

503.06. Works Acceptance

The work will be accepted for payment provided that it has been built in conformance to the
Drawings and specifications pertaining to the segment involved and are accepted by the
Engineer.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

162
 Measurement
Paved spillways/chutes on the slopes and paved side drains and waterways will be measured in
linear Metres. Entry gullies shall be measured by Pieces of the two types specified and erosion
basins shall be measured by Pieces. The cost of any necessary excavation, bedding, support
of excavation and backfill shall be included in the costs and shall not be subject to separate
measurement or payment with the exception of excavation to the net internal dimensions of side
drains which will be measured and paid separately under the provisions of Chapter 201 as a
part of common excavation and of waterways not contiguous to the road which will be
measured to the net internal dimensions and this volume paid separately under the provisions
of Chapter 202.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and certified by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

CHAPTER 504. MINOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES (NOT USED)

504.01. Introduction
This chapter covers the basic requirements for the construction of minor concrete structures
and shall be read in conjunction with other chapters as appropriate.

504.02. Materials
1. Aggregate shall conform to SM GOST 10268-84 and shall consist of hard durable
particles of fragments of crushed stone, crushed slag or crashed gravel and shall be
subjected to the following tests: Sieve analysis, Strength, Wearing and amount of dust
particles.
2. Mortar - the joint filler used for concrete minor structures shall consist of the following:
a) One part hydraulic cement see SM GOST 10178-85 and table 3.1 of
SNIP 2.05.02-85.
b) Two parts fine sand free of clay or other deleterious materials.
c) The maximum water cement ratio shall be 0.5 as required to obtain
a freely working mix capable of being forced into small interstices.
3. Portland cement.
Portland Cement shall meet the following specifications: SM GOST 10178-85.
Do not use cement which has lumps, become partially set or is salvaged from previously
opened bags. Do not mix brands or types of cement from different mills without the
Engineer’s approval.
Concrete curbs can be cast-in-situ or prefabricated in unified block length.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

163
 504.03. Concrete Composition
Concrete shall conform to Table 504-1. Before batching concrete the Contractor shall submit
the proposed concrete proportions for approval. As a minimum, the submission shall comprise
the following:
a) Strength of Concrete demonstrated by test cubes from design mix.
b) Type and source(s) of all material proposed for use.
c) Material certification for all material proposed for use.
d) Surface dry weight of the fine and coarse aggregate per cubic Metre
of concrete.
e) Gradation of fine and coarse aggregate and proportions to be used.
f) Weight of mixing water per cubic Metre of concrete.
g) Weight of cement per cubic Metre of concrete.
h) Entrained air content of plastic concrete in percent by volume.
i) Maximum slump of plastic concrete in cm.

Table 504.1: Composition Concrete of Minor Structure

Property Specification: SM GOST 26633-91
Maximum W/C ratio: 0.49
Maximum slump, cm: 10
Minimum air content, percent: 4
Size aggregate: Varies
Minimum 28-day compressive strength, MPa: 20.7

504.04. Generalities
Excavation and backfill shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of chapter 203.
Forms shall be so designed and of sufficient strength that there is no loss of shape, bulging or
warping under site conditions or concrete pressure, and such that they permit of ready removal
without causing damage to the concrete.
Forms shall be of wood, metal, or other suitable material. They shall be kept clean and coated
with form release agent or form oil before placing concrete.

504.05. Casting Concrete

Moisten the forms and foundation immediately before casting concrete. Once the casting of
concrete has begun, it shall be carried out in a continuous process between construction joints.
Concrete shall be placed within one hour from the start of mixing. This time may be extended by
the Engineer where a retarding admixture has been used.Concrete shall be transported and
placed in a manner that will prevent segregation or loss of the constituent materials or the
contamination of the concrete. Fresh concrete shall not be placed against concrete which has
been in position for more than 30 minutes unless a construction joint has been formed or unless
a retarding additive has been used in the concrete.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

164
 When the ambient temperature exceeds 30°C during concreting, the Contractor shall take
measures to control the temperature of the concrete ingredients so that the temperature of the
placed concrete will not exceed 30°C.
The temperature of the placed concrete shall not be allowed to fall below 5°C until the concrete
has attained strength of at least 5 MPa, and the Contractor shall be responsible for all protective
measures necessary to this end. All concrete damaged by frost or by the formation of ice in the
concrete shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.

504.06. Curing Concrete

Cure concrete a minimum of 7 days by covering with burlap sacking and keeping wet at all
times or other approved materials/methods as approved by the Engineer, to protect against the
harmful effects of weather, including rain and from drying out.
Finish exposed concrete surfaces according to the following:
Repair of surface defects shall begin immediately after form removal and/or as soon as is
practically possible in accordance with the approved repair method statements.
Surface defects are defined to include, form tie-holes, air voids or pockets, bug holes,
honeycombed areas, rock pockets, visible construction joints and burrs.
Freshly laid concrete surfaces that are less than one hour old may be repaired with concrete
mortar in accordance with Chapter 401. After the mortar is set rub it down with burlap sacking or
other approved material until a reasonable blend of the fresh exposed surfaces to surrounding
concrete is achieved.
Carefully tool and remove free mortar and concrete from construction joints.

504.07. Works Acceptance

The work will be accepted for payment provided it has been built in conformance with the
drawings and specifications pertaining to the segment involved and is approved by the
Engineer.
Measurement
Where minor structures are to be paid under this item they will be measured in cubic Metres of
concrete required for the structures specified or as shown on the drawings. The single
measurement of cubic Metres shall include for all necessary works to provide the complete
structures as designed/shown on the Drawings, including excavation and backfilling, formwork,
concrete, reinforcement, curing and finishing.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and certified by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

165
 CHAPTER 505. OPEN DRAINS, SIDE DRAINS (NOT USED)
505.01. Introduction
Open V-drains, side drains, mitre drains, cut-off drains, catch water drains, culvert outfall drains
and earth drains,wherever applicable , shall be formed at the location and to the lines and levels
shown on the drawings or as instructed by the Engineer.
Where shown on the drawings or instructed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall construct
earth dams on side drains, cut-off drains, catch water drains, mitre and outfall drains to prevent
the flow overshooting the drainage works or to direct flows into culvert inlets. Similar earth
structures may also be used as erosion checks. Earth dams shall be formed in selected fill
material compacted to a minimum dry density of 90% MDD (AASHTO T180).

505.02. Side Drains and Drainage Ditches (V - drains)

In the course of construction side drains and drainage ditches have to be rearranged temporary
or permanently over different length’s depending local situation in relation to the embankment of
the future motorway and the guidance of drains through the embankment.
The works required in this context are summarized in the following works, but necessarily but
not limited or not all of them will be required:
• excavation for side drains and drainage ditches
• disposal of excess material
• cleaning for side drains and drainage ditches
• filling and compaction of side drains and drainage ditches and
• dewatering of side drains and drainage ditches.
Filling and compaction includes the provision of material and for compaction at least 92% MDD
according to Aashto T180 is required. Compacted layer thickness should not exceed 20 cm.
Measurement
Side drains and drainage ditches shall be measured as per running metre.

505.03. Open lined Drains in Built Up Areas (U - drains)

Open channels (U-drains without removable covers), located along the sidewalks, will to be
constructed where walkwyas are to be contructed.
Surface water will be conveyed to the nearest open water course or discharged into the existing
drainage system at culvert locations (ref drawings).
The U-drains shall be made of cincrete C 20/25, contstructed on a layer of lean concrete
C 12/15.
Measurement
Open U-drain shall be measured as per running metre.

505.04. Closed lined Drains in Built Up Areas (U - drains)

Closed channels (U-drains with removable covers), located along the sidewalks, will to be
constructed where walkwyas are to be contructed.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
166
 Surface water will be conveyed to the nearest open water course or discharged into the existing
drainage system at culvert locations (ref drawings).
The U-drains shall be made of cincrete C 20/25, contstructed on a layer of lean concrete
C 12/15.
Measurement
Closed U-drain shall be measured as per running metre.

505.05. Subsurface Drainage

Parallel to the U-drains a subsurface drainage shall be installed.
The subsurface drainage consists of a permeable granular drain 50x50 cm, wrapped into
geotextile as shown on the drawings.
The permeable natural material shall be clean, hard and durable with a minimum proportion of
fines and shall comply with the following grading requirements:

Sieve Size % Passing

40 mm 100
30 mm 90 - 100
20 mm 65 - 90
10 mm 40 - 85
5 mm 30 - 80
2 mm 15 - 75
1 mm 12 - 60
0.5 mm 10 - 45
0.065 mm 0 - 10

Measurement
Payement as per running metre incl. excavation and disposal of excess material, geotextile and
permeable granular filling.

505.06. Concrete Side Drain on top of Embankments

Concrete drainage elements, concrete side drains, made of concrete B25 (or B40) to be
installed on top of embankment where the embankment has a height of 3.00 m or more and a
horizontal slope of more than 2%.
Where appropriate, type, sizes and measures are shown in the drawings.
Measurement
concrete drainage elements shall be measured as per Metre.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

167
 CHAPTER 506. PROTECTION WORK
506.01. Introduction
Where shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer the Contractor shall provide and
place protection works aginst erosion.
Protection works in connection with drainage channels, culvert inlets and outlets and river
training will consist generally of stone pitching, riprap or gabions/matresses.

506.02. Stone Pitching (grouted)

The area to be pitched shall be neatly trimmed to line and level and compacted.
The stones (with a minimum dimension of 150 mm) shall be thoroughly cleaned of adhering dirt
or clay, moistened.
The stone pitching shall be of stones, which shall be laid in a concrete bed (C12/15) of 75
mm, while the concrete is still fresh.
Openings between stones and any spaces between the stones shall be filled with cement
mortar or grout (composed both of one part of cement to six parts of sand) as and care shall be
taken not to spill the mortar onto the finally exposed surfaces of the stones. Grout spilt onto the
exposed surface of the stone shall be removed while still soft and the joints between stones
shall be neatly finished.
The mortar and the grout shall be placed in a continuous operation for any days run at any one
location. The grout shall be worked into the pitching to ensure that all spaces or voids between
the stones will be completely filled with grout to the full depth of the stone pitching. Grout spilt
onto exposed surface of the stone shall be removed while still soft, and the joints between
stones shall be neatly finished.
The grouted pitching shall be cured with wet sacking or other approved wet cover for a period of
not less than four days after grouting, and shall not be subjected to loading until adequate
strength has been developed.
Where required, weep holes shall be formed in the pitching.
Measurement
Stone pitching shall be measured as per m2 net. No extra allowance will be made for facing,
sills, sloping, battering, curved works etc.

506.03. Riprap
Riprap shall consist of a course of packed large stones, bolders or lumps of rock placed on
bank slopes and outlets toes in stream and river beds and at other localities where protection of
this type may be required.
Depending on the slope and the expected stream, the size of stones/bolders is varying:
stones D50 <= 350 mm
stones 350 mm < D50 < 1000 mm
stones 1000 mm < D50 < 1500 mm

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

168
 The surface of areas to receive riprap shall be neatly trimmed to line and level and all loose
material compacted.
Measurement
Riprap shall be measured as per m2.
Payment

No. Item Unit of Measure

50603 Stone Pitching Cubic Metre

CHAPTER 507. GABIONS AND MATRESSES (NOT USED)

507.01. Introduction
Gabions shall be type ‘Maccaferri’ boxes and/or ‘Reno’ mattresses, or similar, both with
diaphragms at 1 metre centres, or similar approved. The maximum mesh size shall be 100 mm
x 120 mm for boxes and 60 mm x 80 mm for mattresses. The wire used for the construction of
gabions shall be either of appropriate hard plastic material or plastic coated and unless
otherwise instructed by the Engineer and comply with the requirements shown below.
Wire for Gabion/Matress Construction

Description DiaMetre (mm) Galvanising (g/m2)

Box 3.4 275

Mesh
Mattress 2.7 260
Box 2.2 240
Binder
Mattress 2.2 240
Box 3.9 290
Selvedge
Mattress 3.4 275

The alignment of the gabion shall be correct within a tolerance of 100 mm of the instructed
alignment and the level of any course of gabion shall be correct to within a tolerance of 50 mm
of the instructed level. In addition adjacent gabions shall not vary by more than 25 mm in line
and/or level from each other.
The pre-packed elements of gabions shall be of dimension 2.00x1.00x0.50 m and arranged as
shown on the standard drawings.
The surface upon which gabions are to be laid shall be compacted to a minimum dry density of
90% MDD (AASHTO T180) and trimmed to the instructed level or shape.
Joints in gabions shall be stitched together with 600 mm minimum lengths of binder wire, with at
least one stitch per 50 mm, and each end of the wire shall be fixed with at least two turns upon
itself.
Adjacent gabions shall be stitched together with binder wire along all touching edges.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

169
 Gabion boxes shall be laid with broken bond and throughout to avoid continuous joints both
horizontally and vertically.
All wire shall be to BS 1052 having a tensile strength of not less than 40 kg/mm2 and plastic
coated or appropriate plastic material produced by a reputable manufacturer, subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
Galvanising shall comply with the requirements of BS 443.
Gabions shall be constructed to the shapes and dimensions as shown on the Drawings or given
in the Special Specification or as directed by the Engineer. Gabions, as constructed shall be
within a tolerance of ±5% on the height or width instructed and ±3% on the length instructed.
Gabions shall be hand-packed with broken rock of 150 mm minimum dimensions and 300 mm
maximum dimension. The sides shall be packed first in the form of a wall, using the largest
pieces, with the majority placed as headers with broken joints to present a neat outside face.
The interior of the gabion shall be hand packed with smaller pieces and the top layers shall be
finished off with larger pieces. The whole interior and top layers shall be packed tight and
hammered into place.
Where shown on the drawings or where instructed by the Engineer the Contractor shall place
filter fabric (‘Terram’ or similar approved) behind gabion faces or below mattresses in contact
with existing or backfilled ground. The Contractor shall ensure that the filter fabric is not
damaged during the construction or backfilling around the gabion works and any damaged or
torn fabric shall be replaced.
At the back face and ends of completed gabion work or where shown on the Drawings or
instructed by the Engineer the existing soil shall be backfilled, thoroughly compacted against the
sides of the gabions and finished flush with the top surface of the gabion.

507.02. Gabions
General: handling, fixing filling and fastening according to manufacturers instructions.
On earth touched sides a geotextile membrane shall be fixed onto the gabions. Gabions shall
be filled as instructed and with stones of appropriate size.
Measurement
Gabions shall be measured as per m3.

507.03. Matresses
General: handling, fixing filling and fastening according to manufacturers instructions.
On earth touched sides a geotextile membrane shall be fixed onto the gabions. Matresses shall
be filled with stones of appropriate size.
Measurement
Matresses shall be measured as per m2.

507.04. Geotextile (filter fabric)

Separation membrane material shall be a polypropylene or polypropylene/ polyethylene mixture
geotextile and shall be obtained from manufacturers with proven quality control procedures. The
Contractor shall provide evidence that the material proposed will be sufficiently durable, when
installed, to maintain its integrity for at least 30 years.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
170
 1) The geotextile shall sustain a tensile load of not less than 7 KN/m when determined in a
"wide Strip" tensile test carried out in accordance with BS 6906: Part 1. The
characteristic strength shall be taken as the value of the strength of the material below
which not more than 5% of test results may be expected to fall.
2) The permeability when tested in accordance with BS 6906: Part 3 shall not be less than
10 litres per m2 per second, in either direction when tested under constant head of 100
mm.
3) The geotextile shall have a pore size distribution such that the mean 090 is between
100 and 300 microns when tested in accordance with BS 6906: Part 2.
4) The mean peak strength puncture resistance when tested in accordance with
BS 6906: Part 4 shall be less than 1500 N.
5) The minimum tear resistance when tested in accordance with ASTMD 4533-85 shall not
be less than 300 N.
Measurement
Geotextile shall be measured as per m2.
507.05. Cleaning and Maintenance
The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining all drainage structures, culverts, channels
and drains free of silt and other depsoited material until the end of the contract, including the
Defects Liability Period or its equivalent and shall repair any damage to the Works caused by
his failure to maintain the drainage system.

CHAPTER 508. KERBS

508.01. Introduction
This chapter covers the requirements for the construction of kerbing. Two types of kerbs are
foreseen and are shown on the drawings.
• Type 1 – a high type kerb is for urban areas;
• Type 2 – a the low type kerb is for rural areas. The low kerb is intended primary for use
as a drainage kerb to prevent uncontrolled discharges of surface water across shoulders
and embankments.

508.02. Materials
1. Precast concrete kerb units of the quality and dimensions are shown on the Drawings.
Where kerbing is required to follow a curve having a radius of less than 10 metres then
purpose made radiused kerbs shall be fabricated. Kerbs shall be made from concrete
having a maximum aggregate size of 20 mm and a minimum compressive strength of 35
N/mm2 at 28 days.
2. Portland cement mortar in accordance with Sub-Clause 504.02 above, as required.
3. Backing concrete having a maximum aggregate size of 40 mm and a minimum
compressive strength of 20 N/mm2 at 28 days.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

171
 508.03. Generalities
Any necessary excavation and backfill shall be performed in accordance with the requirements
of chapter 203.
Forms shall be so designed and of sufficient strength that there is no loss of shape, bulging or
warping under site conditions or concrete pressure, and such that they permit ready removal
without causing damage to the concrete.
Forms shall be of wood, metal, or other suitable material. They shall be kept clean and coated
with form release agent or form oil before placing concrete.

508.04. Placing kerbs

Backing concrete shall be placed in situ in two casts. The initial concrete shall be cast to provide
a bed at least 150 mm in thickness with its upper surface between 5 and 15 mm below the
required level for the base of the PC kerb units. The bed shall be wide enough to project at least
50 mm in front of the kerb units and 100 mm behind the kerb units. The upper surface of this
bed shall be left rough in order to provide an adequate key for subsequent operations.
Kerbs shall be placed on this foundation with a cement mortar bedding to bring them precisely
to design line and level. Kerbs shall be jointed with cement mortar.
When the mortar bed has hardened, backing concrete shall be poured behind the kerbs to a
level not less than 200 mm below the top of the kerb and not less than 100 mm in thickness
behind the kerb. These dimensions for backing concrete shall take precedence over any
backing concrete dimensions indicated in the drawings. The rear face of this backing concrete
shall be contained with formwork.
The correct type of kerb for the location shall be as scheduled on the drawings and/or directed
by the Engineer.

508.05. Curing Concrete

The precast kerbs shall be carefully cured during production to ensure that the full strength of
the concrete is reached. PC concrete kerbs shall not be allowed to dry out at all until
28 days after casting. These requirements may be reviewed if the units are produced in a
dedicated PC plant with approved steam curing facilities.
Backing concrete shall be cured with wet burlap for 7 days after placing. Alternatively,
by agreement with the Engineer, backing concrete may be cured by burying and watering.

508.06. Works Acceptance

The work will be accepted for payment providing that they have been constructed entirely
in conformance to the drawings and specifications pertaining to the segment involved and are
approved by the Engineer.

Measurement
The Metre measurement will cover all works necessary, including any excavation, trimming or
backfilling, to place the kerbs and backing complete, as specified.
Payment

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

172
 The works measured as indicated above and certified by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.
Payment will be made under some or all of the items below:
Unit of
No. Item
Measure
Precast concrete kerbing and backing – type 1 (100 x 30 x 18
50801.1 Linear Metre
cm )
Precast concrete kerbing and backing – type 1 (100 x 20 x 8
50801.3 Linear Metre
cm )

CHAPTER 509. DRAINS, MANHOLES, EXIT GULLY

(NOT USED)
509.01. Introduction
This type of works includes the construction of drains and filling the drain with drainage material,
construction of manhole and exit gully.

509.02. Materials
Materials have to be in accordance to:

Coarse sand SM GOST 8736-93

Crushed granite SM GOST 8267-93

Polyethylene pipe „SL” GOST 18598-83

Gravel mix with sand SM GOST 25607-2010

Manhole gully SM GOST 3634-99

Geotextile filter membrane

Shall be an approved mechanically bonded continuous filament nonwoven fabric of 100% UV
stabilised polypropylene. It shall have a minimum strength in any direction of 7.5 kN/m; a
minimum permeability of 100 litres/m2/sec, and a minimum thickness of 0.9 mm and a minimum
density of 100 gm/m2. It shall have a maximum opening size of 110 microns. Samples and test
results of proposed material shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before any filter
fabric material is purchased or brought onto the site.

509.03. Working conditions

Foundations will be made of sand and crushed granite with 40-70 mm particle size. Assembly of
the pipes will be done according to SNiP 3.07.03-85 and SNiP 3.05.05-84.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
173
 At the bottom of the slope will be built a waterproofed screen. The pipes will be covered with
gravel 40-70 mm/crushed granite 20-40 mm. Each course will be 15 cm thick/gravel and
sand/geotextile course/ clay soil 0,5 m deep.
Manholes will be located where the trench is changing direction or declivity. On the continuous
sectors manholes will be placed at each 50 m apart. In these locations the trenches will be
wided and deeped 0,5 m, the walls will be consolidated with protection panels.
The manhole will be founded on a base made of compacted gravel. The position of the down
pipe will be shown. The pipe edge will be paint with cement mortar. The pipe will be provided
with holes for the assembly of drainage pipes; the joints will be filled with cement mortar. The
manhole will be covered with the cover. At the exit point will be built the exit hole. The
foundation pit will be made transversal. The depth will be 0,8 m, the length - 3,5 m.

509.04. Works Acceptance

Tolerances should be not more than:
• longitudinal declivity (slope) +0,0005;
• transversal dimensions +5 cm;
• bottom trench level +5 cm;
• Thickness of the filtering courses +10%.
Measurement
Unit of measure: linear Metre

6. INCIDENTAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)

CHAPTER 601. GUARDRAIL
601.01. Introduction
This work comprises the provision and erection of W-beam galvanized steel guard rail.

601.02. Materials
Material shall conform to the following Section and Subsections:
• Concrete Chapter 504.
• Galvanized steel rail SM GOST 26804-86, and provisions of this Chapter.
• Paint for guardrail
If required on the drawings or indicated elsewhere in this specification Guardrail shall be
painted as shown. Paint shall conform to the requirements of Sub-Clause 014.02 of this
Specification; however the following preliminary treatment shall be applied:

601.03. Working conditions

Surface Preparation

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

174
 Galvanized surfaces shall be thoroughly scrubbed down using an approved galvanized iron
cleaner to remove all traces of any resin protective coating or other protection.
The surface shall be washed down and scrubbed to remove all traces of grease, oil, dirt, etc.
Priming
Two coats of calcium plumbate primer shall be applied to dry film thickness of at least
0.025 mm.
The undercoat and balance of the approved paint system shall follow within one week of the
primer.
Guardrail installation shall conform to SM GOST R 52289:2009 and SNIP 2.05.02-85.

601.04. Guardrail Supplementary Requirements

All guard rail posts shall be metal. All guard rail installation shall include spacer blocks which
ensure that the face of the guard rail is held at least 250 mm clear of the face of the post.
All metal guard rails, spacers, posts and fixings shall be galvanised. A hot-dip (galvanised) zinc
coating that complies with the requirements of AASHTO M232 for coatings on Type A articles
shall be applied to all rails, posts and spacers. All bolts, nuts and washers shall have a hot-dip
(galvanised) zinc coating that complies with the requirements of AASHTO M232 for coatings on
Type C articles. Galvanized guard rails shall not be nested when stacked for storage.
Guard rails and posts shall be supplied together with all bolts, nuts, washers and fixing
materials required including bolts for fixing to posts and for fixing spacer blocks.
Dimensions of guard rails and terminal sections shall be as shown on the Drawings. If the
Contractor’s preferred guard rail supplier is unable to provide items precisely in accordence with
the requirements he shall propose an alternative to the Engineer for approval. The Engineer’s
approval shall be conditional on being satisfied that the proposal is at least the equal of the
specified detail in terms of both function and quality.
601.05. Posts.
When the edge of the pavement is within 1 metre of the guardrail post locations the posts shall
be set before placing the pavement.
Guardrail posts shall be maintained at the length shown on the drawings as a minimum. If the
Drawings show guardrail posts set into concrete they shall be so set. If no direction is given,
guard rail posts may drive directly into the ground. If direct driving is impossible due to hard
ground, posts may be set using pilot holes that are punched or drilled. The dimensions of the
pilot hole shall not exceed the dimensions of the post.
The recommended method of erection to meet the tolerance requirements set out below is to
set out and excavate holes, place posts in position, attach spacers and rails and block the
whole assembly into its final position. This procedure allows precise positioning of the elements.
When the assembly is set up true to line and level with no visible deformities, place concrete in
the hole, being careful not to disturb the prealigned rail.
601.06. Rail Elements.
The rail elements may be installed before or after the pavement adjacent to the guardrail is
complete. Do not modify specified hole diaMetres or slot dimensions.
Steel rail

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

175
 Shop bends all curved guardrails with a radius of 45 metres or less. The overlap of the elements
shall be made in the direction of the traffic. Use bolts which extend beyond the nut not less than
6 mm but no more than 25 mm. Tighten all bolts.
601.07. Removing and Re-installing Guardrail.
The work of removal of the existing guardrail, posts, and appurtenances and delivery to the
designated storage area of the Employer or, if designated for re-use, to the Contractor’s store is
covered in the provisions of Chapter 103.
For rail that is to be re-used the Contractor shall replace all guardrail, posts, and hardware
damaged during removal, storage, or re-installing.
Guard rail for reuse shall be refurbished prior to reuse. Refurbishment shall comprise:
• Taking designated elements from storage
• Transport to the site of refurbishment
• Straightening and reshaping
• Building up and redrilling of all deformed or damaged bolt holes to provide
standard 8 bolt coupling
• Grit blasting to bare metal
• Painting as directed
Resetting shall comprise:
• Transport to site
• Erection at site in accordance with all the requirements of the foregoing clauses.
Immediately after grit blasting all exposed steel surfaces shall be given a full coat of zinc rich,
epoxy based cold galvanising compound followed by two coats of calcium plumbate primer
applied to dry film thickness of at least 0.025 mm. The undercoat and balance of the approved
paint system shall follow within one week of the primer. Re-erection shall be done using all new
bolts and nuts, hot dip galvanised to the same specification as that for new guardrail fastenings.
Where the Engineer considers that existing guardrail which must be dismantled for the
execution of the works is sufficiently new and in good enough condition that it does not require
refurbishment he may instruct that the rail be re-installed without refurbishment.

601.08. Guard rail finished alignment

Finished guard rail shall be true to line and level within +/-10 mm at all points. However, in
addition, when viewed from any position there shall be no visible irregularity in the horizontal or
vertical alignment of the guard rail, the rail must flow in straight lines or smooth continuous
curves. If there are visible deficiencies in this respect the guard rail shall be adjusted to correct,
even if the rail is within the nominal tolerances.

601.09. Works Acceptance

The work will be accepted for payment providing that it has been built in conformance to the
plans and specifications pertaining to the segment involved and is approved by the Engineer.
Measurement
Guardrail will be measured in Metres along the face of the rail including terminal sections.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

176
 Refurbishing and re-installing guardrail and raising guardrail will be measured in linear Metre
along the face of the rail. Replacement posts (except replacement posts for posts damaged by
construction operations) used in the re-installing of guardrail will be measured by Pieces.
Separate measurements shall be made for guardrail which is refurbished and re-installed and
for guard rail which is reinstalled without refurbishment.
The dismantling of guard rail is measured under chapter 103.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

CHAPTER 602. CRASH BARRIERS

602.01. New Jersey Barriers
New Jersey Barriers shall be provided and installed on bridges and roads made of reinforced
concrete class B25 (or B40), quality requirements as per chapter 400 “Bridges and Structural
Concrete”.

602.02. Metallic Crash Barriers

Crash Barriers shall be provided and installed in the road-shoulders before/after bridges,
directly adjacent to the New Jersey barriers on bridges, on dangerous sections with steep slope
and in narrow curves and equipped with reflectors.
Crash barriers ends to be bent back to an angle of 1:20, and to be brought down in the ground
at end of a section of 15 m (ref. to drawings).
Vehicular guardrails shall meet the requirements on EN 1317-2, DIN 17100 or AASHTO.
Guardrail beams shall be corrugated section, and guardrail posts and blockouts between
guardrail beams and posts shall be steel channel section conforming to the above standard.
All connections, including connecting plates, bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to the above
standard.
The posts for on-bridge vehicular guardrails shall be welded to a steel base plate formed from
material complying with AASHTO M270. Welding shall be in accordance with the requirements
of ANSI/AASHTO/ANS D 1.5. The welded connection shall be capable of developing a moment
of resistance equal to the ultimate moment capacity of the post.
Fixing bolts for guardrails shall be supplied complete with nuts and washers. Holding down bolts
shall be steel anchor bolts conforming to AASHTO M314. Nuts shall be in accordance with
AASHTO M291. Washers shall be in accordance with AASHTO M293.
All steel components, including all bolts, nuts and washers, shall be hot-galvanised or painted in
accordance with one of the systems specified in this specification.
Measurement and Payment
The unit rates entered into the Bill of Quantity for guard-rails shall be inclusive of the necessary
installation works, driving of posts, concrete, etc. Where bolting of guard-rails on structures
becomes necessary, rates stated in the Bill of Quantity shall be inclusive all necessary works
including welding, ancillary materials, coating, sealing.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

177
 No. Item Unit of Measure
Provision and complete installation of metallic Guard Rails
60201 (crash barrier), hot galvanized , incl all ancillary works Metre
(earth and concrete works, metal works, etc.)

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

178
 CHAPTER 603. FENCES (NOT USED)
603.01. Wire Fences
Provision and erect a mesh wire fence (Coated with PVC) complete (2000 mm height). The
works comprise all ancillary works, as earthworks (for fence poles foundations), civil works (lean
concrete for foundations), metal works (gates, width 6,0 m), provision of all material and
equipment.
Steel poles should at least be 50 mm strong water pipes. After setting the poles should be filled
with concrete mortar 1:3.
The fencing poles should be set into concrete foundation of 40x40 cm and depth of 1.00 m.
All steel components, including all bolts, nuts and washers, shall be galvanised.

603.02. Security Fence on Bridges (prevention of railway overhead

line contact)
The security fence shall prevent contacting the electrified railway overhead lines, made of
acrylic glass, 2 cm thick, fully encircled by a metal frame, and fixed on steel sections HEA 120
anchored onto the sidewalk cap of bridges over electrified railway lines.
Quality requirements of welding and anchoring according to the requirements of “Railing /
Pedestrian Handrails” above.

CHAPTER 604. RETAINING WALL

604.01. Introduction
The works under this chapter include: construction of the retaining walls made of reinforced
concrete cast in-situ, and the provision of drainage material and/or pipe drains behind such
walls or other structures.

604.02. Materials
• Concrete for the walls shall be according to GOST 26633-85
• Reinforcement shall comply with GOST 5781-82 and
• Reinforcing mesh shall comply with GOST 23279-85
• Filter surround materials for the drain - GOST 8267-93.

604.03. Reinforcement
Reinforcing works are to be carried out according to SNiP 3.06.04-91. No reinforcement shall be
brought on to the site or used without a manufacture certificate certifying that it complies with
requirements. Any change or substitution in the category class, diaMetre, or type of the steel,
required by the Drawings or Technical Specification must be agreed by the Engineer.
Before use, all reinforcement must be cleaned of rust, mud, dust and grease, Lap joints of
reinforcing bars are to be executed by overlapping by a length of at least 30 bar diaMetres and
in compliance with requirements of the Technical Specification.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
179
 Where the welding of reinforcement and built-in elements is unavoidable the work shall be
executed in accordance with the requirements of GOST 14098-95. Welding of reinforcement
shall be avoided wherever possible and shall not be carried out without the explicit permission
of the Engineer.

604.04. Concrete Works

Concrete mixing, transportation and casting, as well as concrete curing works are to be carried
out in accordance with the requirements of this Specification, GOST 26633-91 and SNiP
3.06.04-91.
No concrete mixture which has lost its required workability shall be used. It is not permissable to
improve the concrete workability by adding additional water into the mixed concrete.
Any defects on exposed surfaces after removing formwork will be made good by smoothing with
sand cement mortar if the Engineer approves. If the defect is too serious for such approval the
Contractor shall remove the defective work and .replace it at his own cost.

604.05. General conditions.

Concrete for the wall will be placed in lifts no higher than 1,5 m.
Walls will be provided with expansion joints where directed or instructed by the Engineer. The
expansion joints will be made of soft wood boards treated with preservatives.
The drainage surround will be made of crushed granite gravels and shall conform to the outlines
shown on the Drawings.
Walls and drains shall be constructed in conformity with the Drawings.

604.06. Acceptance of work

The works will be accepted under the terms of chapter 002 providing that they have been
constructed entirely in conformance to the plans and specifications pertaining to the segment
involved and are approved by the Engineer.
Measurement
Wall construction shall be measured in cubic metres of concrete. The measurement thus made
shall cover the whole of the works involved in constructing the walls including any necessary
structural excavation for construction clearance, concrete, formwork, reinforcement, expansion
joints, curing and all other associated works.
Provision of the drainage material behind the walls including all materials shall be measured in
Metres of drain instructed or actually installed whichever is the less.
Where pipe drains are required behind walls or other structures they shall be measured in
Metres of drain instructed or actually installed whichever is the less.
The measurement of drainage shall include for all works of whatsoever nature required to install
the drainage material and/or pipe complete as shown in the drawings or instructed by the
Engineer.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

180
 under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

181
 7. ROAD MARKING AND SIGNING
CHAPTER 701. PERMANENT TRAFFIC CONTROL
701.01. Introduction
This work consists of constructing permanent traffic control signs, supports, kilometre and
marker posts and any other required markers.

701.02. Materials
Material shall conform to the following:
• All sign panels shall be manufactured according to SM GOST R52290:2009.
• Posts are to be manufactured according to Typical Album Serial # 3.503.1-89.
• Concrete to be according to Section 504.

701.03. Generalities
Furnish traffic control devices according to SM GOST R52289:2009, Technical Methods of
Organizing Traffic Movement. Submit the sign list, details of non-standard signs and details of
all marker posts for approval to the Engineer before ordering. The design of traffic signs and
their installation shall be approved by the Road Police.

701.04. Sign Supports

Sign locations and marker post locations as shown on the drawings may be changed in
agreement with the Engineer to fit the field conditions. Determine the lengths of posts at time of
setting out.
Drive new supports (posts) with a suitable driving head or set supports in drilled or punched
holes on foundation according to typical Album (standard drawings) 3.503.9-80.
Existing supports (posts) have to be thoroughly cleaned and painted with an approved zinc rich
epoxy prime, followed by two coats undercoat and one finishing coat of an approved paint
system.
Construct concrete footing according to Section 504.

701.05. Sign Panels

Road sign panels to be installed on posts in accordance with Album # 3.503.9-80.
Mounting of individual signs consisting of prefabricated panels may be made at the place of
installations.
Do not field drill holes in any part of the panel. Use anti-theft fasteners where possible. Paint all
bolt heads, screw heads and washers that are exposed on the sign face. Match the colour of
the paint to the colour of the background area at the point where the fitting is exposed.
If a sign message is not applicable at the time of erection, completely cover the face of the sign
with an opaque material.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

182
 Maintain the covering in good condition until the message becomes applicable. Do not use
adhesive tape on the face of a sign.
Repair or replace damaged parts including reflective sheeting.
701.06. Marker Posts and Kilometre Posts
Marker posts and kilometre posts shall be constructed and installed at the correct locations in
accordance with the standard drawings and appropriate national standards.

701.07. Works Acceptance

The work will be accepted for payment providing that it has been built in conformance with the
drawings and specifications pertaining to the segment involved and is approved by the
Engineer.
Measurement
Sign installations will be measured by Pieces. A sign installation includes the support. Different
items will be used for significantly different signs.
Each sign in a multiple configuration will be measured.
Road side marker posts and kilometre posts will be measured by Pieces.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and certified by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.
Payment will be made under some or all of the items below:

No. Item Unit of Measure

Install new signs on metallic gantry frame RMG-3M,
70101 Pieces
including concrete foundation
70102 Install new supports

70102.1 Metal support SKM 2.35 Pieces

70102.2 Metal support SKM 2.40 Pieces

70103 Install new marker posts Pieces

70104 Install new kiloMetre posts Pieces

70105 Install new signs on new supports

70105.01 Install new signs on new poles Type A 900 Pieces

70105.02 Install new signs on new poles Type B 700 Pieces

70105.03 Install new signs on new poles Type B 900 Pieces

70105.04 Install new signs on new poles Type D 700 Pieces

70105.05 Install new signs on new poles Type D 900 Pieces

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
183
 70105.06 Install new signs on new poles Type BH 700x350 Pieces

70105.07 Install new signs on new poles Type BH 600x900 Pieces

70105.08 Install new signs on new poles Type BH 930x700 Pieces

70105.09 Install new signs on new poles Type BH 2500x510 Pieces

70105.10 Install new signs on new poles Type BH 2500x680 Pieces

70105.11 Install new signs on new poles Type BH 2500x1500 Pieces

70105.12 Install new signs on new poles Type BH 3000x1020 Pieces

70105.13 Install new signs on new poles Type BH 3000x1500 Pieces

CHAPTER 702. PERMANENT ROAD MARKINGS

702.01. Introduction
This Section covers the technical conditions and requirements for road marking, in compliance
with SM GOST R 51256:2009, SM GOST R 52575:2011 and technical requirements for traffic
on public roads.
For safety reason, road marking should be necessarily performed using fine beads for night-
time visibility.
Permanent marking lines are markings with a warranted service life and are performed using
material of white colour.
Temporary marking lines are markings with no warranted service life and are performed, as a
rule, using material of yellow colour.

702.02. Materials
a) General
The material to be used for road marking and striping shall be an approved road marking paint
applied to the pavement by mechanical means and reflectorised by the application of glass
beads (ballotini) sprayed onto the wet paint during the application process.
Following application and drying, the material shall produce an adherent reflectorised stripe of
specified thickness and width capable of resisting wear by traffic.
1) Air drying paint based on organic solvent of white or yellow colour, forming a
membrane when it gets dry.
2) Air drying paint based on solvent and water (ecological), of white or yellow
colour, forming a membrane when it gets dry.
3) Air drying paint of plastic type based on solvent and water (ecological), of
white colour.
4) Cold applied material of 2 components

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

184
 5) Hot applied thermoplastic, applied at temperatures between 180°C and 200°C, at
thicknesses between 2000 – 4000 μm, on newly laid or old bituminous surfaces, with
no distress, on cement concrete surfaces using a primer, or on top of specific types
of marking paint. This kind of material is used in the form of a membrane continuous
marking or in the form of a structure of different patterns, having a strong rumble
effect.
Thermoplastic materials ensure visibility during day-time and night-time, during dry
weather and rainy weather. These products contain glass beads, but for a better
reflectory effect after application small beads are applied on the surface of the
marking.
The quality of these products and hardening time is determined based on data
sheets supplied by manufacturer, minimal life time being of 2 years.
6) Plant produced products for road marking, consisting of elements, which are to be
assembled and are hot applied, of 3000 µm thickness, on newly laid or old
bituminous surfaces, in good condition, on top of thermoplastic in good condition and
on top of cement concrete surfaces using primer.
These products have embedded beads, but for a better reflectory effect after application glass
beads are used.

These marking products ensure visibility during day-time and night-time, during dry weather and
rainy weather.
These marking products shall also create a rumble effect.

Note: Reflectory Coefficient, luminance, and colour range defined by chromatic

coordinates for road marking, white and yellow, will be as stimulated in
SM GOST R 51256:2009.

Fine or coarse glass beads may be used as such, but also in a mixture with beads for skid-
resistance.
b) Road Paint
Paint shall meet the requirements of SM GOST R51256:2009 for Ready-Mixed White and
Yellow Traffic Paints. The drying time shall not be more than 30 minutes.
All paint shall be shipped in strong containers plainly marked with the weight per gallon, the
volume of paint content in gallons, the colour, lot, batch and code Pieces. A true Statement of
the % composition of the pigment, the proportion of pigment to vehicle, and the name and
address of the manufacturer also shall be shown.
Any paint which, although inspected and approved at the point of manufacture, hardens or livers
in the containers so that it cannot be readily broken up with a paddle to a smooth, uniform
painting consistency, will be rejected. Any paint too thick for proper brush application will be
rejected, even though it conforms to these Specifications in all other respect. Paint shall be
used as supplied; under no circumstances will thinning of paint be permitted.
All paints shall be delivered to the project completely mixed, and ready to be used without
additional oil or thinner.
c) Colour

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

185
 The thermoplastic material shall be available white colour and, if required by the Drawings, in
yellow.
(i) White - the colour of white markings shall match the colour No. 00E55 of BS 4800.
Pigment shall be Titanium Dioxide complying with BS 1851.
(ii) Yellow - the colour of yellow markings shall match the colour No. 08E51 of BS 4800.
d) Glass Beads
Fine or coarse beads, anti-skidding beads must be compliant with SR-EN-1423/A1:2004. The
quantity of beads to be used shall be as directed by the Employer’s Representative on the basis
of demonstration tests to be done by the Contractor but shall not be less than 0.8
kgm/litre of paint.
e) Anti-skid surface treatments
Anti-skid surface treatments shall consist of high-friction calcined bauxite aggregate applied to
surfaces in a hot thermoplastic resin screed.
Anti-skid aggregates will comply with the requirements of EN 1423.
f) Transverse Rumble Strips
Transverse rumble strips shall consist of thermoplastic markings immediately adjacent to village
name plates
The rumble strips shall comply with the requirements of SM SR 1848-7, 2013 and be formed in
white colour.

g) Test Certificates
The Contractor shall submit, for each consignment of paint and of ballotini delivered to site, the
Manufacturer's certificate to show that the materials comply in all respects with the relevant
product specifications.
At least 21 days before starting pavement marking application, the Contractor shall furnish a
written copy to the Engineer of the marking manufacturer′s recommendations for use. A field
demonstration may be required to verify the adequacy of recommendations.
Marking material shall be transported in appropriate containers plainly marked with the following
information as appropriate for the material being furnished:
• Manufacturer′s name and address
• Name of product
• Lot/batch Piecess
• Color
• Net weight and volume of contents
• Date of manufacture
• Date of expiration
• Statement of contents,
• Mixing proportions and instructions if mixing of components is required
• Safety information.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

186
 702.03. Application of Road Markings
a) Preservation of Existing Marking Patterns
Where existing and final pavement marking locations are identical, stake the limits of all existing
pavement markings (no-passing zones, edge stripes, etc.) before any pavement work. Upon
completion of the final surface course, establish line limits for the new pavement for approval
before marking. Establish markings according to SM GOST R51256:2009.
b) Weather Limitations
Road marking material shall not be applied to a damp surface or when the relative humidity
exceeds 80%, or at temperatures lower than 100°C, or when in the opinion of the Engineer,
wind strength is such that it may adversely affect the application operations.
c) Mechanical Equipment for Application
The equipment shall consist of an apparatus to clean the surfaces, a mechanical road painting
machine and all additional hand-operated equipment necessary to complete the work. The
mechanical road marking machine shall be capable of painting at least two lines simultaneously
and shall apply the paint to a uniform film thickness at the rate of application as specified. The
machine shall be so designed that it will be capable of painting the traffic markings to a uniform
width with sides within the tolerances specified hereinafter, without the paint running or
splashing. The machine shall further be capable of painting lines of different widths by
adjustment of the spray jets on the machine or by means of additional equipment attached to
the machine. The machine shall be equipped to spray ballotini onto the wet paint during the
laying operation at the required rate as agreed with the Engineer.
The machine shall be capable of spraying at a speed of not less than 5.0 km/h.
d) Surface Preparation
Traffic markings shall be applied to bituminous surfaces only after sufficient time has elapsed to
ensure that damage will not be caused to the surface by volatile substances evaporating from
the bituminous surfacing and after the surface has been sufficiently trafficked to expose an
appreciable proportion of aggregate in the surface. In no case shall traffic paint markings be
applied until at least 2 weeks after the completion of the bituminous surfacing or any longer
period required by the Engineer.
Before the material is applied, the surface shall be clean and dry and completely free from soil,
grease, oil, acid or any other material which will be detrimental to the bond between the marking
material and the surface. The portions of the surface where the marking is to be applied shall be
properly cleaned by means of watering, brooming or compressed air if required.
Where road markings are to be applied on a concrete pavement, all laitance and loose curing
compound shall be removed. Particular care shall be taken to expose a surface of fresh
concrete on all areas where road studs are to be fixed.
e) Setting Out of Road Markings
The lines, symbols, figures or marks shall be set out by means of paint spots of the same colour
as that of the proposed final lines and marks. These spot marks shall be at such intervals as will
ensure that the traffic markings can be accurately applied, and in no case shall they be more
than 1.5 m from each other. Normally, spots of approximately 10 mm in diaMetre should be
sufficient.
The dimensions and positions of traffic marking shall be as shown on the Drawings or as
specified in the national regulations for traffic signs and markings.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

187
 After spotting, the positions of the proposed road marking such as dotted lines and starting and
finishing points of barrier lines are to be indicated on the road. These pre-markings must be
approved by the Engineer prior to the commencement of any marking operations.
The positions and outlines of special markings are to be produced in chalk on the finished road
and must be approved by the Engineer before they are applied. The use of approved templates
will be permissible on condition that the positioning of the marking is approved by the Engineer
before application is commenced.
The position of road studs shall be marked out on the road and shall be approved by the
Engineer before they are fixed in position.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all setting out of road marking as agreed with the
Engineer.

702.04. Construction Requirement

The road marking material shall be applied as figures, signs, letters, symbols, broken or
unbroken lines or other marks, as shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
The marking material shall be applied by means of a machine; it shall be applied in one layer.
Before the road marking machine is used on the permanent works, the satisfactory working of
the machine shall be demonstrated on a suitable site which is not part of the permanent works.
Adjustment to the machine shall be followed by further testing. Only when the machine has
been correctly adjusted and approved by the Engineer may the machine be used on the
permanent work. The operator shall be experienced in the use of the machine. The rate of
application shall be checked and adjusted if necessary before application on a large scale is
commenced and daily thereafter.
Where two or three lines are required next to each other, the lines shall be applied
simultaneously by the same machine. Before and during application, in storage, preparation,
mixing and application, the marking material shall be treated at all times in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. Paint shall be applied without the addition of thinners.
Where, under special circumstances, painting is done by hand, it shall be applied in two layers,
and the second layer shall not be applied before the first layer has dried out sufficiently. As most
road marking paint reacts with the bitumen surface of the road, the paint is to be applied with
only one stroke of the brush or roller at any one point on the road.
Ordinary road marking paint shall be applied at a nominal rate of 0.42 l/m2, or as directed by the
Engineer, and proprietary brand paints shall be applied at the rates specified by the
manufacturer subject to the approval of the Engineer who may require higher rates of
application following field trials. Thermoplastic road marking material shall be applied at a
nominal rate of 5 kg/m2 on asphalt concrete and 6 kg/m2 on surface dressing.
Retro-reflective glass beads shall be applied by means of a suitable machine forming a part of
or attached to the road marking machine immediately after the application of the paint in one
continuous operation. The rate of application of the beads shall be 0.8 kg/litre paint or such
other rate as is specified in the contract or agreed with the Engineer. Machines which apply the
beads by means of gravity only shall not be used. The beads shall be sprayed onto the paint
layer.
Each layer of marking shall be continuous over the whole area being marked.
Apply pavement markings in the direction of traffic according to SM GOST R51256:2009. Apply
all markings to provide a clean – cut and workmanlike appearance by day or night.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

188
 702.05. Protection
After the application, the traffic markings shall be protected against damage by traffic or other
causes. The Contractor is responsible for the erection, placing and removal of all warning
boards, flags, cones, barricades and other protection measures which may be necessary.
Marked areas shall be protected from traffic until the markings are dried to no-tracking
condition. The Contractor shall remove all tracking marks, spilled marking material, markings in
unauthorized areas, and any defective markings.

702.06. Tolerances
Road traffic markings shall be applied with an accuracy complying with the tolerances given
below:
a) Width
The width of lines and other markings shall not deviate from the specified width by
more than 5%.
b) Position
The position of lines, letters, figures, arrows, retro-reflective road studs and other
markings shall not deviate from the true position specified by more than 20 mm.
c) Alignment of Markings
The alignment of any edge of a longitudinal line shall not deviate from the true
alignment by more than 10 mm in 15 Metre.
d) Broken Lines
The length of segments, both of line and of break of broken longitudinal lines shall
not deviate from the specified length by more than 150 mm.
In broken lines, the length of segments and the gap between segments shall be as
indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Lines lying on curves, whether broken or unbroken, shall not consist of chords but
shall follow the correct radius.
702.07. Faulty Workmanship or Materials
If any materials not complying with the requirements are delivered to the Site or used in the
Works, or if any sub-standard work is carried out, such material or work shall be removed,
replaced or repaired as required by the Engineer, at the Contractor's own cost. Rejected traffic
markings and paint or marking material that has been splashed or has dripped onto the
surfacing, kerbs, structures or other such surfaces shall be removed by the Contractor at his
own cost, in such a way that the markings or spilt paint will not show up again later and the
underlying bituminous surfacing is not damaged in any way.

702.08. Works Acceptance

The work will be accepted for payment providing that it has been executed in conformance to
the drawings and specifications pertaining to the segment involved and is approved by the
Engineer.
Measurement

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

189
 Road marking lines shall be measured by the Metre for each width of line and words and
symbols shall be measured by Pieces or by the area of marking. Alternatively the complete road
markings may be measured by the actual area of marking required to be applied expressed in
square metres.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter including the cost of any priming coat required to comply with
the manufacturers specifications, paint, cleaning, application, ballotini, stencils, setting out,
temporary signs, barriers, all traffic control and making good.
Payment will be made under the item below:
Unit of
No. Item
Measure
Road markings, thermoplastic
Full line (centre line, shoulders) passed through
70201 Square Metre
(Type 1.1.1), width 0.15 m, white
Full line (centre line, shoulders) passed through,
70202 Metre
width 0.15 m, white or yellow
70202.01 Road marking Type 1.3; , width 0.15 m, white Square Metre
Road marking Type 1.5; a discountinuous line with
70202.02 the ratio of segments and intervals 1:3, with 0.15 square metre
m, white
Road marking Type 1.6; a discountinuous line with
70202.03 the ratio of segments and interval 3:1, width 0.15 Square Metre
m, white
Road marking Type 1.7; a discountinuous line with
70202.04 the ratio of segments and interval 1:1, width 0.15 Square Metre
m, white
Road marking Type 1.8; a discountinuous line with
70202.05 the ratio of segments and interval 1:3, width 0.2 m, Square Metre
white
70203 Arrows, letters, etc.

70203.02 Road marking Type 1.13 Square metre

Road marking Type 1.16.1, Type 1.16.2, Type
70203.03 Square metre
1.16.3
70203.04 Road marking Type 1.17.1 Suare metre

70203.05 Road marking Type 1.18 Square metre

70203.06 Road ,arking Type 1.19 Square metre

70203.07 Road ,arking Type 1.20 Square metre

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

190
 Unit of
No. Item
Measure
70203.08 Road ,arking Type 1.27 Square metre

CHAPTER 703. SIDEWALKS

703.01. Introduction
This type of works consists of constructing new sidewalks and/or surfacing the existing
sidewalks with new asphalt concrete or cement concrete as directed.

703.02. Materials
Materials, items, and structures used for the works under this Section should meet the following
requirements.
• Sand asphalt concrete mix and materials SM STB 1033:2008.
• Aggregate for base of sidewalk SM GOST 8267-93.
• Ballast walk subgrade GOST 23735-79.
• Stairway structures according to the project.
• Cement-sand mixture according to the project.
• Concrete Paving Blocks according to the project.
Material for concrete sidewalk (if concrete is used for constructing sidewalks) should be in
accordance with Chapter 504 and, where kerbs are used, they shall be in compliance with
Chapter 505.

703.03. Construction of side walk

The works relating to constructing new sidewalks and/or new asphalt concrete surfacing are to
be performed at the same time as pavements of the main roadways are being installed. When
kerbs are required between the sidewalk and the roadways, placing kerbs should be performed
before constructing the upper pavement layers and sidewalks.
Earth works relating to sidewalks should be in accordance with Chapter 201.
New side-walk pavement consisting of ballast subgrade, macadam foundation and sand asphalt
concrete mix surface for sidewalks should be carried out in accordance with Chapter 306 for the
macadam base and Chapter 307 for the asphalt surface. The contractor’s equipment should be
capable of constructing side-walk pavement of design width 1.50 m.

703.04. Repair of sidewalk

Where directed by the Engineer the Contractor shall repair existing sidewalks by removing
loose asphalt material and resurfacing with a 40 mm layer of new sand asphalt mix for
sidewalks.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

191
 703.05. Works Acceptance
The works under this Section are accepted in accordance with Clause 002 and providing that
they are carried out according to the Project requirements, Drawings and Specifications and
receive the Engineer’s approval.
Measurement
Works relevant to construction of new sidewalks and asphalt concrete surfacing will be
measured (at design thickness of pavement courses or by actual thickness accepted, whichever
is the lower) by area in accordance with the units designated in the bill item. Works relating to
construction of stairways will be measured by length of stairway.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule.
The payment under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all.

No. Item Unit of Measure

Construction of stair for up to bus stop (according
70301 Pieces
drawings)

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

192
 8. ENGINEERING SERVICES
CHAPTER 801. ARRANGEMENT OF POWER LINES. ROAD
ILLUMINATION
801.01. Introduction
The chapter concerns, the rearrangement of aerial power lines of 10 kV, the arrangement of
aerial power lines on the same hanger of 10 kV and 0.4 KV, arrangement of external lightning.
The Contractor is fully responsible for the collaboration with any other organizations, which are
situated within the limits of the deviation line.

801.02. Materials
The materials used for protection or deviation of the installations belonging to one of the
organizations must correspond to the existing installations agreed by the representative of the
given organization.

801.03. Working conditions

Before starting the work the Contractor must notify the organizations owning the installations
about the area of the site and to ask them to mark the position of any installation in the
construction area.
The Contractor is fully responsible for any deterioration of the installation during the construction
period and he must repair it. Also if the owner organization requires, the Contractor shall make
available machines or/and the staff needed for the reparation of deteriorated installation, at the
same time paying the whole cost of the work.
If within the limits of the construction site exist networks, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a proposal, regarding the transfer of these networks outside the site. The proposal
must contain the due date, plans and details of the transfer on the new location, details of all
materials to be used and the necessary certificates proving the compliance of the quality of
materials with the certifications and drawings of networks owners, regarding the protective
devices and the quality of materials, which will by used. After the network, placing on the new
location the network owner must inspect the works before backfill.
Directed by the Engineer, the Contractor takes the necessary measures to protect the
installation against frost. The service trenches and the backfill must be done in accordance with
Chapter 203.
Measurements
The arrangement of aerial power lines of 10 kV and 0,4 kV, is measured in Pieces of foots and
in linear Metres. The arrangement of external lightning is measured in Pieces of lights.
Payment
Accepted work volumes are remunerated by unitary job prices of the Contract. The payment
represents the full amount of remuneration for works, described in this chapter. The payment is
made according to following items.

No. Item Unit of Measure

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

193
 No. Item Unit of Measure
The arrangement of aerial power lines of 10 kV
80101 Amenajarea liniilor electrice aeriene de tensiunea inalta
10 kV
Installation of poles L-10.5 m for aerial high voltage line
80101.2 Pieces
of 10 kV ( included ) (as per drawnings)

CHAPTER 802. ARANGEMENT OF COMMUNICATION LINES

802.01. Introduction
The chapter concerns, the arrangement of aerial communication lines, the arrangement of
underground communication lines, protection of underground communication lines and
underground magistral gas pipes. The Contractor is fully responsible for the collaboration with
any other organizations, which are situated within the limits of the deviation line.

802.02. Materials
The materials used for repair or deviation of the installations belonging to one of the
organizations must correspond to the existing installations agreed by the representative of the
given organization.

802.03. Working conditions

Before starting the work the Contractor must notify the organizations owning the installations
about the area of the site and to ask them to mark the position of any installation in the
construction area.
The Contractor is fully responsible for any deterioration of the installation during the construction
period and he must repair it. Also if the owner organization requires, the Contractor shall make
available machines or/and the staff needed for the reparation of deteriorated installation, at the
same time paying the whole cost of the work.
If within the limits of the construction site exist networks, the Contractor shall submit to the
Engineer a proposal, regarding the transfer of these networks outside the site. The proposal
must contain the due date, plans and details of the transfer on the new location, details of all
materials to be used and the necessary certificates proving the compliance of the quality of
materials with the certifications and drawings of networks owners, regarding the protective
devices and the quality of materials, which will by used. After the network placing on the new
location the network owner must inspect the works before backfill.
Directed by the Engineer, the Contractor takes the necessary measures to protect the
installation against frost.
The service trenches and the backfill must be done in accordance with Chapter 203.
Measurements
The arrangement of aerial communication lines, is measured in Pieces of foots and in linear
Metres.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

194
 The arrangement of underground communication lines, protection of underground
communication lines in linear Metres.
The arrangement of underground magistral gas pipes in linear Metres.

Payment
Unit of
No. Item
Measure
Arangement of underground comunication optic cable (as per
80201 linear Metres
drawings)
80202 Arrangement of aerial communication line including poles

80202.1 Arangement of aerial communication line (as per drawings) linear Metres
Arrangement of underground magistral gas pipes (as per
80203 linear Metres
drawings)

CHAPTER 803. BUS STOPS

Existing Bus Stops shall be replaced/ rehabilitated at the same location.
Bus stops, incl. shelter shall be constructed according to the relevant drawings and/or as
instructed by the Engineer.

No. Item Unit of Measure

Construction of complete shelter for bus stop as shown on
80301 Pieces
drawings, including all ancillary work

CHAPTER 804. CROSSING OF RAILWAY LINES (NOT USED)

“Crossing” means any railway crossing of a road at grade or any road crossing of a railway at
grade, but does not include road or railway approaches to a crossing surface.
No works shall be done in the vicinity of railway lines without involvement of the - Railway
Department Moldova / Chisinau - .
Work performed on the railway right-of-way shall be performed without interfering with the
movement of trains. The Contractor shall prevent accidents, damage, or unnecessary delay or
interference with the railway trains or other property.
The Contractor is responsible for arranging liaison with the Moldavian State Railway and
obtaining all required approvals and permits. The works shall be executed either by the -
Railway Department Moldova / Chisinau - . or by a contractor appointed by the - Railway
Department Moldova / Chisinau - .
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
195
 Before the start of any work in the railway right-of-way respective technical details shall be
clarified by the Contractor with the - Railway Department Moldova / Chisinau - and the
respective agreed details of the railway crossing work have to be submitted to the Engineer for
approval.
Unless otherwise ordered by the - Railway Department Moldova / Chisinau - , when a crossing
is constructed, the crossing surface shall have a width of the width of the carriageway and
shoulders, sidewalks plus 0.5 m on each side of the carriageway and shoulders, sidewalks, as
measured at the approaches to the crossing, whichever is the greater.
The crossing pad shall be constructed of such material as the - Railway Department Moldova /
Chisinau - may require and compatible with the current international state-of-the-art practices.
Roadway markings and signing shall be provided at the crossing in accordance with the
relevant standards and regulations in Moldova.
Railroad signage at crossings shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the -
Railway Department Moldova / Chisinau - .

CHAPTER 805. ANIMAL CROSSINGS (NOT USED)

Underpasses “Pedestrian (Animal) Crossings”, reinforced concrete structures (width = 2.5 m,
height = 2.00 m), requirements and construction as box culverts, to be constructed to allow
animals to underpass roads.

9. LANDSLIDE REMEDIAL WORKS (NOT USED)

CHAPTER 901. EARTHWORK
901.01. Introduction
In general the earthworks required for landslip remedial works will be executed in accordance
with the requirements of Chapters 102 and 201. Because of the nature of the work and the
additional control of materials required, measurement and payment for the works will be made
under the items listed below which are specific to slip remedial works.

901.02. Materials
Materials for embankment construction shall comply with the requirements of SNiP 2.05.02-85
and with the provisions of chapter 201 and this chapter generally.

901.03. Excavation
Topsoil shall be stripped and stockpiled for reuse in accordance with the provisions of chapter
102. Material excavated from the top of the existing road embankment shall be excavated to the
depths shown on the Drawings and shall be used for the provision of new counterberms at the
toe of the embankment.
Slipped material shall be excavated to the shapes, lines and levels shown on the Drawings or
directed by the Engineer. Slip material shall be classified as unsuitable unless specifically

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

196
 directed otherwise and shall be run to spoil in accordance with the provisions of chapter 201.
Any material classified as suitable shall either be used in the construction of counterberms and
other miscellaneous embankment works in the slip area or shall be run to spoil as surplus to
requirements.
Slip material is removed to disposal and it is not used rather than for fill of ravines, in agreement
with authorities responsible for use of land.

901.04. Excavation in borrow pits

The material required for the construction of replaced road embankment shall be supplied by
the Contractor from borrow pits, in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 201.

901.05. Construction of embankment on a slope more than 1:3

In order to construct new embankment on slopes exceeding 1:3 or where indicated on the
Drawings, benches shall be cut. The dimensions of benches shall generally be in accordance
with the details shown in the Drawings; however, variations to the dimensions of benches may
be permitted by agreement with the Engineer to facilitate excavation works and use by
construction traffic. Whether modified or not benches shall always be continuous; i.e. the
vertical face of one bench will intersect with the horizontal step of the next bench. Material from
benches may be used in counterberms and miscellaneous embankment if suitable.

901.06. Embankment construction

Embankment construction and compaction shall generally be in accordance with the
requirements of chapter 201. Note that filling to the top of the road embankment must be placed
in conjunction with layers of geotextile reinforcing fabric as shown in the Drawings.
Counterberms and other miscellaneous areas of embankment in the slip area shall be formed
using material excavated from the top of the existing road embankment and from any other
material arising from slip and bench excavation which is classified as suitable for this use.
Prior to placing the new material for the top of the road embankment the upper surface of the
excavated material on which the new upper embankment is to be constructed shall be deeply
scarified and thoroughly compacted to a depth of not less than 400 mm. After compaction the
density of the compacted soil for the full depth shall be not less than 95% of the maximum
density at optimum moisture content.

901.07. Geotextiles
Geotextile reinforcement to embankments and geotextiles to drainage works, as specified in
chapter 902, shall be placed as shown in the drawings.

901.08. Subsurface Drainage

Subsurface drains shall be installed as shown in the drawings and shall be constructed as
specified in Chapter 905.
Manholes to subsurface drains shall be provided as shown on the drawings.
Subsurface drains shall be measured and paid as set out in Chapter 905.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
197
 901.09. Finishing of Slopes
Slopes shall be trimmed and finished true to line and level in accordance with the requirements
of chapter 204. After shaping, slopes and other surfaces designated for revegetation shall be
spread with topsoil and seeded or planted with grass and shrubs in accordance with the
requirements of chapter 204. The works of trimming, top soiling and seeding or grassing shall
be measured and paid under the relevant items of the Earthworks Bill.

901.010. Subgrade
The top of the finished embankment shall be finished to subgrade standard in accordance with
the requirements of chapter 201.13 to form the base for the reconstructed pavement.
Measurement
The various items of earthworks under slip remedial earthworks shall be measured throughout
in net cubic Metres except for the compaction of embankment prior to placing new material
which shall be measured in square Metres. The works of trimming, top soiling and seeding or
grassing shall be measured and paid under the relevant items of the Earthworks Bill.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule.
The payment under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all
works indicated in the present chapter.

CHAPTER 902. GEOTEXTILE FABRICS (NOT USED)

902.01. Introduction
The works under this chapter comprise the provision and placing of geotextile fabric for the
reinforcement of embankment soils and for use as filter media in drainage works.

902.02. Materials
GEOTEXTILE Type 1 Geotextile for transverse subsurface drainage
This must be a mechanically bound material in a continuous way of 100% polypropylene, UV
stabilized, of highly resistant fibres of an approved inert material, manufactured by a specialized
producer of geosynthetical products as per ISO, and compliant with the following requirements:

Properties [ Standard ] UM ParaMetres

Tensile strength, MD/CD [EN ISO 10319] kN/m 16/16 minimum

Elongation at max.load, MD/CD [EN ISO 1031] % 100/40 minimum

Static puncture strength (CBR-test) [EN ISO 12236] N 2.350 minimum

Cone drop test ( hole-Ø) [EN ISO 13433] mm 22 maximum.

Permeability vertical [EN ISO 11058 - Δh = l/m2s 90 maximum

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

198
 Properties [ Standard ] UM ParaMetres
50 mm] (mm/s)

Characteristic opening O 90 [EN ISO 12956] mμ 100 maximum

The material used for construction of transverse subsurface drainage must be the one
recommended by the producer. Before the material is procured or supplied to the site to be
used for construction of transverse subsurface drainage, the Engineer must be submitted for
approval the patterns of material and the test results for the proposed patterns.
GEOTEXTILE Type 2. Geotextile used as a separating membrane, protection membrane
for embankments and a filter membrane for protection of ravine slopes and bottom and
for protection against erosion caused by runoffs.
This must be a mechanically bound material in a continuous way of 100% polypropylene, UV
stabilized, of highly resistant fibres of an approved inert material, manufactured by a specialized
producer of geosynthetical products as per ISO, and compliant with the following requirements:

Properties [ Standard ] Unit ParaMetres

Tensile strength, MD/CD [EN ISO 10319] kN/m 29/30 minimum

Elongation at max.load, MD/CD [EN ISO 10319] % 100/40 minimum

Static puncture
[EN ISO 12236] N 4400 minimum
resistance (CBR-Test)
Cone drop test (hole-Ø) [EN ISO 13433] mm 13 maximum
l/m2s
Permeability vertical [EN ISO 11058 - Δh = 50mm] 55 maximum
(mm/s)
Opening size O 90 [EN ISO 12956] mμ 90 maximum

The material used for stabilization of fine soil must be the one recommended by the producer.
Before the material is procured or supplied to the site to be used for protection of embankments
and slopes, the Engineer must be submitted for approval the patterns of material and the test
results for the proposed patterns.
The embankments and slopes shall be protected against scours caused by runoffs as shown on
the Drawings.
Geocomposite Type 1 for road pavement as SAMI (Stress Absorbed Membrane
Interlayer)/
This must be a highly strong geocomposite material of continuous fibres of 100%
polypropylene, UV stabilized, mechanically bound, reinforced with glass fibres, and
manufactured by a specialized producer of geosynthetical products as per ISO.
The products used for road pavement must be compliant with the following requirements related
to physical and mechanical properties:

Properties [ Standard ] Unit ParaMetres

Tensile Strength EN ISO 10319 kN/m 75 / 75

Strength at 2% strain EN ISO 10319 kN/m 51 / 51

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
199
 Properties [ Standard ] Unit ParaMetres

Bitumen retention ASTM D 6140-97 kg/m² 1.1

E-Modulus MPa 81 000

Melting point EN ISO 3146 °C up to 400°C

The products to be used for road pavement, supplied by the producer, must be accompanied by
a Quality Certificate and Method Statement, which must be submitted to the Engineer. The
products must be supplied in protective packages against UV rays, abrasion and moisture.
Before the products are procured or supplied to the site to be used as a SAMI membrane for
road pavement, the Engineer must be submitted for approval the patterns of material and the
test results for the proposed patterns.
Filter Geocomposite Type 2 used for protection of banks, embankment slopes against
erosion caused by waves and streams.
This must be a mechanically bound material in a continuous way of 100% polypropylene, UV
stabilized, of 2 continuous layers of nonwoven geotextile: one filter layer and a second
protective layer against damage of the first layer, manufactured by a specialized producer of
geo-synthetical products as per ISO, and compliant with the following requirements:

Properties [ Standard ] Unit ParaMetres

Flow rate in the plan, 20 / 100 kPa [EN ISO 12958] 10-6 m²/s 4.0 / 1.1

[EN ISO 11058 - Δh = l/m2s

Permeability normal to the plane 60 maximum
50 mm] (mm/s)
Opening size O 90 [EN ISO 12956] mμ 80 maximum

Tensile strength, MD/CD [EN ISO 10319] kN/m 23/23 minimum

Elongation at max. load, MD/CD [EN ISO 10319] % 85/75 minimum

CBR puncture resistance [EN ISO 12236] N 3300 minimum

Cone drop test [EN ISO 13433] mm 13 maximum.

Before the products are procured or supplied to the site to be used as a filter membrane, the
Engineer must be submitted for approval the patterns of material and the test results for the
proposed patterns.
Drainage Geocomposite Type 3.
The geocomposite used as a draining membrane shall consist of a core material of high
permeability, obtained from extruded synthetic monofilaments polypropylene, twisted and bound
with 2 filter geotextiles, fixed on it at hot temperatures. The geocomposite will be placed in the
area of a subdrain pipe intended to capture the water and to convey it to the proper direction,
manufactured by a specialized producer of geosynthetical products as per ISO, and compliant
with the following requirements.

Properties [ Standard ] Unit ParaMetres

Thickness [ EN ISO 9863-1 ] mm Min 8

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

200
 Properties [ Standard ] Unit ParaMetres
Plane flow capacity - Soft/Rapid
i=1 (90grad) Load 20kPa 2,10
[EN ISO 12958 ] l/(m s
i=1 (90grad) Load 50kPa 2,00
i=1 (90grad) Load 100kPa 1,60
Opening size [EN ISO 12956] mμ 115 maximum

Tensile strength, MD/CD [EN ISO 10319] kN/m 6/7 minimum

CBR puncture resistance [EN ISO 12236] N 1125 minimum

Cone drop test [EN ISO 13433] mm 30 maximum

Before the products are procured or supplied to the site to be used as a filter membrane, the
Engineer must be submitted for approval the patterns of material and the test results for the
proposed patterns.
For slope protection and stability against erosiuns can be used confinement systems, as
Geocells and Polymat (a 3D anti-erosion mattress).
Geocell is a product of polyethylene material of a high density, used on slopes, road
embankment slopes, reducing hydraulic energy and limiting the stress inside and underneath
the cells, increasing the original strength, protecting the root systems, serving as a directional
means for the surface drainage, preventing the ravines, avoiding loss of moisture.
Polymat is a 3D mattress for erosion control of monofilament extruded polypropylene, UV
stabilized, used on abrupt slopes, preventing soil erosion, stabilizing the surface soil layer and
ensuring a permanent support required for growth of vegetation.
The products used for slope stability must be compliant with the following requirements, related
to physical and mechanical properties:
Geocell Confinement Systems

Properties ParaMetres

Cell Distance between Weld Seams 356 mm ( 2% )

Cell Wall Heights 100 mm

Cell Dimension (Expanded) 260 x 224 mm (±3%)

No. of Cells/m2 35

Polymat – randomly arranged monofilaments

Properties [ Standard ] Unit ParaMetres

Tensile Strength MD kN/m 1.8
EN ISO 10319
Elongation % 50

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

201
 Properties [ Standard ] Unit ParaMetres
Tensile Strength CD kN/m 1.0
EN ISO 10319
Elongation % 50
Voids content % 90

Mass per unit area EN ISO 9864 g/m2 560

Before the products are procured or supplied to the site to be used for slope stability, the
Engineer must be submitted for approval the patterns of material and the test results for the
proposed patterns.

902.03. Handling and Installation

Materials shall be handled and stored in accordance with instructions supplied by the producer.
Geotextile Type 1 shall be used for construction of transverse subsurface drainage. Geotextile
shall be placed into the excavated trench with gravel and ballast on top.
Geotextile must be not less than the length of the drainage and must be so wide as to wrap the
whole ballast fill as per Drawings.
Geotextile Type 2 used as a separating membrane and for embankment stability must be
placed on top of draining (capping) layer in the lay direction. Adjacent strips of reinforcement
shall be joined together using producer's approved jointing systems to provide the full strength
of the reinforcing mesh. Tensioning of the mesh across the embankment shall be in accordance
with the producer instructions. Prior to laying the separating and reinforcing mesh in place, the
working surface of the embankment shall have been completed to a smooth flat compacted. On
completion of the mesh layer the succeeding layer of fill (shoulder fill), approximately 150 mm in
thickness, shall be laid and the base course of crushed stone, which will be compacted. The fill
shall be at the OMC for compaction prior to placing. Shoulder fill at the land sliding side must be
wrapped with geotextile as per Drawings.
Geotextile Type 2 is also used as a filter membrane to protect the ravine slopes and bottom
against erosions caused by runoffs. It will be placed after finished slopes and bottom, and shall
be joint and fixed with an approved jointing system. A 500 mm thick layer of boulder stone of
200-400 mm sizes will be placed on top of geotextile.
Geocomposite Type 1 is used as a SAMI layer for reinforcement and against cracks. The use
of Geocomposite Type 1 is described in Chapter 303.
Geocomposite Filter Type 2 used as a filter material to protect the banks, embankment slopes
against erosion caused by waves and streams and must be laid on a finished surface, being
pinned or stapled to the slope. It will ensure stability of soil particles allowing at the same time
for water to freely drain. 500 mm thick layer of boulder stone of 200-400 mm sizes will be placed
on top of geotextile.
Drainage Geocomposite Type 3:
Main application of drainage geocomposite is that one used for vertical drainage. High drainage
capacity of the material coupled with a subdrainage pipe make it perfect to be used for draining
trenches, retaining walls, reinforced areas and stability soil interventions.
The use of Geocomposite Type 3 is described in Chapter 905.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

202
 Geocell Materials and Polymat Mattress serve as an improvement of planted slopes with
vegetation, increasing the rooting capacity, directing the draining waters on the surface of
numerous cells, which serve as a control against development of hollows.
Geocells and Polymat Mattress are used in accordance with instructions supplied by the
producer. If appropriate, the soil must be slightly compacted, removing the stones, roots and
other obstructions.

902.04. Acceptance of Works

Measurement
Geotextile and geocomposite fabrics shall be measured in square Metres of placed material. No
allowance will be made for overlaps, cutting, wastage, etc. and no additional payment will be
made for any special handling, storage or transport requirements; all such shall be included in
the basic rate.
There will be no special measurement and payment Geocomposite Type used as a SAMI for
road pavement or for the Drainage Geocomposite used for filter subdrains. These materials will
be included in the general measurement for SAMI layer according to Chapter 303, and Filter
Subdrains according to Chapter 605.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in the present chapter.

CHAPTER 903. ACCESS ROADS (NOT USED)

903.01. Introduction
The works in this chapter cover the construction of the temporary roadways for access to slip
areas.

903.02. Materials
Materials shall be at the Contractor’s option.
903.03. General Conditions
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements for necessary access to slip areas. He shall
construct such road ways and hard standings as he considers fit for the movement and
operation of his vehicles and equipment. He shall be solely responsible for locating and
acquiring/easing the required areas of lad for such accesses. Before undertaking construction of
such accesses he shall prepare carefully surveyed plans and submit them to the Engineer for
his approval. He shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the requirements of
all owners and tenants of land affected by his proposed accesses are satisfied with the
arrangements made and that there are no objections from any quarter, including the local
authorities, to his plans.
When the accesses are no longer required, the Contractor shall completely remove all traces of
the accesses and of his presence and shall restore the land to its original condition. The only
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
203
 exception to this requirement shall be where affected land owner(s) require the access (es) to
be left in place and where it can be clearly shown that the approval of the local authorities to
such retention of the access (es) has been granted.

903.04. Acceptance of Works

The roads are for the sole convenience of the Contractor. No formal acceptance is required until
the accesses are to be removed. Acceptance of removal will only be given when the Engineer is
satisfied that all traces of the accesses have been obliterated and the site(s) of such accesses
have been fully restored to their original condition or that they have been formally and officially
handed over to a third party with legal right to take them over and with the approval of the
relevant local authorities.
No taking over certificate will be issued until the access roads have been satisfactorily removed
or until they have been handed over and formally accepted in the eventuality that they are to
remain.
Measurement
The provision of access road(s) at the site of slip remedial works shall not be measured as they
are not required in our case.
Payment
The works executed as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rate
provided in the contract against the items shown in the bid schedule. The payment under this
item shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works indicated in the
present chapter.

Payment of the lump sum for provision of access road(s) shall be made in two parts. 60% of the
sum shall be paid when the Engineer is satisfied that the Contractor has completed construction
of the approved access roads to the approved standard. The remaining 40% shall be paid on
completion of the remedial works and when the Engineer is satisfied that the Contractor has
discharged all his obligations in respect of their removal or handover under the Contract.

CHAPTER 904. BORED PILES (NOT USED)

904.01. Introduction
The works covered by this chapter comprise the construction of a slide retaining structure
composed of a grid of bored piles linked at the top by a heavy reinforced concrete slab and
includes: boring the holes, installing the reinforcement cage, casting the piles and capping
connecting beam.
904.02. Materials
Reinforcing steel will be reinforcement Type A-I, and Type A-III conforming to GOST 5781-82 *
and rolled steel sheets conforming to GOST 103-76*.
Concrete for piles shall conform to GOST 26633-91*.
• The strength of the concrete shall exceed 110% of design strength.
• The cement proportion shall be 1.5-2 times more than design requirement.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

204
 • The water/cement ratio will not exceed 0.55 and the density of the finished concrete
shall be 2.45-2.55 t/m3.
• The required plasticity and cohesion of the concrete will be achieved through the
composition and if necessary, by the addition of plasticiser.
• The aggregate will be gravel or crushed stone with a maximum aggregate size
of 40 mm.
Concrete for other works shall conform to the requirements of GOST 26633-91* and SNiP
3.06.04-91.
Portland cement shall conform to requirements of GOST 10178-85*.

904.03. Piling
The Contractor shall carefully set out the required locations and levels of all piles complete with
well established reference points outside the area of the works which will be available
throughout the period of construction. The setting out shall be verified and approved by the
Engineer before any further works proceed.
Before drilling of pile holes, the Contractor shall have established a secure stable working
platform for his equipment at the designated location.
Before any drilling of any holes, the Contractor shall have on site the complete prefabricated
reinforcement cage required for those borings, ready for installed.
Drilling of pile holes shall be executed as rapidly as possible to minimise the possibility of
borehole collapse. The Contractor shall be responsible for taking all necessary measures to
avoid the collapse of boreholes based on the data available regarding ground water levels and
soil types shown in the Drawings. The contractor shall use temporary steel casing, drilling fluid,
or other measures to ensure that soil collapse does not occur.
If a pile location becomes unusable due to borehole collapse or any other reason associated
with the execution of the works and a rearrangement of the piling becomes necessary in
consequence, the contractor shall carry out any additional works required to implement such a
revised arrangement.
As boring proceeds, waste from the operation shall be removed from the site and disposed of in
accordance with the specification requirements. If the material is suitable it shall be run to store
and reserved for use in embankment, otherwise it shall be disposed of as spoil material. Any
slurry arising from the works shall not be discharged into watercourses but shall be settled until
liquids and solids can be disposed of separately.
On completion of the hole it shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer prior to placing of
the reinforcing cage. Reinforcing cages shall be checked prior to placing and marked by the
Engineer as checked and approved.
Concreting shall begin as soon as possible after cage placement and shall continue without
interruption until the casting is complete.
The concrete casting work will be done using a tremie pipe for placing concrete at depth and
with vibratory equipment for compaction and concrete flow. The work will be stopped only for
the removal of slurry, water or unsuitable concrete. In the top 3 metres of the piles additional
compaction will be provided using a poker vibrator. Concrete placement shall be carried out so
as not to move the reinforcement cage. The tremie pipe shall be raised gradually in stages such
that the end of the pipe is always at the level of the placed concrete

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

205
 904.04. Capping Beam
The rows of bored piles, together with any designated piles from previous operations on the
site, shall be connected with a substantial, in situ, reinforced concrete slab.
The dimensions, concrete and reinforcement of this slab shall be in accordance with the
drawings and the Specifications.
The construction of the capping slab shall include the building up and trimming of the ground
beneath the slab to form an adequate support at the correct level to act as a base on which to
place the slab and shall include the provision of an impervious membrane to isolate the fresh
concrete from the ground.
The works of the capping slab shall also include the cleaning, trimming and extension of all
protruding reinforcement of new and existing piles to suit the dimensional requirements of the
connecting slab and the details of the junction between piles and slab.

904.05. Acceptance of Works

The works will be accepted if they are in accordance with the Drawings and technical
specifications, to the approval of the Engineer and conform to the following tolerances.
The holes shall not deviate from the specified dimensions by more than:
• Depth +20 cm; - any unauthorized additional depth will be at Contractor’s cost,
• DiaMetre not less than nominal; any unauthorized additional width will be at
Contractor’s cost,
• Inclination of the vertical axis: not more than 2º from vertical;
• Pile location: not more than 75 mm from design location in any direction.
• Pile vertical elevation: not more than +25 mm - 75 mm.
The deviation of the reinforcement cage, taking into account the diaMetre of the bars will not
exceed:
 +10 mm length;
 +0.5 d distance between bars;
 0.1 d moved bars from the axis;
 +10 mm displacement of the cage axis against the pile axis.
Measurement
The whole work of the construction of bored piles shall be measured in linear Metres of pile at
the nominal dimensions authorized and shall include the boring of the hole, the disposal of
material, the reinforcement cage, the concrete and all associated works.
The construction of the connecting slab shall be measured in cubic Metres of concrete required
to construct the slab at the nominal dimensions authorized and shall include construction of the
base platform, impermeable membrane, formwork, reinforcement, concrete, curing and all
associated works.
Payment
The works executed as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rate
provided in the contract against the items shown in the bid schedule. The payment under these
items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works indicated in the
present chapter.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
206
 CHAPTER 905. FILTER DRAIN, MANHOLES, EXIT GULLY(NOT
USED)
905.01. The works include:
The works include: excavation the trench, construction of manholes, provision of a subdrain and
filter medium, backfilling, construction of the exit gully.

905.02. Materials shall be in accordance with:

 coarse sand - GOST 8736-93*
 crushed granite - GOST 8267-93*
 gravel mixed with sand - SM GOST 25607-2010
 manhole sections - GOST 3634-99
 Flexible draining pipes ∅120-200 - Compliance Certificate
 Geotextile as in Chapter 902.

905.03. Working Conditions

Before starting the excavation works of the trench setting out works should be performed first
(setting out of trench axis, CLs for manholes).
Excavation of trenches shall start from the owner part upwards (from the gully exit) using
excavator with buckets not more than 0.4 m, or using other similar equipment. Excavation
length for draining material must not exceed the distance between manholes. A part of soil will
be left for drainage screen; the surplus of material will be transported for stockpiling. Excavation
and backfilling shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 203.
A subbase layer of coarse sand shall be placed on the bottom of the trench, h=0.10 m giving a
shape of a concave curve for the pipes coupled with Drainage Geocomposite Type 3 according
to Chapter 902. The profile of the trench bottom shall be checked with a template, the bottom
gradient - with a leveller.
The coarse sand shall be supplied to the site with the trucks and be stockpiled along the trench
or slopes. The sand, as necessary, shall be pushed into the trench with the excavator bucket,
shall be spread with shovels on the bottom in 10 cm layer and shall be compacted by an
electrical compactor. Similarly with the bottom of the manhole.
The flexible subdrainage pipes and Drainage Geocomposite shall be supplied to the site with
the trucks and be stockpiled along the trench.
All the materials shall be checked for defects, no faulty materials shall be used.
The flexible subdrainage pipes and Drainage Geocomposite shall be coupled, wrapping one of
the Geocomposite strips around the flexible subdrainage pipes and pinning it to the pipes.
A galvanized 2-3 mm steel wire shall be inserted into the flexible pipes to be used for pipe
cleaning.
The coupled pipes with the Geocomposite shall be dropped into the trench, being manually
placed on the prior compacted bottom and checked for design gradient.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

207
 Coarse sand shall be used for filling the trench. Sand fill shall have 2/3H (1.05 m) of the trench
depth. The sand surface shall be manually levelled with shovels. Clay soil shall be placed on
top of draining fill layer, up to design levels, forming a screen (a lock) not less than 0.5 m.
Manholes shall be located wherever the drain changes direction or gradient. On straight sectors
of steady gradient, manholes shall be located at each 50 Metres.
In places for manholes, trenches shall be made wider and deeper by 0.5 m. Trench shoring
shall be used to protect the slopes against sloughing.
The bedding prepared in advance for foundation shall consist of crushed stone compacted
into the soil, on top of which will be strictly horizontally placed the foundation slab. On top of the
slab a layer of cement mortar shall be placed for the precast ring units, which will be installed on
top of mortar by a crane, checking its position to the level and line. Holes for the drainage pipes
are to be made beforehand in the lower part of the precast ring unit for manhole. After pipe
installation the joints between the manhole wall sections and the pipes are to be sealed using
cement mortar. As the manhole is constructed, a mortar-cement layer is placed on the upper
face of last ring fixed and the next ring is then set in place using a crane. The squeezed mortar
from the joints shall be removed and the joints shall be sealed. The gaps around the manhole
shall be filled with draining material and then with soil, being compacted in lifts not more than
30 cm.
The completed manhole barrel will be tightly closed with a precast fixed cover having an
opening not less than 500 mm x 500 mm which itself shall be closed with an approved
removable cover. The opening shall be located to one side of the fixed cover giving easy access
inside the manhole barrel. Step irons at intervals of 200 mm alternating from side to side
running down inside the manhole from the removable cover permitting easy descent to the
bottom of the manhole.
From the exit gully of subdrainage pipe the water shall discharge into a silt collection basin of
reinforced concrete having the design sizes of 0.50 x 3.50 Metres and a 0.80 m depth from the
pipe invert. Waters from collecting basin shall overflow via a spillway at the same level as the
pipe invert into the closest open side ditch, culvert or watercourse.

905.04. Acceptance of Works

The works shall be accepted based on the provisions of Chapter 002 provided they are
compliant with all the requirements of this specification, are approved by the Engineer and
satisfy the following tolerances.
The deviations will be no more than:
• longitudinal declivity +0,0005;
• transverse dimensions +5cm;
• bottom trench level +1cm;
• thickness of the draining layers +10%.
Measurement
Execution of trench and subdrainage, including all excavation and backfilling works, pipe
installations, gravel and filter materials, impervious membrane shall be paid per linear Metre.
The measurement shall be overall and no deduction shall be made for manholes.
Execution of manholes, including all excavation works, manhole materials, foundation,
backfilling and accessories shall be paid per linear Metre of constructed manhole measured
vertically from the top of the base to the underside of the cover slab.
Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova
208
 Execution of silt traps including any required connecting subdrains shall be measured by Pieces
of traps constructed.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all the works
indicated in this chapter.

CHAPTER 906. RETAINING WALL (NOT USED)

906.01. Introduction
The works under this chapter include: construction of the retaining walls made of reinforced
concrete cast in-situ, and the provision of drainage material and/or subdrainage pipes behind
such walls or other structures.

906.02. Materials
Concrete for the walls shall be according to GOST 26633-91*.
Reinforcement shall comply with GOST 5781-82*.
Reinforcing mesh shall comply with GOST 23279-85.
Filter surround materials for the drain - GOST 8267-93*.

906.03. Reinforcement
Reinforcing works are to be carried out according to SNiP 3.06.04-91. No reinforcement shall be
brought on to the site or used without a Quality Certificate from the producer, demonstrating the
compliance with the requirements. Any change or substitution in the category class, diaMetre,
or type of the steel, required by the Drawings or Technical Specification, must be agreed with
the Engineer. Before use, all reinforcement must be cleaned of rust, mud, dust and grease;
joints of reinforcing bars are to be executed by overlapping and in compliance with requirements
of the Technical Specification; the overlaps shall be equal at least to 30 bar diaMetres.
Where the welding of reinforcement and built-in elements is unavoidable, the work shall be
executed in accordance with the requirements of GOST 14098-91. Welding of reinforcement
shall be avoided wherever possible and shall not be carried out without the explicit permission
of the Engineer.

906.04. Concrete Works

Concrete mixing, transportation and casting, as well as concrete curing works are to be carried
out in accordance with the requirements of this Specification, GOST 26633-91* and
SNiP 3.06.04-91. No concrete mixture, which has lost its required workability, shall be used. It is
not permissible to improve the concrete workability by adding additional water into the mixed
concrete.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

209
 Any defects on exposed surfaces after removing formworks will be made good by smoothing
with sand cement mortar if the Engineer approves. If the defect is too serious for such approval
the Contractor shall remove the defective work and replace it at his own cost.

906.05. General Conditions

Concrete for the wall will be placed in lifts no higher than 1.5 m.
The walls will be performed with expansion joints where directed or instructed by the Engineer.
The expansion joints will be made of soft wood boards treated with antiseptic compounds
(preservatives).
The subdrainage shall be performed of crushed granite stone and an asbestos-cement pipe of
a diaMetre as shown on the Drawings.
The walls and subdrains shall be constructed in compliance with the Drawings.

906.06. Acceptance of Works

The works shall be accepted under the terms of Chapter 002 provided they have been
performed in compliance with the Drawings and Specifications pertaining to this scope of works
and are approved by the Engineer.
Measurement
Wall construction shall be measured in cubic metres of concrete. The measurement thus made
shall cover the whole works performed for construction of the walls including any necessary
structural excavation for construction clearance, concrete works, formworks, reinforcement,
expansion joints, curing and all other associated works.
Provision of the draining material behind the walls including all other materials shall be
measured in Metres of subdrains instructed or actually installed whichever is the less.
Where subdrainage pipes are required behind the walls or other structures they shall be
measured in Metres of subdrain instructed or actually installed whichever is the less.
The measurement of subdrainage shall include all kind of works required for installation of
draining material and/or pipes as shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer.
Payment
The works measured as indicated above and confirmed by the Engineer will be paid at the rates
provided in the contract against those items that are shown in the bid schedule. The payment
under these items shall be the whole of the payment due for the completion of all works
indicated in this chapter.

Road Sector Program Support Project, Moldova

210